61863pmcev4 PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
PMC
Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/
SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/
SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language Programming Manual, GFZ-61863E/15,
Vol. 4 of 4
February 2005
GFL-002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment,
a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation, Inc.
Alarm Master
Genius
ProLoop
CIMPLICITY
Helpmate
PROMACRO
Series Three
CIMPLICITY 90ADS
Logicmaster
PowerMotion
VersaMax
CIMSTAR
Modelmaster
PowerTRAC
VersaPoint
Field Control
Motion Mate
Series 90
VersaPro
GEnet
PACSystems
Proficy
Series Five
Series One
VuMaster
Workmaster
Copyright 2005 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
Series Six
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
B61863E/15
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s1
PREFACE
B61863E/15
PREFACE
This programming manual describes the method of generating

ladder sequence programs for PMC.
It also describes the operation methods of CRT/MDI and
SYSTEM P series for sequence programming.
Renaming of PMC
Models
This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC

models listed in the following table. Note that some models have
been renamed; in the product name column, the old names are
enclosed in parentheses, while the new names appear above the
old names. However, the previous specifications are still applied
to the renamed models. Thus, when using the renamed models,
users should:
Read the old names shown in this manual as the new names.
Read the old names appearing on the units as the new names.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name
FANUC PMCMODEL PA1
Abbreviations
PMCPA1
Applicable CNC
FANUC Power MateMODEL D
FANUC Series 21MODEL A
FANUC PMCMODEL PA3
PMCPA3
FANUC Power MateMODEL D/F/H

FANUC PMCMODEL SA1
(Note 1)
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RA1)
PMCSA1
FANUC Series 18MODEL A/B
(PMCRA1)

FANUC Series 21MODEL B
FANUC Series 20iMODEL A
FANUC Series 21iMODEL A/B
Loader control function (Note 2)
FANUC PMCMODEL SA2
(Note 1)
PMCSA2
(PMCRA2)
FANUC PMCMODEL SA3
PMCSA3
(PMCRA3)
(Note 1)

FANUC PMCMODEL SA5
(Note 1)
PMCSA5
(PMCRA5)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB
PMCSB
(Note 1)
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB)
(PMCRB)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB2
PMCSB2
(Note 1)
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB2)
(PMCRB2)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB3
PMCSB3
FANUC Series 16MODEL A/B
(PMCRB3)
(Note 1)
p1
PREFACE
Product Name
FANUC PMCMODEL SB4
(Note 1)
Abbreviations
B61863E/15
Applicable CNC
PMCSB4
(PMCRB4)
FANUC PMCMODEL SB5
PMCSB5
FANUC Series 16MODEL C
(PMCRB5)
(Note 1)

FANUC Power Mate iMODEL D/H
FANUC PMCMODEL SB6
(Note 1)
PMCSB6
(PMCRB6)

FANUC Power Mate iMODEL D/H
FANUC PMCMODEL SB7
PMCSB7
FANUC Series 16iMODEL B

FANUC PMCMODEL SC
(Note 1)
PMCSC
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC)
(PMCRC)
FANUC PMCMODEL SC3
(Note 1)
PMCSC3
FANUC Series 16MODEL A/B/C
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC3)
(PMCRC3)
FANUC Series 18MODEL B/C
FANUC PMCMODEL SC4
PMCSC4
(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC4)
(Note 1)
(PMCRC4)
FANUC PMCMODEL NB
PMCNB
FANUC PMCMODEL NB2
PMCNB2
FANUC PMCMODEL NB6
PMCNB6

NOTE
1 These models have been renamed; in the product name
column, the old names are enclosed in parentheses, while
the new names appear above the old names. However, the
previous specifications are still applied to the renamed
models.
Thus, when using the renamed models, users should :
Read the old names shown in this manual as the new
names.
Read the old names appearing on the units as the new
names.
2 PMCSA1 is applied to the loader control side of a CNC
having the loader control function.
The CNC models having the loader control function are as
follows :
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21iMODEL A/B
p2
PREFACE
B61863E/15
Other manuals
However, it does not include all items required for sequence

programming. For those required for sequence programming
refer to the following manuals.
Name of manual
Reference items
Application
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/F

CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62833EN)
Interface between PMC and CNC
PMC-PA1
PMC-PA3
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL H

CONNECTION MANUAL (B62683EN)
PMC-PA3
FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B63733EN1)
PMC-SB5
PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16/18

CONNECTION MANUAL (B-61803E)
PMC-SA1
PMC-SA2
PMC-SA3
PMC-SB
PMC-SB2
PMC-SB3
PMC-SC
PMC-SC3
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL B

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62443E-1)
PMC-SB3
PMC-SB4
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16/18/160/180-MODEL C

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-62753EN-1)
PMC-SB5
PMC-SB6
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210iMODEL A

PMC-SA1
PMC-SA5
PMC-SB5
PMC-SB6
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210iMODEL B

PMC-SB7
FANUC Series 20FA/TA

CONNECTION MANUAL (B62173E)
PMC-SA1
PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 21/210MODEL B

PMC-SA1
PMC-SA3
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B

BMI INTERFACE
CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62073E-1)
PMC-NB
PMC-NB2
FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A

PMC-NB6
FANUC PMC
C LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-61863E-1)
C language programming
PMC-SC
PMC-SC3
PMC-SC4
PMC-NB
PMC-NB2
Other application
model names
The models covered for reference by this manual, and their

abbreviations are:
Product name
FANUC PMC-MODEL P
FANUC PMC-MODEL NA
p3
Abbreviation
PMC-P
PMC-NA
CNC for
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL C
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B
Table of Contents
B61863E/15
Volume 1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PI
I. PMC SEQUENCE PROGRAM

1. SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
SPECIFICATION OF PMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATION OF LADDER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
WHAT IS A SEQUENCE PROGRAM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
CREATION OF INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS (STEPS 1 TO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CREATION OF LADDER DIAGRAM (STEP 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CODING (STEP 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SEQUENCE PROGRAM ENTRY (STEPS 6, 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SEQUENCE PROGRAM CHECK AND WRITE INTO ROM (STEPS 8 TO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
STORAGE AND CONTROL OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (STEPS 12 TO 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2. SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
EXECUTION PROCEDURE OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REPETITIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIORITY OF EXECUTION (1ST LEVEL, 2ND LEVEL AND 3RD LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESSING I/O SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Input Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2
Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3
I/O Signals to CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4
Difference of Status of Signals between 1st Level and 2nd Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5
Notes on Input/Output Signals Over a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6
INTERLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7
SEQUENCE PROGRAM PROCESSING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8
SEQUENCE PROGRAM MEMORY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
44
45
49
51
52
52
53
54
55
56
57
59
3. ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1
3.2
ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND CNC (PMCNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADDRESSES BETWEEN PMC AND MACHINE TOOL (PMCMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Addresses Between PMC and Machine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Assignment of I/O Module Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3
I/O Link Connection Unit Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4
I/O Unit MODEL B Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5
Power Mate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6
FS16iLA Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c1
79
80
80
82
89
91
92
93
Table of contents
B61863E/15
3.2.7
Distribution I/O Connection I/O Module and

Distribution I/O Operators Panel I/O Module Assignment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.8
Assignment of Builtin I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3
INTERNAL RELAY ADDRESSES (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.3.1
Area Managed by the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.4
ADDRESSES FOR MESSAGE SELECTION DISPLAYED ON CRT (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3.5
ADDRESS OF COUNTER (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.6
ADDRESS OF KEEP RELAY AND NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.7
ADDRESS OF DATA TABLE (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.8
TIMER ADDRESSES (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.9
LABEL ADDRESSES (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.10 SUBPROGRAM NUMBERS (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4. PMC BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.1
DETAILS OF BASIC INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1
RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2
RD. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3
WRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4
WRT. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5
AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6
AND. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.7
OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8
OR. NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.9
RD. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.10 RD. NOT. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11 AND. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.12 OR. STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.13 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.14 RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
124
125
126
127
128
128
128
128
129
130
131
131
131
133
5. FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
END1 (1ST LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

END2 (2ND LEVEL SEQUENCE PROGRAM END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END3 (END OF 3RD LEVEL SEQUENCE) (PMCSC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6/NB7 ONLY) . .
TMR (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRB (FIXED TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMRC (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEC (DECODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECB (BINARY DECODING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTR (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTRB (FIXED COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTRC (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROT (ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTB (BINARY ROTATION CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COD (CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CODB (BINARY CODE CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE (LOGICAL PRODUCT TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2
167
168
169
170
172
174
177
179
182
188
190
193
196
199
202
204
B61863E/15
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32
5.33
5.34
5.35
5.36
5.37
5.38
5.39
5.40
5.41
5.42
5.43
5.44
5.45
5.46
5.47
5.48
5.49
5.50
5.51
5.52
5.53
5.54
5.55
5.56
5.57
5.58
5.59
5.60
5.61
5.62
5.63
Table of contents
MOVOR (DATA TRANSFER AFTER LOGICAL SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COM (COMMON LINE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COME (COMMON LINE CONTROL END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JMP (JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JMPE (JUMP END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARI (PARITY CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCNV (DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCNVB (EXTENDED DATA CONVERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMP (COMPARISON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPB (COMPARISON BETWEEN BINARY DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COIN (COINCIDENCE CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SFT (SHIFT REGISTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSCH (DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSCHB (BINARY DATA SEARCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMOV (INDEXED DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMOVB (BINARY INDEX MODIFIER DATA TRANSFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD (ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDB (BINARY ADDITION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUB (SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBB (BINARY SUBTRACTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUL (MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULB (BINARY MULTIPLICATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIV (DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVB (BINARY DIVISION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NUME (DEFINITION OF CONSTANT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NUMEB (DEFINITION OF BINARY CONSTANTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISP (MESSAGE DISPLAY) (PMCSB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4 ONLY) . . . . . . . .
DISPB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXIN (EXTERNAL DATA INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDR (READING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDW (WRITING CNC WINDOW DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARBITRARY FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMCWR (READING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMCPA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . .
MMCWW (WRITING MMC WINDOW DATA) (OTHER THAN PMCPA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVB (TRANSFER OF 1 BYTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVW (TRANSFER OF 2 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVN (TRANSFER OF AN ARBITRARY NUMBER OF BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVD (TRANSFER OF 4 BYTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIFU (RISING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIFD (FALLING EDGE DETECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EOR (EXCLUSIVE OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AND (LOGICAL AND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OR (LOGICAL OR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOT (LOGICAL NOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMC3 R (MMCIII WINDOW DATA READ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMC3W (MMCIII WINDOW DATA WRITE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPCNT (SPINDLE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c3
206
207
213
214
219
220
222
224
226
228
230
232
234
237
239
242
249
251
253
255
257
259
261
263
265
266
268
282
293
299
302
305
308
310
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
320
322
324
326
329
332
Table of contents
5.64
5.65
5.66
5.67
5.68
5.69
5.70
5.71
5.72
5.73
5.74
5.75
B61863E/15
END (END OF A LADDER PROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CALL (CONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALLU (UNCONDITIONAL SUBPROGRAM CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP (SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPE (END OF A SUBPROGRAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JMPB (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JMPC (LABEL JUMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LBL (LABEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXCTL (AXIS CONTROL BY PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSGNL (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSGN2 (POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOP (NO OPERATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
354
358
362
6. NONVOLATILE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

6.1
6.2
6.3
TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, NONVOLATILE MEMORY CONTROL, DATA TABLE . 365
READING AND WRITING OF NONVOLATILE MEMORY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
PMC DATA TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
7. LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

7.1
ADDRESSES, SIGNAL NAMES, COMMENTS, AND LINE NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Signal Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
SYMBOLS USED IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
LADDER DIAGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
INFINITE NUMBER OF RELAY CONTACTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
374
374
375
375
375
376
377
378
8. MISCELLANEOUS ITEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

9. SEQUENCE PROGRAM STRUCTURING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
9.1
EXAMPLES OF STRUCTURED PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1.1
Implementation Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2
SUBPROGRAMMING AND NESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2
Execution Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3
Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3
CAUTIONS FOR SUBROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
381
382
384
385
385
386
387
389
10. JMP INSTRUCTIONS WITH LABEL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

10.1
10.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
11. INTERRUPTTYPE PMC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

11.1
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
c4
B61863E/15
Table of contents
11.2
SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3
INTERRUPT PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1
Interrupt Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2
Input/Output Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.3
Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.4
Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.5
Interrupt Enable/Disable/Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.6
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4
SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
404
405
405
406
406
407
407
409
411
II. PMC OPERATION (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
FOR MDI UNITS OTHER THAN STANDARD MDI UNITS

(FOR FS20 PMCSA1 AND SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC OPERATION WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOADING THE STANDARD LADDER (FOR Power MateD/F PMCPA1 AND PA3) . . . . . . .
FS15i PMCNB6 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FS16i/18i/21iB PMCSA1/SB7 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LADDER PASSWORD FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMC OPERATION FOR LOADER CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
424
424
425
425
425
426
429
2. PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE BY SOFTKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

3. PMC I/O SIGNAL DISPLAY AND INTERNAL RELAY DISPLAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . 436
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
DISPLAYING TITLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISPLAY OF SIGNAL STATUS (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE FUNCTION (TRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
Starting or Stopping the Trace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4
Trace Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5
Automatic Tracing Function at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5
DISPLAYING THE CONTENTS OF MEMORY (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
Function for Storing Data in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6
FUNCTION FOR DISPLAYING SIGNAL WAVEFORMS (ANALYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3
Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4
Signal Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5
Reading Signals Automatically at Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7
DISPLAYING THE RUNNING STATE OF A USER TASK (USRDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c5
437
439
440
441
441
441
442
443
443
444
444
445
446
446
446
447
450
451
452
Table of contents
B61863E/15
3.8
DISPLAYING AND SETTING THE CONFIGURATION STATUS OF I/O

DEVICES (IOCHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1
I/O Link Connecting Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2
I/O LinkII Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.2
Setting/Operation for Enabling Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.3
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.4
Modifying the Values of Signals by Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9.5
Setting/Clearing OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454
456
458
461
461
465
466
469
470
4. PMC PARAMETERS SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

4.1
4.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT PMC PARAMETERS FROM MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Multiple Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
SETTING AND DISPLAY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Timer Screen (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Counter Screen (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Keep Relay (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4
Data Table (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1
Other Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
473
474
474
475
475
476
476
482
484
487
490
5. PMC LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY (PMCLAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DUMP DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER DISPLAY ON LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
The Value of Functional Instruction Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMBOL AND COMMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEARCH OF SPECIFIED RELAY COIL POINTS IN LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP OF LADDER DIAGRAM DISPLAY BY TRIGGER OF SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVIDING DISPLAY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLINE EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
492
493
494
495
497
498
499
501
503
6. USER PMC SCREEN (PMCMDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

6.1
6.2
FOR THE FS16 (PMCSC, PMCSC3, OR PMCSC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

FOR THE FS15 (PMCNB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
III. PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
1.1
1.2
ABOUT THE FS15i PMCNB6 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

ABOUT THE FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7 PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
2. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

2.1
COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

c6
B61863E/15
2.2
Table of contents
CONNECTING COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
3. SELECTION OF PROGRAMMER MENUS BY SOFTKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

4. SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . 520
5. EDITING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
SPECIFYING AND DISPLAYING TITLE DATA (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.1
Entering Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Deleting Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3
Editing Character Strings of Title Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEQUENCE PROGRAM GENERATION (LADDER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Alteration of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Insert of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4
Delete of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.5
Search of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.6
Copying the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.7
Moving the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.8
Editing Symbol Data and Comment at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.9
Address Change of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O UNIT ADDRESS SETTING (MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMBOL DATA SETTING (SYMBOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1
Symbol Data and Comment Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2
Symbol Data Search (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3
Delete of Symbol Data and Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.4
Editing Character Strings of Symbol Data and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.5
Function for Editing Symbol Data and Comment Data at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.6
Function of Copying Symbol and Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE DATA SETTING (MESSAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1
Message Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2
Searching for an Address (SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3
Editing a Character String in Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4
Input with a Katakana Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5
Copying Message Data (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.6
Inputting a Multibyte Character (D.CHAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.7
Displaying Input Code (DSPMOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEARING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND CONDENSATION OF
THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1
Clearing the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2
Compress the Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3
Clearing the PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CROSS REFERENCE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2
Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
528
528
528
529
531
532
536
536
539
540
542
543
544
544
546
549
550
550
550
551
551
552
553
554
554
554
555
555
555
555
556
556
557
557
558
558
559
6. EXECUTION OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

6.1
START AND STOP OF A SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

c7
Table of contents
6.2
6.3
B61863E/15
STARTING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

FORCIBLY STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
7. WRITING, READING, AND VERIFYING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM

AND PMC PARAMETER DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
C Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1
Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2
Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3
Storage to Flash ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4
Storage to a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5
Data Input to and Output from other Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6
Setting the Transfer Speed ([SPEED] Soft Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.7
Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.8
Notes on Using an MDI Keyboard without Cursor Keys
(when using the FS20 PMCMODEL SA1/SA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEQUENCE PROGRAM COPY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1
Copy Title Data [CPYTTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2
Copy a Ladder Program [CPYLAD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.3
Copy Symbol Data and Comment Data [CPYSYM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.4
Copy Message Data [CPYMSG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.5
Copy the Sequence Programs [CPYALL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.6
Copy I/O Module Data [CPYMDL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
567
568
569
571
571
571
573
575
581
582
583
584
585
587
587
587
587
587
588
588
588
8. FUNCTIONS FOR DISPLAYING MEMORY AREAS AND DEBUGGING

THE PROGRAM (MONIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
8.1
DISPLAYING THE GDT (GLOBAL DESCRIPTOR TABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
Descriptions of Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2
DISPLAYING THE MEMORY ALLOCATION INFORMATION OF A
USER PROGRAM CODED IN C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Displayed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3
DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3
Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.4
Screen for Displaying Traced Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.5
Enabling Automatic Debugging at Poweron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.6
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4
LADDER DEBUGGING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1
Screen of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.2
Soft Key Menu of Ladder Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c8
591
591
593
594
594
596
597
597
597
598
601
601
601
602
602
603
B61863E/15
Table of contents
8.4.3
Step Operation [STEP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.4
Stop Function of Break with Condition [BRKCTL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5
ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.1
Online Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2
Setting of online connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2.1 How to set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2.2 How to set at NC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2.3 How to set at NC parameter (Power MateD/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3
Online Function by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3.1 Setting of Ethernet parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.4
Communication Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.5
About Connection Log of Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
604
605
607
608
608
609
610
611
612
612
613
615
616
9. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

10. ERROR MESSAGES (FOR I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
11. PMC PROGRAMMER (DPL/MDI) (ONLY FOR THE Power Mate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
11.1
SELECTING THE PMC PROGRAMMER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2
SETTING AND DISPLAYING SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM PARAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3
EDITING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (EDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4
EDITING LADDER MNEMONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.1
Starting Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2
Confirming the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.3
Modifying the Ladder Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.4
Ending Ladder Mnemonics Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5
STARTING AND STOPPING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM (RUN/STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6
ERROR MESSAGES (FOR LADDER MNEMONICS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7
STORING THE SEQUENCE PROGRAM INTO FLASH ROM (I/O)
(ONLY FOR THE Power MateH AND Power Mate iD/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8
ERROR DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9
INPUT/OUTPUT LADDER/PMCPARAMETER BY DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9.1
Input/Output Method to Office Programmer (PG Mate/Mark II) (Fixed 9600bit/Sec.) . . . .
11.9.2
Input/Output Method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (Fixed 4800bit/Sec.) . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.10 ONLINE DEBUGGING FUNCTION (ONLY FOR Power MateD/H AND
Power Mate iD/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.10.1 Starting and Stopping the Online Debugging Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.11 ERROR LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
623
624
625
626
626
627
628
630
631
632
633
634
635
635
635
636
636
638
IV. PMCNB6 MANIPULATION

1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
2. SOFT KEYBASED PMC MENU SELECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
2.1
PMC BASIC MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

c9
Table of contents
2.2
B61863E/15
PMC SCREEN TRANSITION AND RELATED SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
3. DISPLAYING PMC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND

INTERNAL RELAY (PMCDGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
TITLE DATA DISPLAY (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TITLE DATA EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL STATUS DISPLAY (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM SCREEN (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
Setting of Trace Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3
Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4
Operation after Execution of Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5
Comparison With the Function of FS15B (PMCNB/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6
I/O LINK MONITOR AND ALLOCATION OF I/O UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1
I/O Link Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2
I/O Unit Allocation Viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3
I/O Unit Allocation Editor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3.2 Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7
FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1.1 Input mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2
Operations to Enable the Forced I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2.1 Setting of forcing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2.2 Setting of override mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3
Forced Input/Output Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3.1 Screen structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
648
649
650
651
652
652
653
659
660
662
666
667
669
670
670
673
674
674
674
678
678
678
679
680
681
4. PMC DATA SETTING AND DISPLAY (PMCPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
METHOD FOR ENTERING PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUOUS DATA ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMER SCREEN (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COUNTER SCREEN (COUNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEEP RELAY SCREEN (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA TABLE (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
684
684
685
685
686
687
689
5. SETTING MENU (SETING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING GENERAL SETTINGS (GENERAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING THE SETTING DATA RELATED
TO EDITING AND DEBUGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCREEN FOR SETTING/DISPLAYING ONLINE MONITOR PARAMETERS (ONLINE) . . . . .
SCREEN FOR DISPLAYING SETTING DATA RELATED TO C LANGUAGE FUNCTION . . .
692
693
694
696
6. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

6.1
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

c10
B61863E/15
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Table of contents
6.1.1
Screen Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3
Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5
Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.6
Functional Instructions of Special Monitor forMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
6.2.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.4
Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.5
How to Correct LADDER Program that Never Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1
6.3.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3
Functional Instruction List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4
Functional Instruction Data Table Editor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5
Error Messages and Their Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6
Structure of Valid Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
6.4.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
6.5.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Structures of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2
Operations of Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3
How to Pick Up a Ladder Diagram Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDRESS CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1
Constitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2
The Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.3
Error Messages and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
701
703
707
710
717
719
720
722
723
728
733
738
739
740
741
745
746
750
752
753
754
757
758
760
761
763
764
765
766
767
768
770
771
771
773
7. PASSWORD PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

7.1
7.2
SPECIFICATIONS OF PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSWORD AND SWITCHING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Using One of RPassword and RWPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Using Both of RPassword and RWPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
775
776
776
777
8. WRITING, READING, AND COMPARING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

AND PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
8.1
8.2
8.3
I/O SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM MEMORY CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
MEMORY CARD LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
c11
Table of contents
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
B61863E/15
OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM FLOPPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOPPY LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUTTING TO AND INPUTTING FROM OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . .
PORT SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES (PMCNB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
788
791
795
796
799
801
9. STARTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

10. MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
10.1 MENU SCREEN OF MISCELLANEOUS DATA IN SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 VIEWER/EDITOR OF SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 Viewer Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Editor Screen of Symbol/Comment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.3 Entry Screen of Symbol/Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF MESSAGE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Viewer Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Editor Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.3 Entry Screen of Message Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.4 Alarm Message and Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 VIEWER/EDITOR SCREEN OF SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.1 Viewer Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.1.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.2 Editor Screen of System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.2.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c12
807
809
809
810
810
811
812
812
814
815
816
818
819
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
830
830
831
831
832
833
833
Table of contents
B61863E/15
Volume 2
V. FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7 MANIPULATION

1. SCREEN OPERATION FOR FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
1.1
SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMCSA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1
Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
SCREEN OPERATION FOR PMCSB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
Structure of Software Key in PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Expansion of Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3
Addition of System Keep Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
838
838
838
839
840
841
841
2. SETTING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
SWITCHING SCREENS FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SETTING SCREEN OF GENERAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULTILANGUAGE ALARM/OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAUTION SCREEN OF THE SETTING PARAMETER FOR
THE SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING PARAMETER SCREEN FOR THE SELECTABLE
I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAMMER PROTECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMCSB7: K900.1, PMCSA1: K17.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMCSB7: K900.0, PMCSA1: K17.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3
EDIT ENABLE (PMCSB7: K901.6, PMCSA1: K18.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4
HIDE PMC PARAM (PMCSB7: K902.6, PMCSA1: K19.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.5
PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMCSB7: K902.7, PMCSA1: K19.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.6
ALLOW PMC STOP (PMCSB7: K902.2, PMCSA1: K19.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.7
RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMCSB7: K900.4, PMCSA1: K17.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.8
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMCSB7: K900.7, PMCSA1: K17.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.9
IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.10 Protection of Each Function of I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE FOR SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEEP RELAYS USED IN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
843
844
847
848
849
850
851
852
852
853
854
855
856
856
856
856
858
860
3. LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

3.1
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1
3.1.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3
Setting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4
Display Format for Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
c13
866
867
869
873
879
882
883
Table of contents
B61863E/15
3.2.2
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
PROGRAM LIST VIEWER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Brief Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
883
885
885
887
888
890
4. COLLECTIVE MONITOR FUNCTION (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
CALLING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
893
894
895
898
5. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR FUNCTION (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCREEN CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCREEN OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NET EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2
Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
STRUCTURE OF VALID NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.1
Screen Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.2
Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 ALARM MESSAGE AND COUNTERMEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11
NOTE ON PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
900
901
902
905
907
907
908
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
925
6. SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
SIGNAL TRACE SCREEN (INITIAL SCREEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SETTING OF TRACE PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING OF SAMPLING ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION AFTER EXECUTION OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC START OF TRACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT OF RESULT OF TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
927
928
930
932
933
936
937
7. SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941

7.1
7.2
7.3
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

9. I/O LINK CONNECTING CHECK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
10. ONLINE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
10.1
ONLINE SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

c14
B61863E/15
Table of contents
10.2 SETTING OF ONLINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2.1 How to Set at PMC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Setting of Online Connection by NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 ONLINE FUNCTION BY ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Setting of Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 COMMUNICATION STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 ABOUT CONNECTION LOG OF ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
955
955
956
957
957
958
961
963
VI. STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTION

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
1.1
1.2
1.3
STEP SEQUENCE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
2. STEP SEQUENCE BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

2.1
2.2
TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
EXECUTION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
3. CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION OF STEPSEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . 988

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERGENCE OF SELECTIVE SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERGENCE OF SIMULTANEOUS SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END OF BLOCK STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
989
991
992
993
993
994
995
996
996
997
998
998
4. EXTENDED LADDER INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

4.1
4.2
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION TRSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

PMC ADDRESS (S ADDRESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
5. SPECIFICATION OF STEP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

5.1
5.2
5.3
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
GENERAL RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
EXCLUSIVE CONTROL FOR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
6. SCREEN OPERATION (PMCSB4/SB6/SC4/NB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

6.1
DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

c15
Table of contents
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
B61863E/15
6.1.1
Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3
Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMER SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Time Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Monitoring Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MONITOR TIME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Program Configuration List (Main Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Step Sequence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Ladder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CORRESPONDING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPATIBILITY OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1015
1016
1018
1021
1021
1022
1023
1025
1025
1026
1028
1030
1031
7. OPERATION (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

7.1
DISPLAYING OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1
Hierarchy of Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Program List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Step Sequence Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.1 Structure of screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.2 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.3 Setting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Subprogram List Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.1 Detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.2 Brief screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4.4 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
Ladder Diagram Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
Collective Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
DISPLAYING RUN STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Step Sequence State Screen (Whole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Step Sequence State Screen (Subprogram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2.1 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
TIME MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1
Time Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2
Time Monitor Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
EDITING FUNCTION OF LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1034
1035
1036
1037
1037
1038
1039
1041
1041
1042
1043
1044
1044
1044
1045
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1049
1050
1052
VII. PMC PROGRAMMER (SYSTEM P series)

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
2. FUNCTIONS OF PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
3. COMPONENT UNITS AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
3.1
COMPONENT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

c16
B61863E/15
Table of contents
3.2
3.3
CONNECTIONS OF UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYBOARD OF SYSTEM P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
LOAD Key (System Program Loading Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
F Keys (F1 to F0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
R Keys (R0 to R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Data Keys and Screen Scroll Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
SETTING OF I/O DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1060
1063
1064
1064
1065
1066
1067
4. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
System Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Loading of Floppy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4
FANUC LADDER System Floppy Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5
Programmer Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6
Parameter Setting and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Data Display and Setting (Title, Symbol, Ladder Program, Comment,
Message, I/O Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Programming from Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6
Location Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.7
Display of Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.8
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.9
Editing end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1
Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2
ROM Format Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1
Source Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.2
Paper Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3
COLLATION OF PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1
Collation of Source Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2
DELETION OF PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIAL USES OF THE R3 KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIRECT EDITING BY LADDER DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.2
Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.3
Selection of Program Menu by Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.4
Sequence Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.5
Substitution of Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.6
Additions to Sequence Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c17
1070
1072
1072
1072
1072
1073
1074
1075
1078
1078
1084
1085
1088
1089
1089
1091
1092
1092
1093
1093
1095
1098
1098
1101
1102
1105
1105
1105
1106
1107
1108
1108
1108
1108
1110
1113
1113
Table of contents
B61863E/15
4.9.7
Deleting a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.8
Searching a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.9
Copying a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.10 Moving a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.11 Symbol Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.12 Compressed Input by [COMAND] Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9.13 Ending Edit of a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 INPUT/OUTPUT OF LADDER PROGRAM WITH PG AND FLOPPY
CASSETTE/FA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.2 Setting I/O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.3 Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.4 Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.5 Program Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1116
1117
1119
1120
1121
1122
1122
1123
1123
1123
1123
1124
1125
5. FILE EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION OF COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDLIST COMMAND FILE ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RENAME COMMAND FILE ATTRIBUTE CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCRATCH COMMAND DELETION OF FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONDENSE COMMAND RELEASE OF DELETED AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVE COMMAND FILE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1127
1130
1131
1132
1133
1133
1134
APPENDIX
A. ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER PG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMCPA1/PA3/
SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOWSPEED RESPONSE AND HIGHSPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . .
LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORMATS AND DETAILS OF CONTROL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.1
Reading CNC System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.2
Reading a Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.3
Writing a Tool Offset (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.4
Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (not Supported by the Power MateD or F) . . .
B.4.5
Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value(:Lowspeed Response)
(not Supported by the Power MateD or F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.6
Reading a Parameter (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.7
Writing a Parameter (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.8
Reading Setting Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.9
Writing Setting Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.10 Reading a Custom Macro Variable (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4.11 Writing a Custom Macro Variable (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c18
1143
1143
1144
1147
1148
1150
1152
1154
1156
1158
1160
1162
1164
1166
1169
Table of contents
B61863E/15
B.4.12
B.4.13
B.4.14
B.4.15
B.4.16
B.4.17
B.4.18
B.4.19
B.4.20
B.4.21
B.4.22
B.4.23
B.4.24
B.4.25
B.4.26
B.4.27
B.4.28
B.4.29
B.4.30
B.4.31
B.4.32
B.4.33
B.4.34
B.4.35
B.4.36
B.4.37
B.4.38
B.4.39
B.4.40
B.4.41
B.4.42
B.4.43
B.4.44
B.4.45
B.4.46
B.4.47
B.4.48
B.4.49
B.4.50
B.4.51
B.4.52
B.4.53
B.4.54
B.4.55
Reading the CNC Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reading the Current Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Current Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes . . . .
Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Modal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Diagnosis Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading A/D Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life)
(not Supported by the Power Mate D, F, or Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data
(Tool Length Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (1): Tool No.) . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No. (2): Tool Order No.) . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (1) : Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information (2): Tool Order No.) . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Actual Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (:Lowspeed Response)
(not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (not available for Power MateF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . .
Reading Load Information of the Spindle Motor (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Parameter (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Set Data (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Diagnosis Data (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Character String of the CNC Program Being Executed in the Buffer . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading CNC Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Value of the Pcode Macro Variable (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Value of the Pcode Macro Variable (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . .
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (:Lowspeed Response) . .
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type)
(:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (1) :
Tool Number) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c19
1171
1176
1178
1180
1182
1184
1186
1188
1190
1192
1197
1199
1203
1205
1207
1209
1211
1213
1215
1217
1219
1221
1223
1225
1227
1229
1231
1233
1235
1238
1239
1240
1241
1243
1245
1247
1249
1251
1253
1255
1257
1259
1261
1263
Table of contents
B.4.56
B.4.57
B.4.58
B.4.59
B.4.60
B.4.61
B.4.62
B.4.63
B.4.64
B.4.65
B.4.66
B.4.67
B.4.68
B.4.69
B.4.70
B.4.71
B.4.72
B.4.73
B.4.74
B.4.75
B.4.76
B.4.77
B.4.78
B.4.79
B.4.80
B.4.81
B.4.82
B.4.83
B.4.84
B.4.85
B.4.86
B.4.87
B.4.88
B.4.89
B.4.90
B.4.91
B.4.92
B61863E/15
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number (2) :
Tool Operation Sequence Number) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (1) :
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number (2) :
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Condition (1) :
Writing the Tool Management Data (Tool Condition (2) :
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . .
Reading the Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Current Program Number (8digit Program Numbers)
(not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Diameter Offset Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing (Registering) Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number)
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Offset Number 1)
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Radius Offset Number 1)
Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . .
Reading Actual Spindle Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Number of the Program for I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset of relative coordinate (:Lowspeed response)
(not available for Power Mate and Series 21TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool group) (:Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . .
Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool data) (:Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool life counter and Tool condition)
(:Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Arbitrary group number)
(:Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Remaining tool life) (:Lowspeed response) . . .
Reading the Current Screen Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Detailed Alarm Information (:Lowspeed type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Servo Data of Control Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchange of Tool Management Data Number in the Magazine Management Table
Search of Empty Pot (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Newregister of a Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing a Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deletion of a Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading a Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Each Tool Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search of Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c20
1265
1267
1269
1271
1273
1275
1277
1281
1283
1285
1287
1289
1291
1294
1296
1298
1301
1305
1307
1315
1317
1320
1322
1324
1326
1328
1330
1333
1337
1339
1342
1344
1349
1354
1356
1360
1364
Table of contents
B61863E/15
B.4.93
Shift of Tool Management Data (:Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMCNB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368

C.1
C.2
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOWSPEED RESPONSE AND HIGHSPEED RESPONSE OF WINDOW FUNCTION . . . .
C.2.1
Functional Instruction WINDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.2
Functional Instruction WINDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3
FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDR FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.1
Reading a Tool Offset (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.2
Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.3
Reading a Parameter (Setting Data) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.4
Reading a Custom Macro Variable (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.5
Reading the CNC Alarm Status (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.6
Reading the Current Program Number (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.7
Reading the Current Sequence Number (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.8
Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.9
Reading the Absolute Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.10 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.11 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Position of Skip Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes
(Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.12 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.13 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.14 Reading Modal Data (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.15 Reading Diagnosis Data (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.16 Reading A/D Conversion Data for the Feed Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.17 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) (Lowspeed Response) . .
C.3.18 Reading the Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tool Groups)
C.3.19 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Number of Tools) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . .
C.3.20 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) (Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.21 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . .
C.3.22 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) (Lowspeed Response) . .
C.3.23 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.1)
C.3.24 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation No.2)
(Lowspeed response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.25 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.1)
C.3.26 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation No.2)
C.3.27 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . .
C.3.28 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . .
C.3.29 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.30 Reading Clock Data (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.31 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.32 Reading the Remaining Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.33 Reading an Estimate Disturbance Torque Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c21
1369
1370
1371
1373
1375
1375
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1383
1385
1386
1387
1387
1388
1394
1395
1397
1398
1398
1399
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
Table of contents
B61863E/15
C.3.34
C.3.35
C.3.36
C.3.37
C.3.38
Reading the Machining Time (Lowspeed Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reading the Load Current (A/D Conversion Data) for the Spindle Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) (Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . .
Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1)
(Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.39 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1)
(Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.40 Reading Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) (Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.41 Reading Real Parameters (Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.42 Reading the actual Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes. . . . . . . .
C.3.43 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Statistical Calculation Results). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.44 Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data (Store Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.45 Reading detailed information of CNC alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4
FORMAT AND DETAILS OF THE CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDW FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.1
Writing a Tool Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.2
Writing a Parameter (Setting Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.3
Writing a Custom Macro Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.4
Writing a Data on the Program Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.5
Writing the Torque Limit Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.6
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.7
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.8
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.9
Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Life Counter Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.10 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . .
C.4.11 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . .
C.4.12 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.13 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.14 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.15 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.16 Writing the Tool Life Management Data (Tool Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.17 Writing the Tool Offset Data According to the Specified Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.18 Writing the Superposition Move Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.19 Writing the Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.20 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Group Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.21 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Length Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.22 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Cutter Compensation Number 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.23 Writing Tool Life Management Data (Tool Information 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4.24 Writing Real Parameters (Lowspeed Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1425
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1434
1435
1435
1436
1436
1437
1437
1438
1438
1439
1440
1441
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16iLA/16iLB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449

D.1
D.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.1
Transfer Between Data Area and Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.2
Reading of the Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2.3
Reading and Writing the Laser Command Data and Laser Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1450
1451
1451
1455
1456
E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459

E.1
READING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460

c22
Table of contents
B61863E/15
E.2
E.3
E.4
E.5
E.6
E.7
E.8
E.9
E.10
E.11
WRITING THE WIRE DIAMETER OFFSET (:LOWSPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

READING THE PARAMETER (:LOWSPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITING THE PARAMETER (:LOWSPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITING SETTING DATA (LOWSPEED TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READING THE CNC ALARM STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READING MODEL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READING MACHINING DISTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READING THE MEASURED POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITING THE MEASURED POINT (:LOWSPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1462
1464
1466
1471
1472
1475
1476
1480
1481
1483
F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0iP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

F.1
READING OF TOOL SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F.1.1
Data Number, Data Attribute, Data Length, Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2
WRITING OF TOOL SETTING DATA (:LOWSPEED RESPONSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3
READING TOOL SETTING DATA BY SPECIFYING TOOL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4
OTHER WINDOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1485
1487
1489
1491
1493
G. SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION

(FROM THE PMCMODEL L/M TO THE PMCMODEL SB/SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
G.1
G.2
G.3
G.4
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODIFYING THE CONVERTED SEQUENCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.4.1
Modification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1495
1495
1495
1496
1496
H. CONNECTING THE OPERATORS PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16,

FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
H.1
H.2
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.2.1
Connecting the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.2.2
Connecting the I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.3
SIGNALS FOR CONNECTING THE OPERATORS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.3.1
Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.3.2
Override Signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and Program Protect Key Signal (KEY) . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.3.3
Key Switch Signals (Xn, Xn+2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.3.4
LED Signals (Ym) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.4
SPECIFYING ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.4.1
Parameter Menu (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H.4.2
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1498
1501
1501
1501
1502
1502
1502
1502
1503
1505
1505
1505
I. EDITING FOR Power MateMODEL D (PMCPA1/PA3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507

I.1
I.2
I.3
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPATIBILITY WITH CNC BASIC SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMC PROGRAMMER (CRT/MDI OR PDP/MDI) [LADDER EDITING FUNCTION] . . . . . . .
I.3.1
Component Units and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c23
1508
1508
1509
1509
Table of contents
B61863E/15
I.3.1.1 Component units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I.3.1.2 Connection of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I.3.1.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I.3.2
Specification and Display of System Parameters (SYSPRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I.3.3
Condense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I.4
SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF SOFT KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1510
1511
1511
1512
1512
1514
J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515

J.1
J.2
FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDERII, FANUC LADDERIII,

LADDER EDITING PACKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
FANUC LADDER (SYSTEM P SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520

K.1
K.2
OUTLINE OF LEVELED UP CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.2.1
CNC Offline Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.2.2
Offline Programmer CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.2.3
Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3
NB/NB2 DATA COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3.1
Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3.2
Data Transfer Between NB/NB2 (4048 Series) and FANUC LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3.3
Data Transfer Between NB (4047 Series) and NB (4048 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1521
1522
1522
1524
1525
1527
1527
1527
1528
L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS . . . . . 1529

L.1
L.2
L.3
MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS FROM Power MateD/H TO Power Mate iD/H . . .

MIGRATION FROM THE PMCNB/NB2 TO THE PMCNB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIGRATION FROM THE PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 TO THE PMCSB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.1
Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21iMODEL A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.2
PMC Parameter Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.2.2 Format for PMCMODEL SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.2.3 Format for PMCMODEL SB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.3.2.4 The difference between PMCSA1/SA5/SB5/SB6 and PMCSB7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.4
MIGRATION FROM THE Series 0 AND Series 21B TO Series 0iA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.4.1
Compatible With Series 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.4.2
Compatibility With Series 21MODEL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.4.3
Limited Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.5
COMPATIBILITY OF PMC BETWEEN Series15iMODEL A AND B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1530
1532
1533
1533
1540
1540
1540
1542
1545
1546
1546
1550
1551
1551
M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552

M.1
M.2
M.3
M.4
M.5
ALARM MESSAGE (PMCPA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/

SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM MESSAGE (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMCSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (C LANGUAGE FUNCTION FOR PMCNB/NB2/NB6) . . . .
SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMCSB5/SB6/NB6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c24
1553
1560
1565
1567
1568
B61863E/15
M.6
Table of contents
PMC SYSTEM ALARM MESSAGES (PMCSB7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572

O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
O.1
O.2
O.3
O.4
O.5
WHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOWHILE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOR STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF ELSE STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWITCH STATEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1577
1579
1581
1583
1585
P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND SPECIAL

CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
c25
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
A. ERROR CODES LIST

(FOR FANUC LADDER PG)
ERROR CODES LIST (FOR FANUC LADDER PG)
Error codes
Details of errors
01
Sequence program area over
02
No. of divisions has exceeded 99.
03
High level program time over
05
An error block was detected.
07
No designated step number is found.
08
An undefined instruction was specified.
09
An undefined address was specified.
10
Parameter data error
11
An address was employed in OR.STK and AND.STK.
12
An unemployable subroutine number was specified.
13
An unemployable timer number was specified.
14
A comparison error occurred.
15
A jump instruction was specified, exceeding END1 and END2.
16
A common instruction was specified, exceeding END1 and END2.
17
An instruction format error
18
An attempt was made to delete a parameter.
19
An attempt was made to add a parameter.
20
An erroneous system parameter data
21
A parameter was specified in a mode other than subroutine mode.
24
END2 is not specified.
25
WRT instruction is not specified in WRT instruction subroutine.
27
END1 is not specified.
29
A data sent from PMCSB/SC is in error.
30
R1 key is pressed during data transmission between SYSTEM P series and PMCSB/SC.
31
Input/output unit error
32
Read error
33
Hardware error of floppy disk
34
No designated file name is found.
41
An error occurred when inputting ROM data from ROM writer.
43
An error occurred when writing ROM data into ROM writer.
44
An error is deleted during comparison between SYSTEM P seriesmemory data and floppy data.
45
An error occurred when comparing ROM data with ROM writer data.
46
Key input data over
47
No designated symbol name is found.
48
A numeric value was directly specified to address parameters.
49
Counter number error
50
Decode functional instruction error
51
Symbol name (max. 6 characters) over
1139
A. ERROR CODES LIST

APPENDIX
Error codes
B61863E/15
Details of errors
52
Input data error
53
Comment data are in error.
54
Symbol table over
55
Comment data area over
56
Designated symbol name is already employed.
57
Symbol table sequence is in error.
58
Designated symbol name is not found.
59
END1 was detected in COM mode.
60
END1 was detected in JMP mode.
61
END2 was detected in COM mode.
62
END2 was detected in JMP mode.
63
END 3 was detected in COM mode.
64
END 3 was detected in JMP mode.
65
END 3 is not specified.
66
COM functional instruction was specified in COM mode.
67
JMP functional instruction was specified in JMP mode.
68
Message address error
69
Message data area over
70
Message data error
71
No symbol table is prepared.
72
NC model error in title
73
Title number error
74
Title data error
75
I/O port address error
76
Group number error
77
Base number error
78
Slot number error
79
I/O module name error
80
I/O port data are not prepared yet.
81
I/O port data were doubly specified.
82
Specified symbol or address is missing.
83
An invalid unit is loaded in the ROM WRITER or the specification of ROM WRITER does not meet the
unit.
84
ROM module type is different from the specified one.
87
Output (or input) module was specified as an input (or output) address.
88
The same slot number was specified in the same group and the same base number.
89
The model of PMC is different.
93
The number of coils is specified by the COM or JMP command. (This causes an error for PMCSA1
and PMCSA2.)
150
Parity error of transfer data (check the cable.)
151
Excessive or insufficient data to be transferred (Check the cable.)
152
An EPROM or ROM module is not inserted in the ROM writer, or specification of the ROM writer is
invalid.
153
Blank check error (Ultraviolet ray is not sufficiently irradiated or the EPROM, ROM module is defective.)
1140
B61863E/15
Error codes
APPENDIX
A. ERROR CODES LIST

Details of errors
154
Write error (EPROM or ROM module is defective.)
155
Verifyerror (EPROM or ROM module is defective.)
156
Data output level error (EPROM or ROM module is defective.)
157
Timer test error is ROM writer (ROM writer is defective.)
158
I/O test error in ROM write (ROM writer is defective.)
159
A/D converter test error in ROM writer (ROM writer is defective.)
160
Power test error in ROM writer (ROM writer is defective.)
161
Power (VPP) is defective (EPROM, ROM module or ROM writer is defective.)
162
Power supply (VCC) is defective (EPROM, ROM module or ROM writer is defective.)
163
ROM test error in ROM writer (ROM writer is defective.)
164
RAM test error in ROM writer (ROM writer is defective.)
170
An initialization error in the external memory floppy disk.
171
The inputted ROM format data is greater than the specified cassette type.
The PASCAL origin of the inputted PASCAL load module is unsuitable.
172
The specified ROM format data cannot be edited with the PG Mate.
Outputting data in the ROM format is possible, however.
1141
B. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

(PMCPA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/
SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMCPA1/PA3/

SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4)
1142
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.1
FUNCTION
B.2
LOWSPEED
RESPONSE AND
HIGHSPEED
RESPONSE OF
WINDOW FUNCTION

This window function is a functional instruction by which the data on the

CNC is read or is written.
In the way to process, there are window function high speed and one
processed at low speed.
In case of a lowspeed response, The data is read or written by the control
between CNC and PMC
Therefore, it is necessary to ACT=1 of the window instrucion must be
held until the transfer completion information (W1) becomes 1
(interlock).
In a highspeed response, it is not necessity for take the interlock because
the data is directly read.
CAUTION
The window instruction of a lowspeed response is
controlled exclusively with the other window instructions of
lowspeed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written continuously, it
is necessary to clear ACT of the functional instruction once
when the completion information (W1) become 1.
It does not work about ACT=1 of the other window
instructions of lowspeed response such as W1=1 and
ACT=1 of the window instruction of a lowspeed response.
The window instruction of a highspeed response is not
exclusively controlled like a lowspeed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written continuously,
yow need not make ACT=0.
The scan number of times to complete the processing is
summarized on the following table.
TYPE
SCAN TIMES UNTIL PROCESSING ENDS
LOW
TWO SCAN TIMES OR MORE(This depends on the state of CNC)
HIGH
1SCAN TIME
CAUTION
Enter the desired function code (to which 1000 is added
when data of the second tool post (HEAD2) is read or written
in the TT series, or when data of the second path is read or
written in twopath control of the Power MateD.
To perform path 3 read/write operation in 3path control,
enter a function code + 2000.
1143

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.3
LIST OF WINDOW
FUNCTIONS
Number
Description
Function code
R/W
Read CNC system information
Read the tool offset
13
Write a tool offset
:Lowspeed response
14
Read the work origin offset
*PM
:Lowspeed response
15
Write work origin offset
*PM
:Lowspeed response
16
Read parameters
*SB56 :Lowspeed response
17
Write parameters
:Lowspeed response
18
Read setting data
19
Write setting data
:Lowspeed response
20
10
Read custom macro variables
21
11
Write custom macro variables
:Lowspeed response
22
12
Read the CNC alarm state
23, 186 (*8)
13
Read the current program number
24
14
Read the current sequence number
25
15
Read an actual velocity for controlled axes
26
16
Read an absolute position (absolute coordinate value) on controlled axes
27
17
Read a machine position (machine coordinate value) on controlled axes
28
18
Read a skip operation (G31) stop position (coordinate value) on controlled axes
29
19
Read a servo delay amount
30
20
Read acceleration/deceleration delay amount on controlled axes
31
21
Read modal data
32
22
Read diagnosis data
33
23
Read a feed motor load current value (A/D conversion data)
34
24
Reading tool life management data (tool group No.)
*PM *21T *TM
38
25
Reading tool life management data (number of tool group s)
*PM *21T *TM
39
26
Reading tool life management data (number of tools)
*PM *21T *TM
40
27
Reading tool life management data (usable life of tool)
*PM *21T *TM
41
28
Reading tool life management data (tool usage counter)
*PM *21T *TM
42
29
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No. (1): Tool No.)
*PM *21T *TM
43
30
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No. (2):
Tool order No.)
*PM *21T *TM
44
31
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (1): Tool No.)
*PM *21T *TM
45
32
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (2): Tool order No.)
*PM *21T *TM
46
33
Reading tool life management data (tool information (1): Tool No.)
*PM *21T *TM
47
34
Reading tool life management data (tool information (2): Tool order No.)
*PM *21T *TM
48
35
Reading tool life management data (tool No.)
49
36
Reading the actual spindle speed
50
*PM *21T *TM
1144
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Number
37

Description
:lowspeed response
*PM *21T
Entering data on the program check screen
Function code
R/W
150
38
Reading clock data (date and time)
151
39
Writing torque limit data for the digital servo motor :lowspeed response
152
40
Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial interface)
153
41
Reading a parameter
*PM *21T
154
42
Reading setting data
*PM *21T
155
43
Reading diagnosis data
*PM *21T
156
44
Reading a character string of the CNC program being executed in the buffer
157
45
Reading the relative position of a controlled axis
74
46
Reading the remaining travel
75
47
Reading CNC status information
76
59
48
Reading value of the P code macro variable
*C
*SB56 :lowspeed response *TM

:lowspeed response *TM
49
Writing value of the P code macro variable
60
50
Reading the Tool life management data (Tool life counter type)
160
51
Registering the Tool life management data (Tool group)

163
52
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool life)
164
53
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool life counter)

165
54
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool life counter type)
166
55
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool length offset number (1): Tool number)
167
56
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool length offset number (2): Tool operation sequence number)
168
57
Writing the Tool life management data (Cutter compensation number (1):
Tool number)
169
58
Writing the Tool life management data (Cutter compensation number (2):
Tool operation sequence number)
170
59
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool condition (1): Tool number)
171
60
Writing the Tool management data (Tool condition (2):

Tooloperation sequence number)
172
61
Writing the Tool life management data (Tool number) :lowspeed response *TM
173
62
Reading the Estimate disturbance torque data
211
63
Reading the current program number (8digit program numbers) *PM *21T
90
64
Writing (registering) tool life management data (tool group number)

*PM *21T *TM
200
65
Reading tool life management data (tool length offset number 1) *PM *21T *TM
227
66
Reading tool life management data (tool diameter offset number 1)

*PM *21T *TM
228
67
Reading tool life management data (tool information 1)
*PM *21T *TM
201
202
229
68
69
Writing tool life management data (tool group number)
Writing tool life management data (tool length offset number 1)

1145

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Number
Description
Function code
R/W
70
Writing tool life management data (tool radius offset number 1)

230
71
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1) :lowspeed response *TM
231
72
Reading actual spindle speeds
138
73
Reading fine torque sensing data (statistical calculation results)
226
74
Reading fine torque sensing data (store data)
232
75
Specification of the number of the program for I/O Link
194
76
Presetting the relative coordinate
249
77
Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool group) :lowspeed response *TM
324
78
Deleting the Tool life Management Data (Tool data)
325
79
Clearing the Tool life Management Data (Tool life counter and Tool condition)
326
80
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Arbitrary group number)

327
81
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Remaining tool life)

328
82
Reading the current screen number
120(*8)
83
Reading detailed alarm information
186(*8)
84
Reading the servo data of the control axes
207
85
Exchange of tool management data number in the magazine management table

*SB67 :lowspeed response
329
86
Search of empty pot
330
87
Newregister of a tool management data
331
88
Writing a tool management data
332
89
Deletion of a tool management data
333
90
Reading a tool management data
334
91
Writing each tool data
335
92
Search of tool management data
366
93
Shift of tool management data
367
*SB567:lowspeed response
:lowspeed response
*SB567
*1
Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read functions specifiable with the WINDR function command. Function
codes that have W in the R/W column are window write functions specifiable with the WINDW function command.
*2
For window functions mark with Lowspeed response, reading and writing parameters, setting data, diagnostic data and so on starts
after the PMC receives the response for request of reading and writing from the CNC. On the contrary, the other window functions can
read or write data at once in response to the request from PMC.
*3
Functions marked with *PM are not provided for the Power MateD or F.
*4
Functions marked with *21T are not provided for the Series 21T.
*5
Functions marked with *SB5/6 support highspeed window response for the SB5/SB6.
*6
Functions marked with *C are not provided for the SB5/SB6/SB7.
*7
Functions marked with *TM are restricted on CNC for the compound machining function.
1. Function can not be used.
2. Function can not be used in the T mode.
Refer to each window function for details.
*8
This function code is supported only by the Power Mate iD/H.
*9
Functions marked with *SB67 can be used in the PMCSB6/SB7.
*10 Functions marked with *SB567 can be used in the PMCSB5/SB6/SB7.
1146
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4
FORMATS AND
DETAILS OF
CONTROL DATA

(1) In the explanation of the window functions, minuses () in the data

structure fields indicate that input data need not be set in these fields
or that output data in these fields is not significant.
(2) All data is in binary unless otherwise specified.
(3) All data block lengths and data lengths are indicated in bytes.
(4) Output data is valid only when window processing terminates
normally.
(5) Output data always includes one of the following completion codes.
Note, however, that all of the completion codes listed are not always
provided for each function.
Completion code
Meaning
Normal termination
Error (invalid function code)
Error (invalid data block length)
Error (invalid data number)
Error (invalid data attribute)
Error (invalid data)
Error (necessary option missing)
Error (writeprotected)
Input and output control data has the following structure.

Top address +0
Function code
2
Completion code
4
Data length (M)

(Byte length of data area)
These data set as input data are

remain unchanged in the output
data.
6
Data number
8
Data attribute
10
Data area
*Data length
Depends on the function.
1147

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.1
[Description]
Reading CNC System

Information
System information peculiar to the CNC can be read. Such system

information includes the series name of the CNC (16 as series name, for
example), the machine type applied to the CNC, such s a machining center
(M) and a lathe (T), the series code and version of the ROM containing
the CNC system software, and the number of controlled axes.
[Input data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
0
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : CNC system information has been read normally.
1148
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
0
2
(Completion code)
0
(Always terminates normally.)
4
(Data length)
14
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
Value
10
CNC series name (2 bytes)
ASCII characters
(16)
12
Machine type M/T/TT (2 bytes)
ASCII characters
( M, T. TT, . . . )
14
ROM series of CNC system

software(4 bytes)
ASCII characters
(B 0 0 0 1, . . . )
18
ROM version of CNC system

software(4 bytes)
ASCII characters
(0 0 0 1, 0 0 0 2, , . . )
22
Number of controlled axes (2 bytes)
ASCII characters
( 2, 3, 4, . . . )
NOTE
1 Data is stored from the upper digit in each lower byte.
2 In the Power MateD and F, the data corresponding to the
CNC series name and machine type are left as spaces.
3 In twopath control of the Power MateD, the data for the
first path is the same as that for the second path.
1149

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.2
[Description]
Reading a Tool Offset
A tool offset value recorded in the CNC can be read.

Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data, and tool
length offset data can be read as a tool offset.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
13
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
(a) Offset types (for machining centers, Power MateD, F)

Cutter
Tool length
Wear
Figure
If the type of tool offset need not be

specified, enter 0.
NOTE
In the Power MateD and F, read tool offsets without
specifying the classification (i.e. cutter compensation, tool
length, tool wear, and tool geometry).
(b) Offset types (for lathes)

X axis
Z axis
Tool tip R
Virtual tool tip
Y axis
Wear
Figure
1150

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool offset has been read normally.
3 : The offset number specified for reading is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
4 : There are mistakes in the data attribute that specifies the type of
the offset to be read.
6 : For the offset number specified for reading, an additional tool
offset number option is required, but it is missing.
The offset number is not available for Power MateD/F.
In addition, for the type of the offset specified for reading, an
additional tool function option is required, but it is missing.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
13
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L (Normally set to 4)
(L: Byte length of offset value)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type),,
10
Value
Tool offset value
Signed binary (A negative value is

represented in 2s complement.)
Upper 3 bytes are always 0 for virtual
tool tip
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1151
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0002
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.3
[Description]
Writing a Tool Offset

(:Lowspeed
Response)
The tool offset value can be directly written into the CNC.
Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data, and tool
length offset data can be written as a tool offset.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
14
2
(Completion code)
(Need not to be set)

4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type)
10
Value
Tool offset value

Upper 3 bytes are always 0 for virtual
tool tip
(a) Offset types (for machining centers, Power MateD, F)

Cutter
Tool length
Wear
Figure
If the type of tool offset need not be

specified, enter 0.
NOTE
In the Power MateD and F, write tool offsets without
specifying the classification (i.e. cutter compensation, tool
length, tool wear, and tool geometry).
(b) Offset types (for lathes)

X axis
Z axis
Tool tip R
Virtual tool tip
Y axis
Wear
Figure
1152

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Input data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
Diameter
specification
Diameter
specification
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
Radius
specification
Lathe
system Radius
specification
Increment
system ISB
inch system
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool offset has been written normally.
2 : The data byte length for the tool offset specified for writing is
invalid. (It is not set to 4.)
3 : The offset number specified for writing is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
the offset to be written.
6 : For the offset number specified for writing, the additional tool
offset number option is required, but it is missing.
The specified offset number is out of range. (Power MateD, F)
In addition, for the type of the offset specified for writing, an
additional tool function option is required, but it is missing.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
14
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Input data)
10
Tool offset value: Input data
1153
Value

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.4
[Description]
Reading a Workpiece
Origin Offset Value
(not Supported by the
Power MateD or F)
The workpiece origin offset recorded in the CNC can be read.

A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the first
axis to the eighth axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin offset for
a specific axis can be read, or the workpiece origin offsets for all axes can
be read at one time. If the additional axis option is not provided, however,
the workpiece origin offset for the additional axis cannot be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
15
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
N = 0: External workpiece origin offset

N = 1: G54
N = 6: G59
With addition of workpiece coordinate system pair
N=7 : G54.1 P1
N=306 : G54.1 P300
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = 0 to 6)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = axis number)
10
M = 1 to n: Workpiece origin offset number of a

specific axis. n is the axis number.
M = 1: Read for all axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1154

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The workpiece origin offset has been read normally.
3 : The specified data number is invalid because the number is not
from 0 to 6.
4 : The specified data attribute is invalid because the attribute data is
neither 1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the number
of controlled axes.
6 : There is no workpiece coordinate shift option added.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
15
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
(L: Byte length of the workpiece
origin offset value)
L = 4:
The workpiece origin offset value for

a specific axis is read.
L = 4*n:
Workpiece origin offsets for all axes are

read.
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
Value
10
Signed binary number (A negative value

is represented in 2s complement.)
Workpiece origin offset value
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1155
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.5
[Description]
Writing a Workpiece
Origin Offset Value
(:Lowspeed
Response)
Power MateD or F)
Data can be written directly as a workpiece origin offset value in the CNC.
A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the first
axis to the eighth axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin offset
value for a specific axis can be written, or the workpiece origin offset
values for all axes can be written at one time. If the additional axis option
is not provided, however, the workpiece origin offset value for the
additional axis cannot be written.
Top address + 0
L = 4 : Workpiece origin offset value for a specific
axis is written.
(Function code)
16
L = 4*n
Workpiece origin offset values for all axes

are written.
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
N = 0: External workpiece origin offset

N = 1: G54
N = 6: G59
With the option of adding Workpiece coordinate systems
N=7: G54.1P1
N=306: G54.1P300
(Data length)
L
(L: Byte length of the workpiece
origin offset value)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Offset group number)
M = 1 to n:
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
10
M = 1:
Workpiece origin offset number of a

specific axis. n is the axis number.
Write for all axes
Value
Input data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1156
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The workpiece origin offset has been written normally.
2 : The specified data length is invalid.
3 : The data number is invalid because the specified number is not
from 0 to 6.
4 : The specified data attribute is invalid because the attribute data is
of controlled axes.
6 : There is no workpiece coordinate shift option added.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
16
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
10

(Input data)
1157
Value
Signed binary number (A negative value
is represented in 2s complement.)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.6
[Description]
Reading a Parameter
(:Lowspeed
Response)
Parameter data in the CNC can be read.

There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having a
definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters holding 1byte data, word
parameters holding 2byte data, and double word parameters holding
4byte data. Therefore, the length of the read data varies according to the
parameter number specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits (one
byte) for a parameter number must be read at a time.
For axis parameters, data for a specific axis can be read, or data for all axes
can be read at a time.
Specify pitch error compensation data in data Nos. 10000 to 11023 (1024
points in total).
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operators manual of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
17
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = parameter number)
M = 0:
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1 to n: A specific axis
M = 1:
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
No axis
All axes
When all axes are specified by spindle parameters

(parameters 4000 to 4799), only two axes are specified.
42
1158

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Parameter data has been read normally.
3 : The parameter number specified for reading is invalid.
4 : The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, 1,
nor a value 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6 : Although a certain option, such as the pitch error compensation
option, is required for the data of the parameter number specified
for reading, it is not provided.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
17
2
When no axis or one axis is specified

L = 1:
Bit or byte parameter
L = 2:
Word parameter
L = 4:
Double word parameter
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n)
When all axes are specified

L = 1*n :
L = 2*n:
Word parameter
L = 4*n:
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
10
Value
Parameterdependentform
Parameter data
CAUTION
For the SB5/SB6/SB7, macro executor parameters 9000 to
9011 cannot be read.
1159

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.7
[Description]
Writing a Parameter
(:Lowspeed
Response)
Data can be written in a parameter in the CNC.

4byte data. Therefore, the length of the written data varies according to
the parameter specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be written in bit units. The eight bits (one
byte) for the parameter number must be written at a time. This means that
when a bit needs to be written, the whole data for the corresponding
parameter number shall be read first, modify the target bit in the read data,
then the data shall be rewritten.
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operators manual of the CNC.
Some parameters cause a P/S alarm 000 when data is written. (The power
must be turned off before continuing operation.)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
18
L = 1:
L = 2:
Word parameter
L = 4:
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set.)

4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n)

L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
L = 2*n: Word parameter
L = 4*n: Double word parameter
6
(Data number)
N
(N = parameter number)
8
M = 0:
No axis
M = 1:
All axes
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
When all axes are specified by spindle parameters (parameters 4000 to 4799), only two axes
are specified.
Value
10
Parameter data
1160
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Parameter data has been written normally.
2 : The data byte length of the parameter specified for writing is
invalid.
3 : The parameter number specified for writing is invalid.
nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6 : Although a certain option, such as the pitch error compensation
option, is required for the data of the parameter number specified
for writing, it is not provided.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
18
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
10
Parameter data: Input data
Value
CAUTION
Parameters may not become effective
depending on the parameter numbers.
1161
immediately

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.8
[Description]
Reading Setting Data

(:Lowspeed
Response)
The CNC setting data can be read.

There are four types of setting data in the CNC: Bit setting data having
a definite meaning for each bit, byte setting data stored in bytes, word
setting data stored in 2byte units, and doubleword setting data stored
in 4byte units. Therefore, the length of the read data varies according
to the setting data specified.
Note that bit setting data cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits (one
byte) for the setting data number must be read at a time.
For details of setting data, refer to the Operators manual of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
19
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Setting data number)
M=0:
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1162
No axis
All axes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Setting data has been read normally.
3 : The setting number specified for reading is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
19
2

L = 1:
L = 2:
Word parameter
L = 4:
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
Value
10
Setting data
1163

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.9
[Description]
Writing Setting Data

(:Lowspeed
Response)
Data can be written as setting data in the CNC.

For details of setting data, refer to the Operators manual of the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
20
L = 1:
L = 2:
Word parameter
L = 4:
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set.)

4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Setting data number)
8
M = 0:
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
No axis
M = 1: All axes
Value
10
Setting datadependent form
Setting data
1164
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Setting data has been written normally.
2 : The byte length of the setting data specified for writing is invalid.
3 : The setting data number specified for writing is invalid.
5 : Data exceeding the allowable range was specified as setting data
to be written. For example, when data outside the range from 0
to 3 is specified as the setting data to be written for I/O data, this
completion code is returned.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
20
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(N = Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data)
10
Setting data: Input data
Value
Setting datadependent form
1165

B.4.10
Reading a Custom
Macro Variable
(:Lowspeed
Response)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Description]
A custom macro variable in the CNC can be read.
Custom macro variables may or may not be read depending on the
variable type.
(1) Local variables
Local variables (#1 to #33) cannot be read.
(2) Common variables
Common variables (#100 to #149 and #500 to #531) can be read in
floatingpoint representation. When the option to add common
variables is provided, however, common variables range from #100
to #199 and #500 to #999.
NOTE
1 Power MateD (twopath control), Power MateF: #100 to
199, #500 to 699.
Memory module A of onepath control: #100 to #149, #500
to #531.
Memory module B/C of onepath control: #100 to #199,
#500 to #699.
2 On the Power Mate iMODEL D/H, common variables #100
to #199 and #500 to #699 can be read and written.
Set the variable number within these ranges as the data
number of the input data, and read and write custom macro
variables.
(3) System variables
System variables (#1000 and up) can be read in floatingpoint
representation.
For details of the custom macro variables, refer to the Operators
Manual for the CNC.
CAUTION
For the SA5/SB5/SB6/SB7, system variables cannot be
read.
1166
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Top address + 0
(Function code)
21
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Custom macro variable number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Number of decimal places)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The custom macro variable has been read normally.
3 : The number of a custom macro variable that cannot be read was
specified as the data number. Only common variables can be read
as custom macro variables by this library command.
5 : The custom macro variable is not within the range from
0.0000001 to 99999999.
6 : The custom macro option is not provided.
The specified variable number is out of range. ( Power MateD,
F)
1167

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
21
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
(L: Byte length of custom macro
variable data)
L = 6:
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
Custom macro B
The mantissa of a floating
point number is indicated in 4
bytes, and the exponent is
indicated in 2 bytes.
M = 0:
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Number of decimal places)
The number of decimal

places is not specified.
M = 1x nx 7:
The number of decimal places is specified. n
stands for the number of decimal places.
Value
Signed binary
(A negative value is represented in 2s
complement.)
10
Custom macro variable data (4 bytes)

Mantissa (custom macro B)
14

Exponent (custom macro B): The num- Signed binary
0 to 8 (no negative values)
ber of decimal digits
1168
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.11
[Description]
Writing a Custom
Macro Variable
(:Lowspeed
Response)
Data can be written in a custom macro variable in the CNC.

For details of common variables, refer to the Operators manual of the
CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
22
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
L
(L: Byte length of custom
macro variable data)
L = 6:
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Custom macro variable number)
Custom macro B
The mantissa of a floatingpoint
number is indicated in 4 bytes,
and the exponent is indicated in
2 bytes.
8
(Data attribute)
0
Value
10

14
Custom macro variable data (2 bytes) Signed binary

Exponent (custom macro B): The num- (A negative value is represented in 2s
complement.)
1169
Signed binary
complement.)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The custom macro variable has been written normally.
2 : The specified data length is invalid because it is not 6.
3 : A custom macro variable number that cannot be written as the data
number was specified.
6 : The custom macro option has not been provided.
The specified variable number is out of range. (Power MateD, F)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
22
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)
Value
10
Custom macro variable data: Input data

14
Custom macro variable data: Input data

Exponent (custom macro B): The num- Signed binary
1170
Signed binary
complement.)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.12
Reading the CNC
Alarm Status
B.4.12.1
[Description]
Except Power Mate
When the CNC is in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be read.
The following alarm status data can be read:
(1) First byte of alarm status data
7
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS
OTS
OH
SV
MALM
PS1 :
P/S alarm 100 (PWE (parameter write enable) is set to 1.)
PS2 :
P/S alarm 000 (Turn off the power before continuing operation.
Some parameters activate this alarm status when they are
written.)
PS3 :
P/S alarm 101 (The part program recording area is disordered.

This alarm is activated when the power to the CNC is turned off
during part program editing or reading of a machining program.
To release the alarm, then press the RESET key while holding
down the PROG key.)
PS
A P/S alarm other than the above alarm is generated
OTS :
Stroke limit alarm
OH
Overheat alarm
SV
Servo alarm
MALM: Memory alarm
1171

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Second byte of alarm status data

7
APAL
SPA
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
APAL:
APC alarm
SPA :
Spindle alarm

Top address + 0
(Function code)
23
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1172
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.12.2
For Power MateD/F/H
(Lowspeed type)

(1) Overview
PMC application programs can read CNC alarm information.
(2) Alarm information
1) Alarm status
Information concerning the alarm type
2) Detailed alarm
Information concerning the alarm number and axis information
NOTE
When detailed alarm is read in the Power Mate iD/H, use
B.4.83 Reading Detailed Alarm Information (*Lowspeed
type).
(3) Input data configuration
Top address+0
+2
Function
code
+4
Completion
code
Function code
+6
Data
length
+8
Data
number
+10
Data
attribute
Data
area
: 23 (fixed)
Completion code : No specification required.

Data length
: No specification required.
Data number
: Number of alarms which can be stored. (Up to 30).

If 31 or more are specified, the value is assumed to
be 30.
Data area
: No specification required.
Data attribute
: 0:
Alarm status information
Other than 0 : Detailed alarm information,

indicated in twobyte bittype data
described below (multiple bits can
be specified.)
15
Bit 0
14
13 12
11
10
bit
: P/S alarm 100 (PS1)

(PWE, parameter write enable, is set to 1.)
Bit 1

(Turn off the power. Writing data into certain parameters may
cause this alarm.)
Bit 2

(Part program storage has been disrupted. This alarm is issued
when the CNC is turned off during tape editing or machining
program reading. To release this alarm, press the RESET key
while holding down the PROG key.)
1173

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Bit 3
: A P/S alarm (PS) other than those described above has been
issued. (Up to 255)
Bit 4
: Stroke limit alarm (OTS)
Bit 5
: Overheat alarm (OH)
Bit 6
: Servo alarm (SV)
Bit 7
: Not used
Bit 8
: APC alarm (APAL)
Bit 9
: Spindle alarm (SPA)
Bit 10 : P/S alarm 5000 or greater (PS_2)

Bit 11 to Bit 15 : Not used
(4) Output data configuration
Top address+0
+2
Function
code
Function code
+4
Completion
code
Data
length
+6
+8
Data
number
Data
attribute
+10
Data
area
: 23 (fixed)
Completion code : Always 0.

Data length
: 2 when the input data attribute is set to 0 and no

alarm is issued.
2 + 4*n when the input data attribute is set to other
than 0 (n stands for the number of alarms issued).
Data number
: Same as that for the input data.
Data attribute
: Same as that for the input data.
Data area
: Twobyte bittype data when the input data

attribute is set to 0 (each bit indicates the same
information as that for the input data).
(2 + 4*n)byte data, described below, for all alarm
states specified in the input data attribute when the
input data attribute is other than 0.
2byte
2byte
2byte
4byte
4byte
Alarm number
Axis information
15
14
13 12
11
10
Bit 0 = 1 :
When an alarm is issued

for the first axis
Bit 1 = 1 : When an alarm is issued
for the second axis
Bits 2 to 15 are always set to 0.
Number
of alarms
First alarm
Second
nth
alarm
alarm
(n: Number of alarms issued)
1174
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(5) Completion code

0 : CNC alarm status has been read normally.
[Completion codes]
0 : This alarm status in the CNC has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
23
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
Value
10
2 byte bit data. For the meanings of the

bits, see [Description] in this section.
CNC alarm status data
1175

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.13
[Description]
Reading the Current

Program Number
The program number of a machining program being executed or selected

on the CNC can be read.
When a subprogram is executed on the CNC, the program number of the
main program can also be read. Note that the program number that can be
read is the first program number (first loop main program).
This function accepts only 4digit program numbers. When the
specification supports 8digit program numbers, specify function code
90 to read 8digit program numbers.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
24
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The program number of the currently executing program was read
successfully.
6:
The program number is an 8digit program number. (Use function

code 90.)
1176
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Top address + 0
(Function code)
24
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above.)
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Current program number: ON
12
Program number of main program:

OMN
Value
Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long
(a) Current program number (ON)

The program number of the program being executed is set.
(b) Program number of main program (OMN)
When the currently executing program is a subprogram, the program
number of its main program (first loop main program) is set, When
the currently executing program is not a subprogram, 0 is set.
1177

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.14
[Description]
Reading the Current

Sequence Number
The sequence number of a machining program being executed on the

CNC can be read. If sequence numbers are not assigned to all blocks of
the machining program, the sequence number of the most recently
executed block is read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
25
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1178
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The current sequence number has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
25
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4)
Note that the data length must be set to 4

bytes even though the current program
number is 2 bytes long (the sequence
number is indicated by 5 digits).
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
Value
10
Current sequence number
Unsigned binary
1179

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.15
[Description]
Reading the Actual

Velocity of Controlled
Axes
The actual velocity of a movement on CNCcontrolled axes can be read.

Note that the read speed is the composite velocity for the controlled axes.
When movement involves only the basic three axes, the X, Y, and Z axes,
the composite velocity equals the actual velocity. When movement,
however, involves the fourth axis, such as a rotation axis or a parallel axis,
as well as some of the basic three axes, the composite velocity for all the
relevant axes does not equal the actual velocity.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
26
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1180
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The actual velocity for the controlled axes has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
26
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Actual velocity for controlled axes
1181
Value
Unsigned binary
<Data increments>
SInput in mm
1 mm/min
SInput in inches
0.01 inch/min.

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.16
[Description]
Reading the Absolute

Position (Absolute
Coordinates) of
Controlled Axes
The absolute coordinates of the CNCcontrolled axes for movement can

be read.
The absolute coordinates indicate those after cutter
compensation or tool length compensation.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
27
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
M = 1 to n: Absolute coordinate of a specific
axis. n is the axis number.
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
Coordinates of all axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The absolute coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
4 : Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.
1182

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
27
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Absolute coordinate of the controlled

axis specified (4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value
10
Absolute coordinate of the first axis

(4 bytes)
14
Absolute coordinate of the second axis

(4 bytes)
18
Absolute coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)
22
Absolute coordinate of the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1183
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.17
[Description]
Reading the Machine

Position (Machine
Coordinates) of
Controlled Axes
The machine coordinates of CNCcontrolled axes for movement can be

read. The read value equals the machine coordinate indicated on the
current position display screen displayed in the CNC. (This screen can
be displayed by pressing the function button POS.)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
28
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
M = 1 to n: Machine coordinate of a specific
axis. n is the axis number.
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
Coordinates of all axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
When an inch machine is used in metric input, or when a
millimeter machine is used in inch input, the machine
position that is read with bit 0 of parameter No. 3104 set to
1 differs from the value indicated by the CNC. In this case,
therefore, the value read through the ladder must be
calculated (converted).
[Completion codes]
0 : The machine coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
the specified axis number is greater than the number of the
controlled axes.
1184

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
28
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Machine coordinate of the controlled

axis specified (4 bytes)
Signed binary
(A negative value is represented
in 2s complement.)

Value
10
Machine coordinate of the first axis

(4 bytes)
14
Machine coordinate of the second axis

(4 bytes)
18
Machine coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)
22
Machine coordinate of the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
Signed binary
(A negative value is represented
in 2s complement.)
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1185
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.18
[Description]
Reading a Skip
Position (Stop Position
of Skip Operation
(G31)) of Controlled
Axes
When a block of the skip operation (G31) is executed by the CNC and the
skip signal goes on to stop the machine, the absolute coordinates of the
stop position on the axes of movement can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
29
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
M = 1 to n: Skip coordinate on a specific axis.
n is the axis number.
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
Coordinates on all axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The coordinates of the skip stop position for the controlled axes
have been read normally.
4 : Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
axes.
1186

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
29
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Skip coordinate of the controlled axis

specified(4 bytes)
Value
Signed binary
complement.)

Value
10
Skip coordinate of the second axis

(4 bytes)
14
Skip coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)
18
Skip coordinate of the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
22
Skip coordinate of the first axis

(4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1187
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.19
[Description]
Reading the Servo

Delay for Controlled
Axes
The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified coordinates
of CNCcontrolled axes and the actual servo position, can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
30
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
M = 1 to n: Servo delay for a specific axis
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1188
Servo delay for all axes
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The servo delay for the controlled axes have been read normally.
4 : The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is
of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
30
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Servo delay for the controlled axis speSigned binary

cified (4 bytes)
complement.)

Value
10
Servo delay for the first axis (4 bytes)
14
Servo delay for the second axis

(4 bytes)
18
Servo delay for the third axis (4 bytes)
22
Servo delay for the fourth axis

(4 bytes)
1189
Signed binary
complement.)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.20
[Description]
Reading the
Acceleration/
Deceleration Delay on
Controlled Axes
The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between the

coordinates of controlled axes programmed in the CNC and the position
after acceleration/deceleration is performed, can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
31
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
M = 1 to n: Acceleration/deceleration delay for a
specific axis
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Axis number)
M = 1:
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
Acceleration/deceleration delay for all

axes
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The acceleration/deceleration delay for the control axis has been
read normally.
of controlled axes.
1190

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
31
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Acceleration/deceleration delay for the

controlled axis specified (4 bytes)
Value
Signed binary
complement.)
10

first axis (4 bytes)
14

second axis (4 bytes)
18

third axis (4 bytes)
22

fourth axis (4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1191
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.21
[Description]
Reading Modal Data
Modal information can be read from the CNC.

(1) Format and types of modal data for the G function
Data corresponding to the specified identification code is read and
stored in the data area. Whether the data is specified in the block
specified in the attribute of the data is determined by the value at the
most significant bit.
6
0
1byte
Code in a group
1byte
0: Not specified in the block

1: Specified in the block
NOTE
G codes for machining centers are also used for the Power
MateD and F except those marked with *. G codes marked
with ** are not provided for the Power MateF.
(1/2)
Data type
Identification G code for machining
center (M)
code
G00
G01
::G02
::G03
:G33
Data
Code in a
group
0
1
2
3
4
G17
G18
G19
0
8
4
G90
G91
0
1
Data type
A series
G00
G01
G02
G03
G32
G33
G34
G90
G92
G94
G71
G72
G73
G74
G96
G97
Data
G code for lathe (T, G)

B series
C series
G
series
only
G00
G01
G02
G03
G33
G00
G01
G02
G03
G33
G34
G77
G78
G79
G71
G72
G73
G74
G34
G20
G21
G24
G72
G73
G74
G75
G
series
only
G
series
only
Code in a
group
0
1
2
3
4
8
9
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
G96
G97
G96
G97
1
0
G90
G91
G90
G91
0
1
G68
G69
G68
G69
G68
G69
1
0
G94
G95
0
1
G98
G99
G94
G95
G94
G95
0
1
G20
G21
0
1
G20
G21
G20
G21
G70
G71
0
1
1192
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(2/2)
Data type
Identification G code for machining
center (M)
code
Data
Data type
Data
Code in a
group
G code for lathe (T, G)

A series
B series
C series
Code in a
group
:G40
:G41
:G42
0
1
2
G40
G41
G42
G40
G41
G42
G40
G41
G42
0
1
2
G43
G44
G49
1
2
0
G25
G26
G25
G26
G25
G26
0
1
10
11
12
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
G22
G23
G22
G23
G22
G23
1
0
G73
G74
G76
G80
G81
G82
G83
G84
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
:G98
:G99
0
1
G80
G83
G84
G85
G87
G88
G89
G80
G83
G84
G85
G87
G88
G89
G80
G83
G84
G85
G87
G88
G89
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
10
:G50
:G51
0
1
G98
G99
G98
G99
0
1
11
G66
G67
1
0
G66
G67
G66
G67
G66
G67
1
0
13
:G54
:G55
:G56
:G57
:G58
:G59
0
1
2
3
4
5
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
0
1
2
3
4
5
14
:G61
:G62
:G63
:G64
1
2
3
0
15
:G68
:G69
1
0
16
:G15
:G16
0
1
17
G40.1
G41.1
G42.1
1
2
0
18
G25
G26
0
1
G50.2
G51.2
G50.2
G51.2
G50.2
G51.2
0
1
G13.1
G12.1
G13.1
G12.1
G13.1
G12.1
0
1
19
20
G13.1
G12.1
0
1
1193

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function
Data
4 bytes
FLAG1
1 byte
FLAG2
1 byte
Number of input digits

0: Positive
1: Negative
0: A decimal point not specified
1: A decimal point specified
0: Not specified in the current block
1: Specified in the current block
Number of decimal places
The specification of whether a decimal point is specified or not, in FLAG1,

and the specification of the number of decimal places, in FLAG2, are valid
only for F code. Even if a decimal point is not specified, the number of decimal places may not be 0.
Note) As the numbers of input digits, M, S, T, and B, in a command address, the allowable numbers of digits that are specified for the appropriate parameters are returned.
M: Allowable number of digits of M code No. 3030
S: Allowable number of digits of S code No. 3031
T: Allowable number of digits of T code No. 3032
B: Allowable number of digits of B code No. 3033
Data type
Identification code
Specified address
2
Enter identification codes
100 to 126 at one time.
100
B
(second auxiliary function)
101
D
102
E
(reserved)
103
F
104
H
105
L
106
M
107
S
108
T
109
R
110
P
111
Q
112
A
113
C
114
I
115
J
116
K
117
N
118
O
119
U
120
V
121
W
122
X
123
Y
124
Z
125
M2
126
M3
1194
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

CAUTION
The Power MateD/F is not provided with the second
auxiliary function.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
32
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
N = 0 to :
(Data number)
N
(N: Data type)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Specified block )
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
N = 1:
See the identification codes of list

of data explained above.
All data for G function
N = 2:
All data for other than G function
M=0:
Current block
M=1:
Next block
M=2:
Block after the next block
20
When all data items are specified to be read, the data items are all output
simultaneously in the order specified in the above data table.
1195

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Modal information has been read normally.
3 : Invalid data is specified as the data number.
4 : Invalid data is specified as the data attribute.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
32
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 2, 6, 2*n, 6*m)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
L=2 :
G function
L = 2*n :
All data for G function
L=6:
Other than G function
L = 6*m :
All data for other than G function
(n: Number of groups for the G function)
(m: Number of types other than for the G function)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Modal data for G function (2 bytes)
See the data format for the G function.

The upper byte must always be set to 0.
Or
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Data part of modal data for other than

G function(4 bytes)
See the data format for other than the

G function.
14
Flag part of modal data for other than

G function(2 bytes)
See the flag format of the data for other

than the G function. The upper byte
must always be set to 0.
When all data items are specified to be read, the data items are all output
simultaneously in the order specified in the above data table.
1196
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.22
[Description]
Reading Diagnosis
Data (:Lowspeed
Response)
The information displayed on the diagnosis data screen in the CNC can
be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
33
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Diagnosis No.)
8
M=0:
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis number)
10
M = 1 to n: One axis
M = 1:
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
1197
No axis
All axes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Diagnosis data has been read from the CNC normally.
3 : The specified diagnosis data number is invalid.
neither 0, 1, nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6 : An option required for reading the specified diagnosis data, such
as the remote buffer option, is not provided.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
33
2
(Completion code)
?

L = 1 : Bit or byte parameter
L = 2:
Word parameter
L = 4:
Double Word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n)

L = 1*n Bit or byte parameter
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Datadependentform
Diagnosis data
1198
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.23
[Description]
Reading A/D
Conversion Data
The digital value converted from the load current of the CNCcontrolled
axis can be read. The input data from the generalpurpose analog input
can also be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
34
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Type of analog voltage)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M 1 to 8: Axis specification)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
(a) Type of analog voltage (data number)

N
Type of analog voltage
Generalpurpose analog voltage information

(for four channels)
Load information for the CNCcontrolled axes
CAUTION
Only onepath control of the Power Mate MODELD is
provided with one channel of generalpurpose analog
voltage information.
1199

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(b) Specifying a CNCcontrolled axis (data attribute)

Specify a CNCcontrolled axis for which the voltage conversion
data for the load current is to be read. Data must be specified
according to the following table (Valid with the FS16A/18A and
FS16B (interface type A)):
Specification of CNC controlledaxis
Specified data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connector in the CNC

JV1 (MAIN BOARD)
JV2 (MAIN BOARD)
JV3 (MAIN BOARD)
JV4 (MAIN BOARD)
JV5 (OPTION BOARD)
JV6 (OPTION BOARD)
JV7 (OPTION BOARD)
JV8 (OPTION BOARD)
CAUTION
For generalpurpose analog input
Other than the i series
The OPTION2 board is required. Analog input is performed
through the analog signal interface. For details, refer to the
description of the analog signal interface in the connection
manual (hardware).
i series
Generalpurpose analog input is not supported. Use the
I/O Link analog input module.
[Completion codes]
0 : A/D conversion data has been read normally.
3 : The data specified for the data number is invalid.
4 : The data specified for the data attribute is invalid, or the specified
axis number is greater than the number of controlled axes.
6 : No analog input module is connected.
1200
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Top address + 0
(Function code)
34
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Input data)
Value
10
A/D conversion data (2 bytes)

AD
For general purpose analog
Binary number from 0 to 255
10
A/D conversion data (2 bytes)

AD
For CNC controlled axis
load information
Binary number from 0 to "6554
(a) A/D conversion data (AD) of CNC controlled axis load information
The load current for the specified CNC controlled axis is converted
into analog voltage, the input to the A/D converter to output a digital
data.
The value actually set in the AD field is obtained from the following
formula:
(AD)
N + Load current [A
peak]
6554
AD = A/D conversion data [Value read by the window function (")]
N = Nominal current limit for the amplifier corresponding to the motor
For the nominal current limits, see the table below or the
descriptions of the control motor.
(b) A/D conversion data (A/D) for generalpurpose analog voltage

information
In A/D conversion data (A/D), 0 corresponds to 10V, 128
corresponds to 0V, 255 corresponds to +10V, and other values
correspond in a direct proportion to these values.
(AD * 128)
N + Load current [A
peak]
128
AD = A/D conversion data [Value read by the window function (")]

N = Nominal current limit for the amplifier corresponding to the motor
For the nominal current limits, see the table below or the descriptions of the control motor.
1201

Servo amplifier module

Model
APPENDIX
Applicable motor model
Nominal current limit
Connected axis
SVM112
SVM212/12
SVM212/20
SVM212/40
SVM312/12/12
SVM312/12/20
SVM312/20/20
SVM312/12/40
SVM312/20/40
L and M axes
L axis
L axis
L, M, and N axes
L and M axes
L axis
L and M axes
L axis
SVM120
SVM212/20
SVM220/20
SVM220/40
SVM312/12/20
SVM312/20/20
SVM320/20/20
SVM312/20/40
SVM320/20/40
M axis
L and M axes
L axis
N axis
M and N axes
L, M, and N axes
M axis
L and M axes
12Ap
0.5/3000
1/3000
2/2000
2/3000
20Ap
C3/2000
C6/2000
C12/2000
3/3000
6/2000
M3/3000
L3/3000
40Ap
3/3000
6/2000
12/2000
M3/3000
L3/3000
C22/1500
40Ap
3/3000
6/2000
12/2000
22/1500
M3/3000
L3/3000
C22/1500
40Ap
6/3000
12/3000
22/2000
30/1200
M6/3000
M9/3000
L6/3000
L9/3000
80Ap
30/2000
40/2000
22/3000
30/3000
40/2000 (with a fan)
L25/3000
L50/2000
130Ap
SVM140S
SVM212/40
SVM220/40
SVM240/40
SVM312/12/40
SVM312/20/40
SVM320/20/40
M axis
M axis
M axis
N axis
N axis
N axis
SVM140L
SVM240/80
L axis
SVM180
SVM240/80
SVM280/80
L axis
L and M axes
SVM1130
B61863E/15
NOTE
1 The current limits (peak values) are standard values. The operation value variation due to a
circuit constant is about +10%.
2 SVM1130 requires forced air cooling when the 22/3000, 30/3000, 40/2000 (with a fan),
L25/3000, or L50/2000 is driven.
1202
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.24
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Group No.)
By specifying a tool No., the No. of the tool group to which the specified
tool belongs can be read from tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
38
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool No., the No. of the tool group
currently used is read. In this case, if a tool group No. has
not been specified since the power to the CNC was turned
on, 0 is output.
If the same tool belongs to two or more tool groups, the Nos.
of all tool groups to which the tool belongs are displayed.
1203

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool group No. has been read normally.
4 : The value specified for the data attribute is invalid.
5 : The specified tool No. was not found.
6 : The tool life management option has not been added.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
38
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4
n)
L = 4 to 4
n
n is the number of tool groups to
which the specified tool belongs.
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Tool group No. (4 bytes)
Unsigned binary
When the specified tool belongs to two or more tool groups
10
14
18
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1 This cannot be used with those models that do not have the
tool life management function.
2 Tool life management data is not applied to the T mode of
the compound machining function.
1204

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.25
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Number of Tool
Groups)
The number of tool groups in tool life management data can be read.
The number of tool groups that can be registered varies depending on the
setting of parameter 6800 of the CNC, as indicated in the following table.
Parameter 6800
GS2
GS1
Number of tools
The numbers in parentheses apply when the additional
option is used
M series
T series
1 to 16 (1 to 64)
1 to 16 (1 to 16)
1 to 32 (1 to 128)
1 to 32 (1 to 32)
1 to 64 (1 to 256)
1 to 64 (1 to 64)
1 to 128 (1 to 512)
1 to 16 (1 to 128)
M series: For Machining Centers

Top address + 0
(Function code)
39
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1205
T series: For Lathes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The number of tool group Nos. has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
39
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Number of tool groups (4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1206

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.26
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Number of Tools)
By specifying a tool group No., the number of tools that belong to the tool
group can be read from tool life management data.
The number of tools that can be registered varies depending on the setting
of parameter 6800 of the CNC, as indicated in the following table.
Parameter 6800
GS2
GS1
Number of tools
The numbers in parentheses apply when the additional
option is used
M series
T series
1 to 16 (1 to 64)
1 to 16 (1 to 16)
1 to 32 (1 to 128)
1 to 32 (1 to 32)
1 to 64 (1 to 256)
1 to 64 (1 to 64)
1 to 128 (1 to 512)
1 to 16 (1 to 128)
M series: For Machining Centers

Top address + 0
(Function code)
40
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1207
T series: For Lathes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool group No., the number of tools
that belong to the tool group currently used is read. In this
case, if a tool group No. has not been specified since the
power to the CNC was turned on, 0 is output.
[Completion codes]
0 : The number of tools has been read normally.
3 : The specified tool group No. is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
40
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Number of tools (4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1208
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.27
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Life)
Power Mate D, F, or
Series 21TA)
By specifying a tool group No., the life of tools belonging to the tool
Whether to display the tool life in minutes or the number of cycles is
selected by bit 2 of parameter 6800 (LTM) for the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
41
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool group No., the tool life of the tool
group currently used is read. In this case, if a tool group No.
has not been specified since the power to the CNC was
turned on, 0 is output.
1209

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool life has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
41
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Value
Unsigned binary
Unit: Time (minutes) or
number of cycles
Tool life (4 bytes)
NOTE
the compound machining function. And compound
machining function is not applied to the function of tool life
management data B.
1210
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.28
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Life Counter)
By specifying a tool group No., the tool life counter for the specified tool

Top address + 0
(Function code)
42
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool group No., the tool life counter
for the tool group currently used is read. In this case, if a tool
group No. has not been specified since the power to the
CNC was turned on, 0 is output.
1211

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool life has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
42
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Value
Unsigned binary
Unit: Time (minutes) or
number of cycles
Tool life counter (4 bytes)
NOTE
management data B.
1212
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.29
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Length
Compensation No. (1):
Tool No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the tool length
compensation No. for the specified tool can be read from tool life
management data. This function is available only with the M series
CNCs.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
43
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for both the tool group No. and tool No., the
Nos. of the tool group and tool currently used are read. In
this case, if a tool group No. has not been specified since
the power to the CNC was turned on, 0 is output.
For the T series CNCs, 0 is always output.
1213

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool length compensation No. has been read normally.
4 : The specified tool No. is invalid.
5 : The specified tool No. was not found in the specified tool group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
43
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
Tool length compensation No. (4 bytes)
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1214
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.30
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Length
Compensation No. (2):
Tool Order No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and tool order No., the tool length
compensation No. for the specified tool can be read from tool life
management data. This function is available only with the M series CNCs.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
44
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool order No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for the tool group No., the No. of the tool
group currently used is read. In this case, if a tool group No.
has not been specified since the power to the CNC was
turned on, 0 is output.
When 0 is specified for the tool order No., if the specified tool
group has been used, the tool currently used is read. In this
case, if the specified tool group has not been used, the first
tool in the group is read.
1215

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool length compensation No. has been read normally.
4 : The specified tool order is invalid.
5:
The tool having the specified tool order is not registered in the
specified tool group.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
44
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
Tool length compensation No. (4 bytes)
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1216
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.31
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Cutter Compensation
No. (1): Tool No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the cutter compensation
No. for the specified tool can be read from tool life management data.
This function is available only with the M series CNCs.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
45
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Tool No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for both tool group No. and tool No., the Nos.
of the tool group and tool currently used are read. If a tool
For the T series CNCs, 0 is always read.
1217

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The cutter compensation No. has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
45
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Cutter compensation No. (4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1218
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.32
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
No. (2): Tool Order No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the cutter compensation
No. for the specified tool can be read from tool life management data. This
function is available only with the M series CNCs.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
46
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool order No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
group currently used is referenced. In this case, if a tool
group has been used, the tool currently used is read. In this
case, if the specified tool group has not been used, the first
tool in the group is referred to.
1219

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The cutter compensation No. has been read normally.
4 : The specified tool order No. is invalid.
5:

Top address + 0
(Function code)
46
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Cutter compensation No. (4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1220
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.33
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Information (1) :
Tool No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool No., the information for the
specified tool can be read from tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
47
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
If 0 is specified for both tool group No. and tool No., the Nos.
of the tool group and tool currently used are referenced.
If neither a tool group No. nor a tool No. has been specified
since the power to the CNC was turned on, 0 is output.
1221

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
47
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Number of tools (4 bytes)
Value
0: See Note) on the previous page.
1: The tool is registered.
2: The tool has reached the end of its life.
3: The tool was skipped.
The three highorder bytes are fixed to 0.
NOTE
1222
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.34
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Information (2):
Tool Order No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the information for
the specified tool can be read from tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
48
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool order No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
group currently used is read. If a tool group No. has not
been specified since the power to the CNC was turned on,
0 is output.
group has ever been used, the tool currently used is read.
In this case, if the specified tool group has not been used,
the first tool in the group is referred to.
1223

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
5:

Top address + 0
(Function code)
48
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Tool information (4 bytes)
Value
0: See Note) on the previous page.
1: The tool is registered.
2: The tool has reached the end of its life.
3: The tool was skipped.
The three highorder bytes are fixed to 0.
NOTE
1224
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.35
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool No.)
By specifying a tool group No. and a tool order No., the No. of the
corresponding tool can be read from tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
49
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Tool group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Tool order No.)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
CAUTION
When 0 is specified for the tool group No., the tool group
currently used is referenced. If neither a tool group No. nor
a tool No. has been specified since the power to the CNC
was turned on, however, 0 is output for the tool group No.
group has been used, the tool currently used is referred to.
If the specified tool group has not been used, the first tool
in the group is referenced.
1225

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool No. has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
49
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Tool No. (4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
NOTE
1226
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.36
[Description]
Reading the Actual

Spindle Speed
The actual speed of the spindle can be read from the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
50
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1227

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The actual speed of the spindle has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
50
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Actual spindle speed
Value
Unsigned binary
<Data unit>
min1
1228
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.37
[Description]
Entering Data on the

Program Check Screen
(:Lowspeed
Response)
(not available for
Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA)
On the program check screen of the CNC, data can be entered for the
spindle tool No. (HD.T) and the next tool No. (NX.T). This function is
available only with the M series CNCs.
This function is effective only when bit 2 of parameter 3108 is 1.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
150
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
4
6
N = 0 : Spindle tool No. (8 digits)
(Data number)
N
(N = 0, 1)
N = 1 : Next tool No. (8 digits)
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
Value
Data for the spindle tool No.

(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)
1229
Unsigned binary

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Data has been entered on the program check screen normally.
2 : The data length in bytes is invalid.
3 : The data No. is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
150
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
(Input data)
6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)
N = 0 : Spindle tool No. (8 digits)

N = 1 : Next tool No. (8 digits)
8
(Data attribute)
(Input data)
10
Data for the spindle tool No.

(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)
1230
Value
Unsigned binary
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.38
[Description]
Reading Clock Data

(Date and Time)
(not available for
Power MateF)
The current date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes, seconds)
can be read from the clock built into the CNC.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
151
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = 0, 1)
8
N = 1:
Reads current date and time.
N = 0:
Reads current date.
N = 1:
Reads current time.
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : Data of the clock built into the CNC has been read normally.
3 : A value other than 0, 1, and 1 was specified for the data No.
1231

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
151
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
6/12
6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
(Input data)
10
12
14
Value
Current date (year) or time (hours)
Unsigned binary
Current date (month) or time (minutes)
Current date (day) or time (seconds)
When both the current date and current time are specified to be read by entering [1] for the data No.
(Input data)
10
12
14
16
18
20
Value
Current date (year)
Unsigned binary
Current date (month)

Current date (day)
Current time (hours)
Current time (minutes)
Current time (seconds)
[Example] September 10th, 1990

Data area
+2
+4
[Example] 23:59:59
(hours:minutes:seconds)
Data area
23
1990
+2
+4
10
1232
59
59
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.39
[Description]
Entering Torque Limit

Data for the Digital
Servo Motor
(:Lowspeed
Response)
Torque limit values for the digital servo motor can be entered.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
152
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: 1 to n)
M = 1 to n: Axis No.
Value
10
Torque limit data

Unsigned binary
(1 byte)
<Unit: %>
The highorder byte is always set to 0. Values from 0 to 255 correspond to 0%
to 100%.
NOTE
When calculating the torque limit data, assume that the
shorttime rating is 100%.
[Example] To specify a torque limit of 50%, enter 128.
1233

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Torque limit data has been entered normally.
4 : The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than
1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis No. was
greater than the number of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
152
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
(Input data)
6
(Data number)
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Torque limit data (1 byte): Input data

Unsigned binary
The highorder byte is always set to 0. <Unit: %>
Values from 0 to 255 correspond to 0%
to 100%.
1234

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.40
[Description]
Reading Load
Information of the
Spindle Motor (Serial
Interface)
Load information of the serial spindle can be read.

The equation to normalize the load information is shown below
Load (%) +
L
32767
L:
Data read from the window
The percentage of the maximum output of the motor to the

continuous rated output of the motor (When the maximum output
is 180% and the continuous rated output is 100%, the percentage
is 180.)
CAUTION
is equal to the value of parameter No. 4127.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
153
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
N= 0:
1:
2:
3:
1:
2:
3:
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1235
Read the load of the No.1 spindle.

Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
Read the loads of the No.1 to No.3 spindles.

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Load information of the serial spindle has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
153
2
(Completion code)
?
L = 2:
L = 4:
L = 6:
L = 8:
N= 0:
1:
2:
3:
1:
2:
3:
(Data length)
L
(L = 2, 4)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
10
Specifies the first axis.

Specifies the second axis. (When the N is 1.)
Specifies the third axis. (When the N is 2.)
Specifies the fourth axes. (When the N is 3.)
Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
Value
Load information of the serial spindle

(first or second axis)
When two axes are specified

8
(Data attribute)
10
12
Value
First axis in the load information of the

serial spindle
Second axis in the load information of

the serial spindle
1236
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

When three axes are specified

8
(Data attribute)
10
12
14
Value

serial spindle

the serial spindle
Third axis in the load information of the
serial spindle
When four axes are specified

8
(Data attribute)
10
12
14
16
Value

serial spindle
the serial spindle
Third axis in the load information of the
serial spindle
Fourth axis in the load information of
the serial spindle
1237

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.41
[Description]
Reading a Parameter
(not available for
Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA)
Parameter data in the CNC can be read directly from the CNC via the
FANUC bus.
This function is basically the same as the function described in Section
B.4.6 Reading a Parameter, except that the function code is 154 and
some of the completion codes are different.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
154
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Parameter No.)
M=0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis No.)
: No axis
M = 1 to n : Specific axis
M = 1
10
: All axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
3 : The parameter No. specified to be read is invalid.
4 : A value other than 0, 1, and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified
for the data attribute.
6 : An option required for setting the parameter to be read, such as the
pitch error compensation option, is not provided.
1238
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.42
[Description]
Reading Set Data

(not available for
Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA)
Set data stored in the CNC can be read directly from the CNC via the
FANUC bus.
B.4.8 Reading Set Data, except that the function code is 155 and some
of the completion codes are different.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
155
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Setting data No.)
M=0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis No.)
: No axis
M = 1
10
: All axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : Set data has been read normally.
3 : The set data No. specified to be read is invalid.
1239

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.43
[Description]
Reading Diagnosis
Data (not available for
Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA)
Data displayed on the diagnosis data screen of the CNC can be read
directly from the CNC via the FANUC bus.
B.4.22 Reading Diagnosis Data, except that the function code is 156
and some of the completion codes are different.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
156
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N: Diagnosis No.)
M=0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis number)
: No axis
M = 1
10
: All axes
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : Diagnosis data has been read normally from the CNC.
3 : The diagnosis No. specified to be read is invalid.
6 : An option required for using the diagnosis data to be read, such
as the remote buffer option, is not provided.
1240
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.44
[Description]
Reading a Character
String of the CNC
Program Being
Executed in the Buffer
In a machining program being executed on the CNC, the block currently

executed, the next block, and the next block but one can be read in the
CNC program format. That is, these blocks can be read in the form of a
character string of ASCII codes. This function is available only with the
M series CNCs.
Comments in a block can also be read.
The maximum number of characters in a character string is fixed to 64.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
157
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
(Need not be set)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Specified block)
10
M=0
: Current block
M=1
: Next block
M=2
: Next block but one
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
74
NOTE
1 When data specified by the NC is a macro statement, the
character string cannot be read correctly.
2 When data attribute M is set to 2, the next block but one can
be read only when the next block is an instruction for cutter
compensation C.
1241

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The character string of the CNC program being executed in the
buffer has been read normally.
4 : The value specified for the data attribute is invalid.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
157
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
64
64 characters
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Specified block)
10
11
NC command data for the first character

RC(1)
NC command data for the second
character
RC(2)
X
X
73
ASCII code
If a block consists of less than 64
characters, the remaining bytes are
filled with 20H (space).
X
X
NC command data for the 64th character

RC(64)
1242
X
X

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.45
[Description]
Reading the Relative

Position on a
Controlled Axis
The relative coordinates of the machine moving along an axis controlled

by the CNC can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
74
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
M = 1 to n : Reads the relative coordinates of

each axis. n is an axis No.
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis number)
M = 1 :
10
Reads the relative coordinates of

all axes.
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The relative coordinates on the controlled axis have been read
normally.
1 and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis
No. was greater than the number of controlled axes.
1243

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
74
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Value
Relative coordinates on the specified

controlled axis (4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Value
10
14
18
22
Relative coordinates on the first axis

(4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Relative coordinates on the second

axis (4 bytes)
Relative coordinates on the third axis
(4 bytes)
Relative coordinates on the fourth axis
(4 bytes)
Output data unit

Input system
Increment system ISB
Increment system ISC
mm, deg system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg system

inch system
Double values can be read for a machining center system or when radius
specification is used for the relevant axis of a lathe system.
1244
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.46
[Description]
Reading the Remaining

Travel
The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the CNC
can be read. The read value equals the remaining travel indicated on the
current position display screen on the CNC. (This screen can be called
by pressing the function button POS.)
Top address + 0
(Function code)
75
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
M = 1 to n: Reads the remaining travel along

each axis. n is an axis No.
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis number)
M = 1 :
10
Reads the remaining travel along all

axes.
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
[Completion codes]
0 : The remaining travel along the controlled axis has beenread
normally.
1 and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis
No. was greater than the number of controlled axes.
1245

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
75
2
(Completion code)
?
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
10
Remaining travel along the specified

controlled axis (4 bytes)
Value
Signed binary
complement.)
Value
10
14
18
22
Remaining travel along the first axis

(4 bytes)
Signed binary
complement.)
Remaining travel along the second

axis (4 bytes)
Remaining travel along the third axis
(4 bytes)
Remaining travel along the fourth axis
(4 bytes)
Output data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Power MateD, F
Radius
specification
Diameter
Lathe specification
system Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.0005
0.00005
0.0001
0.00001
0.00005
0.000005
mm, deg
system
inch system
In the above table, when a machining center system is used or the radius
is specified for the corresponding axis of the lathe system, double the
value is read.
1246

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.47
[Description]
Reading CNC Status

Information
Status information (status indication on the screen) can be read from the
CNC.
The types of status information that can be read are as follows.
(1) Indication of which mode is selected, automatic or manual
(2) Status of automatic operation
(3) Status of movement along the axis and dwelling
(4) Status of M, S, T, and B functions
(5) Statuses of emergency stop and the reset signal
(6)
Alarm status
(7) Status of program edit

(Indication)
13
(1)
EDIT
14
(5)
EMG
(3)
(4)
MTN
FIN
(2)
STOP
(6)
ALM
(7)
READ
16:52:13
(Soft key indication)
15
00
05
10
15
20
15
25
30

Top address + 0
(Function code)
76
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
42
1247
14
35

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : CNC status information has been read normally.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
76
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
14
6
(Data number)
(Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
(Input data)
10
12
Indication of which mode is currently

selected, automatic or manual
(2 bytes)
Value
0 : MDI
1 : MEMory
2 : **** (Other states)
3 : EDIT
4 : HaNDle
5 : JOG
6 : Teach in JOG
7 : Teach in HND
8 : INC. feed
9 : REFerence
10: ReMoTe
Status of automatic operation (2 bytes) 0

1
2
3
: **** (Reset states)

: STOP
: HOLD
: STaRT
14
Status of movement along the axis or

dwelling (2 bytes)
0 : *** (Other states)

1 : MoTioN
2 : DWell
16
Status of M, S, T, and B functions

(2 bytes)

1 : FIN
18
Status of emergency stop (2 bytes)
0 : (Releases the emergency stop state)

1 : EMerGency
2 : RESET
(The reset signal is on.)
20
Alarm status (2 bytes)

1 : ALarM
2 : BATtery low
Status of program edit (2 bytes)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
22
1248
: ******* (Non editing)

: EDIT
: SeaRCH
: OUTPUT
: INPUT
: COMPARE
: LabelSKip
: OFST
: WSFT
: ReSTaRt
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.48
[Description]
Reading Value of the

Pcode Macro Variable
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function gets the value of variable for Macrocompiler (Pcode

macro variable) of specified number.
The extended Pcode macro variable is not able to be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
59
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
N
(Pcode macro variable number)
+ 10
(Data attribute)
0
+ 12
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

+ 18
CAUTION
The Data number occupies 4 bytes instead of 2 bytes of
usual data structure.
1249

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to read the value of Pcode macro variable.
3 : The Pcode macro variable specified by Data number is not able
to be read.
5 : The value of the Pcode macro variable is out of range
("0.0000001 "99999999).
6 : No option, or no Macro ROM module.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
59
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above)
+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
(Same as input data)
+ 10
(Data attribute)

+ 12
+ 16
Value of Pcode macro variable

(4bytes)
Value
Signed binary
(Minus number is represented by 2s
complemental)
Figures after decimal point of the value Signed binary

(2bytes)
complemental)
1250
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.49
[Description]
Writing Value of the

Pcode Macro Variable
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function stores the value into the variable for Macrocompiler
(Pcode macro variable) of specified number.
The extended Pcode macro variable is not able to be written into.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
60
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
(Pcode macro variable number)
+ 10
(Data attribute)
0
+ 12
+ 16

(4bytes)
Value
Signed binary
complemental)
Figures after decimal point of the value Signed binary

(2bytes)
complemental)
CAUTION
The data number occupies 4 bytes instead of 2 bytes of
usual data structure.
1251

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to store the value into Pcode macro variable.
2 : The data length has illegal data (is not 6).
3 : The Pcode macro variable specified by Data number is not able
to be written.
6 : No option, or no Macro ROM module.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
60
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
+ 10
(Data attribute)

+ 12
(4bytes)
+ 16
Figures after decimal point of the value

(2bytes)
1252
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.50
[Description]
Reading the Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Life Counter
Type)
This function gets the Tool life counter type of specified tool group in the
Tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
160
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
N
(N = Tool group number)
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+ 10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

+ 12
CAUTION
About Tool group number (in Data number)
0 as Tool group number indicates the Tool group currently
used.
When Tool group has never specified since poweron, 0
of Tool group number results 0 as counter type.
0 of counter type will be returned on T series.
1253

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to read the Tool life counter type.
3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 0 to 512, or exceeds
the maximum number of registered Tool group.
6 : No option for Tool life management.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
160
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)

+ 10
Tool life counter type (2bytes)
Value
0 : No counter type
1 : Frequency
2 : Real time (in minutes)
NOTE
1254
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.51
[Description]
Registering the Tool

Life Management Data
(Tool Group)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function registers the Tool group in Tool life management data, with
Tool number, length of life and Tool life counter type. On T series, the
Tool life counter type will be specified by the NC parameter LTM
(No.6800#2), and this function cannot set/change the counter type.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
163
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
+ 10
+ 12
+ 14
Tool group number

(2bytes)
Tool life counter type
(2bytes)
Tool life (4bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
1512
1 : Frequency
2 : Real time in minutes
Unsigned binary
19999 (Frequency)
14300 (Real time in minutes: 1count/4sNote)
NOTE
The tool life count is changed by parameter 6801#5.
6801#5 = 0 : the life is counted every 4seconds.
6801#5 = 1 : the life is counted every 1second.
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to register the Tool group.
4 : The Tool number in Data attribute has wrong value.
5 : The length of Tool life in Data area is out of range. The Tool life
counter type does not match on T series.
1255

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
163
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)

+8
(Data attribute)
M
+ 10
Tool group number (2bytes)
+ 12
+ 14

Length of Tool life (4bytes)

NOTE
1256
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.52
[Description]
Writing the Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Life)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the length of Tool life of the specified Tool group in the
Tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
164
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Tool life (4bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
19999 (Frequency)
Case of Tool life management data B
1999999 (Frequency)
1100000 (Real time in minutes)
NOTE
1257

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the length of Tool life.
5 : The length of Tool life is out of range.
13 : The data of the currently selected tool group or the next tool group
cannot be rewritten. An attempt was made to rewrite the data of
the currently selected tool group or the next group.
Top address +0
(Function code)
164
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)

+10
NOTE
management data B.
1258
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.53
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Life Counter)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool life counter in the specified Tool group in the
Tool life management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
165
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Tool life counter (4bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
19999 (Frequency)
Case of Tool life management data B
1999999 (Frequency)
NOTE
1259

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool life counter.
5 : The value for Tool life counter is out of range.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
165
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)

+10
NOTE
management data B.
1260
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.54
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Life Counter
Type) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool life counter type of specified Tool group in the
Tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
166
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
1261
Value
1 : Frequency
2 : Real time in minutes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool life counter type.
5 : The value for Tool life counter type is wrong.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
166
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)

+10
NOTE
1262
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.55
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Length Offset
Number (1) : Tool
Number) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool length offset number of the specified Tool
group in the Tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
167
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
+10
Tool length offset number (4bytes)
1263
Value
Unsigned binary
1255

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool length offset number.
5 : The Tool number is not found in the Tool group.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
167
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
CAUTION
The effective value for Tool length offset number depends
on Tool compensation number available on NC.
NOTE
1264
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.56
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Length Offset
Number (2) : Tool
Operation Sequence
Number) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool length offset number of the Tool of the
specified Tool operation sequence number in the Tool life management
data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
168
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool operation sequence number)
+10
1265
Value
Unsigned binary
1255

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool length offset number.
4 : The Tool operation sequence number is wrong.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
168
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
CAUTION
The effective value for Tool length offset number depends
on Tool compensation number available on NC.
NOTE
1266
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.57
[Description]

Management Data
Number (1) : Tool
Number) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Cutter compensation number of the specified Tool
group in the Tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
169
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
+10
Cutter compensation number (4bytes)
1267
Value
Unsigned binary
1255

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Cutter compensation number.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
169
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
CAUTION
The effective value for Cutter compensation number
depends on Tool compensation number available on NC.
NOTE
1268
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.58
[Description]

Management Data
Number (2) : Tool
Operation Sequence
Number) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Cutter compensation number of the Tool of the
specified Tool operation sequence number in the Tool life management
data. (M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
170
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
1269
Value
Unsigned binary
1255

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Cutter compensation number.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
170
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
CAUTION
The effective value for Cutter compensation number
depends on Tool compensation number available on NC.
NOTE
1270
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.59
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Condition (1) :
Tool Number)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool condition of the specified Tool group in the
Tool life management data.(M series only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
171
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Tool number)
+10
Tool condition (2bytes)
Value
1 : Tool state clear
2 : Tool state skip
1271

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool condition.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
171
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
This function changes Tool condition as below.

command
before call
after call
clear
skip
skip
consumed
(#)
(#)
(*)
usable
in use
usable
( )
(@)
( )
skip
unused
in use
consumed
( )
(@)
(*)
skip
skip
skip
(#)
(#)
(*)
NOTE
1272
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.60
[Description]
Writing the Tool

Management Data
(Tool Condition (2) :
Tool Operation
Sequence Number)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the Tool condition of the Tool of the specified Tool
operation sequence number in the Tool life management data. (M series
only)

Top address + 0
(Function code)
172
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Value
1 : Tool state clear
2 : Tool state skip
1273

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Tool condition.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
172
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
This function changes Tool condition as shown in B.4.59.

NOTE
1274
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.61
[Description]

Management Data
(Tool Number)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function registers a tool to the specified Tool group in the Tool life
management data.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
173
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Tool number (4bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
19999
1275

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to register the Tool number.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
173
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Tool number (4bytes)
NOTE
1276
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.62
Reading the Estimate
Disturbance Torque
Data
Power
Mate
FS20
FS18
FS16
: The support is decided by CNC series

: No support
CAUTION
The unexpected disturbance torque detection function
option is required. For detailed settings of parameters and
so forth, refer to the description of unexpected disturbance
torque detection in the connection manual (functions).
(1) servo axis

[Description ]
The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/ deceleration
of the digital servo axis are read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)

+4
(Data length)

+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Axis number)
+10
(Data area)

+12
1277
M=1 to n : Estimate disturbance torque data

for specific axis. n is the axis
number.
M= 1 :
Estimate disturbance torque data

for all axes.

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally.
of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
+4
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the
completion codes. )
(Data length)
L
(L=2 n, n is the number
of axes specified. )
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Input data)
Value
+10
Estimate disturbance torque data forthe controlled axis specified
(2 bytes)
Signed binary
complement. )
+12
Value
+10
+12
+14
+16
+18
Estimate disturbance torque

data forfirst axis
(2 bytes)
data forsecond axis
(2 bytes)
data forthird axis
(2 bytes)
data forfourth axis
(2 bytes)
1278
Signed binary
complement. )
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(2) spindle axis

[Description]
The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/ deceleration
of the serial spindle axis are read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)

+4
(Data length)

+6
(Data number)
1
M= 1 to n: Read the load of each spindle.

(n is the spindle number.)
1: Read the loads of the No.1 and No.2 spindles.
2: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.3 spindles.
3: Read the loads of the No.1 to No.4 spindles.
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Axis number)
+10
(Data area)

+12
1279

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The estimate disturbance torque data have been read normally.
4 : The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes) . Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled axes.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
+2
(Completion code)
?
the completion codes. )
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=2 n, n is the number
of axes specified. )
+6
(Data number)
1
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Input data)
Value

data forthe controlled axis specified
(2 bytes)
Signed binary
complement. )
+10
+12
Value
+10

data for first axis (2 bytes)
X
+8+(2 n)
Signed binary
complement. )
X
data forsecond axis (2 bytes)
[supporting soft]
CNC
SERVO
B005 SERIES
Edition K or later
B105 SERIES
Edition H or later
B205 SERIES
Edition H or later
BD03 SERIES
Edition L or later
BE03 SERIES
Edition I or later
BF03 SERIES
Edition I or later
9060 SERIES
Edition J or later
SPINDLE : 9A50 SERIES

Edition Q or later
* Some of the series not listed above are supported by the first edition.
1280
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.63
[Description]
Reading the Current

Program Number
(8digit Program
Numbers)
(not available for
Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA)
This function reads CNC program numbers extended to 8 digits from the
usual 4 digits.
Basically, this function is the same as function number 24 excluding the
different data length of function code 90.

Top address 0
(Function code)
90
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
0
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

18
[Completion codes]
0 : The program number of the currently executing program has been
read normally.
1281

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address 0
(Function code)
90
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the completion
codes, above.)
4
(Data length)
8
6
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
Value
10
Number of the program currently being Unsigned binary format, 4byte length
executed
ON
14
Program number of the main program
ON
18
(a) Number of the program currently being executed (ON)
The program number of the program currently being executed is set.
(b) Program number of the main program (OFF)
If the program currently being executed is a subprogram, the program
number of its main program is set.
If the program currently being executed is not a subprogram, 0 is set.
1282
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.64
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Group Number)
This function reads the tool group number to which the tool number is
currently registered.

Top address 0
(Function code)
200
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
12
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

16
NOTE
When the tool number is set to 0, the tool group number
of the currently used tool is read.
If a tool group number is not specified after the power is
turned ON, tool group number 0 is read. Also, if a tool
number is registered to two or more tool group numbers, the
tool group numbers of all tool groups to which the tool
number is registered are read.
1283

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool group number was read successfully.
4 : The tool number in Data Attribute has a wrong value.
5 : The tool number is not registered.
6 : The tool life management option has not been added on.
Top address 0
(Function code)
200
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
L
(L=4 n)
6
L=4 to 4 x n
n is the number of tool group numbers
when multiple groups is specified.
(Data number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: entered data)
Value
12
Unsigned binary
Tool group number
(4 bytes)
16
Or, when the tool number is registered to multiple groups
Value
12
Tool group number

(4 bytes)
16
Tool group number

(4 bytes)
20
Tool group number

(4 bytes)
Unsigned binary
24
NOTE
management data B.
1284
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.65
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Length Offset
Number 1)
This function reads the tool length offset number according to the
specified tool group number and tool number. (M series only)

Top address 0
(Function code)
227
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N=Tool group number)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
12
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

16
CAUTION
When the tool group number and tool number are set to 0,
the currently used tool group and tool number are
referenced.
turned ON, tool group number 0 is read.
0 is always read on the T series.
1285

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool length offset number was read successfully.
3 : The specified tool group number is incorrect.
4 : The specified tool number is incorrect.
5 : The specified tool number is not registered to the specified tool
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
227
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: entered data)
12
Tool offset number
(4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
16
NOTE
management data B.
1286
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.66
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Diameter Offset
Number 1)
This function reads the tool radius offset number according to the
specified tool group number and tool number. (M series only)

Top address 0
(Function code)
228
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
12
(Data area)
(Need not be set)

16
CAUTION
referenced.
0 is always read on the T series.
1287

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool radius offset number was read successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
228
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: entered data)
12
Tool offset number
(4 bytes)
Value
Unsigned binary
16
NOTE
management data B.
1288
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.67
[Description]
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Information 1)
This function reads the tool information (status) according to the specified
tool group number and tool number.

Top address 0
(Function code)
201
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
12
((Data area))
(Need not be set)

16
CAUTION
referenced.
1289

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool information was read successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
201
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
(N: entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: entered data)
12
Tool offset number
(4 bytes)
Value
0: See Note in previous item/
1: Tool is registered.
2: End of tool life.
3: Tool skipped
All above three bytes must be 0.
16
NOTE
management data B.
1290
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.68
[Description]
Writing (Registering)
Tool Life Management
Data (Tool Group
Number) (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function registers the tool group number to tool life management
data. Set the tool number, life value and life counter type to the specified
tool group. On the T series, since the life counter type is specified by CNC
parameter LTM (No. 6800#2), it cannot be set nor changed here.

Top address +0
(Function code)
202
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
Value
+12
Tool group number
(2 bytes)
Unsigned binary
1512
+14
(2 bytes)
+16
1: Frequency
2: Real time in minutes
Unsigned binary
19999 (Frequency)
Tool life management data B
1999999 (Frequency)
Tool life
(4 bytes)
NOTE
1291

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool group was registered successfully.
3 : The tool group number exceeded the range 1 to 512 or maximum
number of registered groups.
4 : The tool number in Data Attribute has a wrong value.
5 : The tool life value is outofrange. On the T series, the tool life
counter type is different.
Top address 0
(Function code)
202
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
8
(Entered data)
6
(Data number)
(Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
12
Tool group number
(2 bytes)
(Entered data)
14
(2 bytes)
(Entered data)
16
Tool life value
(4 bytes)
(Entered data)
20
1292
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

NOTE
management data B.
1293

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.69
[Description]
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Length Offset
Number 1)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the tool length offset number of a specified tool group
in the tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address 0
(Function code)
229
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
Value
12
Tool length offset number
(4 bytes)
16
1294
Unsigned binary
1 to 255
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The tool length offset number was written successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
229
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
(Entered data)
6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
12
(4 bytes)
16
CAUTION
The tool length offset number that can be actually specified
is reliant on the tool offsets available on the NC.
NOTE
management data B.
1295

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.70
[Description]
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Radius Offset
Number 1)
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the tool radius offset number of a tool belonging to a
specified tool group in the tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address 0
(Function code)
230
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
4
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
Value
12
(4 bytes)
16
1296
Unsigned binary
1 to 255
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : The tool radius offset number was written successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
230
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
4
(Entered data)
6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
12
(4 bytes)
16
CAUTION
The tool length offset number that can be actually specified
is reliant on the tool offsets available on the NC.
NOTE
management data B.
1297

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.71
[Description]
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function sets the tool information of a tool belonging to a specified

tool group in the tool life management data. (M series only)

Top address 0
(Function code)
231
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
2
6
(Data number)
N
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
Value
12
Tool group number
(2 bytes)
14
1298
1: Clears tool status.

2: Skips tool status.

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The tool information was written successfully.
group.
Top address 0
(Function code)
231
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
2
(Entered data)
6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
12
(2 bytes)
14
The following table shows how the tool status changes before and after
this function is specified.
command
Precommand Status
Postcommand Status
clear
skip
skip
used
(#)
(#)
(*)
unused
in use
unused
( )
(@)
( )
skip
unused
in use
used
( )
(@)
(*)
skip
skip
skip
(#)
(#)
(*)
1299

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
NOTE
management data B.
1300
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.72
(1) Actual spindle speed
Reading Actual Spindle

Speeds
[Description]

This function reads the actual speed of the No.1 to No.4 serial spindles.
Top address +0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Spindle number)
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
M=1 to n : Read spindles on each axis.

1 : Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
2 : Read spindles on No.1 to No.3 axes
[Completion codes]
0:
The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4:
The spindle speed in Data Attribute has wrong values, that is ,

a value outside of the range 1 to (n1) or 1 to n (n: number of
spindles).
1301

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=4 n)
+6
(Data number)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Actual speed of specified spindle
Signed binary
<data unit>
min1
+14
Or, 4 controlled axes:
Value
+10
+14
+18
+22
Actual speed of No.1 spindle
+26
1302
Signed binary
<Data unit>
min1
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(2) Position coderless actual spindle speed

[Description]
This function reads the actual spindle speed (position coderless actual
spindle speed) obtained by calculating the spindle motor speed of the
No.1 to No.4 serial spindles.
Top address +0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Spindle number + 10)
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
M=11 to (10+n) : Read spindles on each axis.

11 : Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
+12
[Completion codes]
0 : The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4 : The spindle speed in Data Attribute has wrong values, that is ,
a value outside of the range 11 to (9+1) or 11 to (10+n) (n:
number of spindles).
1303

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
138
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=4 n)
+6
(Data number)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Position coderless actual spindle
speed
Signed binary
<data unit>
min1
+14
Value
+10
+14
+18
+22
Position coderless actual No.1

spindle speed
spindle speed
spindle speed
spindle speed
+26
1304
Signed binary
<Data unit>
min1
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.73
[Description]
Reading Fine Torque

Sensing Data
(Statistical Calculation
Results)
This function reads the statistical calculation results (average value,

maximum value, distribution) in the fine torque sensing function.
Top address +0
(Function code)
226
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
N
(N=Axis number)
+8
(Data attribute)
0
M=1 to n : Read spindles on each axis.

1 : Read all axes
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : The statistical calculation results were read successfully.
3 : The fine torque sensing data in Data Attribute has a wrong value,
that is, a value outside of the range 1 or 1 to n (n: number of
spindles).
6 : The fine torque sensing option has not been added on.
1305

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
226
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation.)
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=6 n)
+6
(Data number)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Signed binary
Average value of target axis
+12
Maximum value of target axis
+14
Distribution of target axis
+16
Value
+10
+12
+14
+16
+18
+20
Average value of target axis 1

Maximum value of target axis 1
Distribution of target axis 1
Maximum value of target axis 2
Distribution of target axis 2
:
:
:
+32
+34
1306
Signed binary
(Output only for number of axes
specified to parameter Nos. 6390
to 6363)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.74
(1) Store counter
Reading Fine Torque

Sensing Data
(Store Data)
[Description]

This function reads the number of stored torque data items.

Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool number)
M= 0 : Latest data counter

= 1 : Sample data counter
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : The store counter was read successfully.
3 : Incorrect data number, that is, a value other than 0 is specified.
4 : The fine torque sensing data in Data Attribute has wrong values,
that is, a value other than 0 or 1.
1307

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
0
(Entered data)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
+10
Store counter value
+14
1308
Value
Unsigned binary
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(2) Stored torque data (latest data)

[Description]
This function reads the latest stored data among stored torque data.
Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
N
(N=Axis number + 10)
N : Number of axis to be read + 100
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Data type)
M =0 : Latest data
=1 : Sample data
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0:
The stored torque data (latest data) was read successfully.
3:
Incorrect data number, that is, a value other than 11 to (10+n) (n:
number of spindles) is specified.
4:
The fine torque sensing data in Data Attribute has a wrong value,
6:
The fine torque sensing option has not been added on.
1309

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=2 or 10)
+6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
+10
Latest stored data
Value
Signed binary
+12
NOTE
1 When data has not been stored, data is not output, and processing ends successfully with L
set to 0.
2 When sample data is selected by data attribute, the sample data corresponding to the latest
stored data is output.
Example) When 10000 sample data items (data numbers 0 to 9999) and latest data items
5000 (data numbers 0 to 4999) are stored, data number 4999 in the latest data is
output when data attribute M is set to 0, and data number 4999 in the sample data
is output when data attribute M is set to 1.
3 When sample data is selected by data attribute, and there is no sample data corresponding to
the latest stored data, data is not output, and processing ends successfully with L set to 0.
Example) When 5000 sample data items (data numbers 0 to 4999) and 10000 latest data
items (data numbers 0 to 9999) are stored, data is not output, and processing ends
successfully with L set to 0 when data attribute M is set to 1.
1310
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(3) Stored torque data (any data)

[Description]
This function reads the arbitrary data among stored torque data.
Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
6
+6
(Data number)
N
(N=Axis number)
N= 1 to n : Axis number
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Data type)
+10
Data number n
+14
Number of data items I
+16
Data of number n
+18
Data of number n+1
+20
:
:
1311
M =0 : Latest data
=1 : Sample data

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
NOTE
The valid range of data number n is calculated as follows:
1
0 v n v (524288 1
a b)1
where,
1: Number of target axes 1
a= 2: Number of target axes 2
4: Number of target axes 3 and 4
b= 1: Sample data store function OFF
2: Sample data store function ON
The valid range of number of data items I is calculated as
follows:
1vlv20
[Completion codes]
0 : The stored torque data (any data) was read successfully.
2 : Incorrect data length, that is, a value other than 6 is specified.
3 : Incorrect data number, that is, a value other than 11 to (10+n) (n:
number of spindles) is specified.
4 : The fine torque sensing data in Data Attribute has a wrong value,
5 : Incorrect data area is specified. See Note for details of value
ranges.
1312

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
232
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation.)
+4
(Data length)
L
(L=6 + number of data items I
2)
+6
(Data number)
N
(Entered data)
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Data number n
(Entered data)
+14
Number of data items I
(Entered data)
+16
Distribution of target axes
+18
Number n data
+20
+22
+24
Number n+1 data

Number n+2 data
:
:
:
Number n+I1 data
1313
Signed binary

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
NOTE
1 When the number of actually stored data items is exceeded
even though data number n is in the valid range, data is not
output and processing ends successfully by number of data
items I set to 0.
Example) When the number of target axes is 2, and the
sample data store function is enabled
(parameter No.6350#2=1), data numbers 0 to
131071 are valid. However, if an attempt is
made to read (example (1) in figure below) data
from data number n = 131020 when the number
of actually stored data items is 131000 (data
numbers 0 to 130999), data is not output, and
the number of data items I becomes 0.
2 When data number n is within the number of actually stored
data items, and (n+I 1) exceeds the number of actually
stored data items, data of the stored data items is output,
and processing ends successfully. In this case, number of
data items I is updated to the number of data items that was
output.
Example) If an attempt is made to read (example (2) in
figure below) number of data items I (120) from
data number 130900 under the same
conditions as in the example above, the data of
data numbers 130900 to 130999 is output, and
number of data items I becomes 100.
Also, if an attempt is made to read (example (3)
in figure below) number of data items I (120)
from data number 130999 under the same
conditions as in the example above, the data of
data numbers 130990 to 130999 is output, and
number of data items becomes 10.
Data Number Valid Range

Range of actually stored data
Data range about to be read (1)
1314
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.75
[Explanation of data]
Specifying the Number

of the Program for I/O
Link
Specify the number of the program to be input/output using the data

input/output function with I/O Link.
Top address +0
(Function code)
194
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set.)

+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Program number
Value
Signed binary format
+12
[Completion codes]
0 : The specification of the program number terminated normally.
5 : Invalid data was specified for the program number, i.e., the data
falls outside the range of 1 to 9999 or is not 9999.
1315

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address +0
(Function code)
194
+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of completion
codes, above.)
+4
(Data length)
2
(Data at input time)
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Program number
Value
Signed binary format
+12
CAUTION
For details of this function, see the section on data
input/output functions using I/O Link in the CNC
Connection Manual (Functions).
1316
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.76
[Description]
Preset of relative
coordinate
(:Lowspeed
response)
(not available for
Power Mate and Series
21TA)
The preset data is set to the relative coordinate controlled by CNC. If 0

is set as preset data it becomes to origin.
But it is impossible to write the value of preset data to the transferring
axis. In the case of the preset of relative coordinate of all axes is executed
by using this function, if only one axis is transferring, the preset of relative
coordinate cannot be executed, neither.
Case of writing data on each axis.
Top address +0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set.)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Axis number)
+10
Value of relative coordinate for the
controlled axis specified (4bytes)
Value
M=1 to n: Write data on each
(n is the axis number)
Signed binary
complement)
+12
Input data unit

Input system
Machining center
system
Radius
specification
Lathe
system
Diameter
specification
Radius
specification
Diameter
specification
1317
Increment
system ISB
Increment
system ISC
mm, deg
system
0.001
0.0001
inch system
0.0001
0.00001
0.001
0.0001
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
0.00001
0.0001
0.00001
mm, deg
system
inch system

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Case of writing data on all axes (controlled axes are 4).

Top address +0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set.)

+4
(Data length)
16
+6
(Data number)
0
Value
+8
1 must be set
(Data attribute)
M
(M=1)
+10
Value of relative coordinate for the first
axis (4bytes)
Signed binary
complement)
+12
Value of relative coordinate for the second axis (4bytes)
+14
Value of relative coordinate for the third
axis (4bytes)
+18
Value of relative coordinate for the
fourth axis (4bytes)
+22
[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the value of relative coordinate.
4 : Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
1 nor a value from 1 to n(n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
axes.
5 : Relative coordinate is out of range.
13 : Axis is moving now.
1318
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Top address +0
(Function code)
249
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
Value of relative coordinate
(4*n bytes)
1319

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.77
[Description]
Deleting the Tool life

Management Data
(Tool group)
(:Lowspeed
response)
The function deletes the specified Tool group in the Tool life management
data. In short, it makes the condition that Tool group is not registered.

Top address +0
(Function code)
324
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
1320
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Success to delete the Tool group number.
3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512,or exceeds
Top address +0
(Function code)
324
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
NOTE
1 Those models that do not provide the tool life management
function cannot be used.
2 The turning mode of the complex machining function does
not support tool life management data.
1321

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.78
Management Data
(Tool data)
(:Lowspeed
response)
[Description]
The function deletes the Tool data of the Tool of the specified Tool
operation sequence number in the Tool life management data. (M series
only)

Top address +0
(Function code)
325
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Tool operation sequence number)
+10
1322
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Success to delete the Tool group number.
3 : The Tool group number is out of range from 1 to 512,or exceeds
Top address +0
(Function code)
325
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
M
+10
NOTE
1323

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.79
Management Data
(Tool life counter and
Tool condition)
(:Lowspeed
response)
[Description]
The function clears the Tool life counter and all Tool condition of the
specified Tool group in the Tool life management data.
Top address +0
(Function code)
326
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
1324
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Success to clear the Tool life counter and the Tool condition.
Top address +0
(Function code)
326
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
NOTE
1325

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.80
Writing the Tool life
Management Data
(Arbitrary group
number) (:Lowspeed
response)
[Description]
This function sets Arbitrary group number of the specified Tool group in
the Tool life management data.

Top address +0
(Function code)
327
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Arbitrary group number
(4bytes)
NOTE
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Arbitrary group
number) is available for Tool life management data B
1326
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the Arbitrary group number.
5 : Arbitrary group number is out of range.
Top address +0
(Function code)
327
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Arbitrary group number
(4bytes)
NOTE
The complex machining function does not support the tool
life management B function.
1327

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.81
[Description]
Writing the Tool life

Management Data
(Remaining tool life)
(:Lowspeed
response)
This function sets the length of Remaining Tool life of the specified Tool
group in the Tool life management data.

Top address +0
(Function code)
328
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Remaining tool life
(4bytes)
NOTE
Writing the Tool life Management Data (Remaining tool life)
is available for Tool life management data B
1328
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Success to set the length of Remaining tool life.
5 : Remaining tool life is out of range.
Top address +0
(Function code)
328
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
Remaining tool life
(4bytes)
NOTE
The complex machining function does not support the tool
life management B function.
1329

APPENDIX
B.4.82
Reading the Current
Screen Number
[Description]
The current screen number to display can be read.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
120
+2
(Completion code)

+4
(Data length)

+6
(Data number)

+8
(Data attribute)

+10
(Data area)

+12
1330
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Reading the current screen number has been read normally.
1 : This function can not be used because series and edition of CNC
or PMC system software is not corresponded.
Top address +0
(Function code)
120
+2
(Completion code)
?
completion code)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)

+8
(Data attribute)

+10
(Data area)
Screen number (Small classification)
(Refer to Table 1)
+12
(Data area)
Screen number (Large classification)
(Refer to Table 1)
NOTE
This function is used for Power Mate iD/H only.
1331

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[The screen number of Power Mate iD/H ]

Table B.4.82
Large classification
00
01
02
03
04
05
POSITION
PROGRAM
OFFSET
SYSTEM
MESSAGE
USER
1332
Small classification
00
ABSOLUTE
01
RELATIVE
02
ALL
03
HANDLE INTERRUPT
04
OPERATING MONITOR
05
C Executor
00
MDI PROGRAM
01
PROGRAM
02
LIBRARY
03
CURRENT BLOCK
04
NEXT BLOCK
05
PROGRAM CHECK
07
FLOPPY DIRECTORY
0d
C Executor
00
OFFSET
01
SETTING PARAMETER
03
MACRO VARIABLE
04
MENU
05
OPERATORS PANEL
0a
C Executor
00
PARAMETER
01
DIAGNOSE
02
PMC
03
SYSTEM
04
MEMORY
06
SERVO SETTING
07
SPINDLE SETTING
0b
OPERATION HISTORY
0c
ALL I/O
13
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DISP.
14
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION DISP.
18
FSSB SETTING DISPLAY
19
C Executor
00
ALARM
01
EXTERNAL MESSAGE
02
ALARM HISTORY
0a
C Executor
01
MACRO1
02
MACRO2
03
MACRO3
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.83
Reading Detailed
Alarm Information
(:Lowspeed type)
[Description]
If the CNC is in the alarm status, the details can be read. Detailed
information includes the following:
(a) Alarm status information
Information of the type of alarm which occurs
(b) Detailed alarm information
Axis information of the alarm which occurs and alarm number
information
(1) Reading alarm status information
Top address + 0
(Function code)
186
+2
(Completion code)

+4
(Data length)

+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
(Data area)

+12
1333

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Reading the CNC alarm status has terminated normally.
Top address +0
(Function code)
186
+2
(Completion code)

completion code)
+4
(Data length)
2
+6
(Data number)
0
+8
(Data attribute)
0
+10
(See below.)
+12

15 14 13 12 11 10
Bit 0:
bit
P/S alarm 100 (PS1)

(The alarm write enable setting PWE is set to 1.)
Bit 1:
P/S alarm 000 (PS2)
(Turn the power off once. A written parameter may cause
this alarm.)
Bit 2:
P/S alarm 101 (PS3)
(The part program storage area is disordered. If the power
to the CNC is turned off during part program editing or
machining program reading, this alarm occurs. To release
this alarm, press the RESET key while holding the PROG
key down.)
Bit 3:
A P/S alarm other than the above occurs. (PS) (Up to 255)
Bit 4:
Stroke limit alarm (OTS)
Bit 5:
Overheat alarm (OH)
Bit 6:
Servo alarm (SV)
Bit 7:
Not used
Bit 8:
APC alarm (APAL)
Bit 9:
Spindle alarm (SPA)
Bit 10:
P/S alarm having a number 5000 or after (PS_2)
Bits 11 to 15: Not used
1334
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(2) Reading detailed alarm information

Top address + 0
(Function code)
186
+2
(Completion code)

+4
(Data length)

+6
(Data number)
M
+8
(Data attribute)
N
+10
(Data area)

+12
1335
M: 130
Number of stored alarms
N: Detailed alarm information request bits

(For the meaning of each bit, see Alarm
status information.

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Reading the CNC alarm status has terminated normally.
Top address +0
(Function code)
186
+2
(Completion code)

completion code)
+4
(Date length)
2+4n
(n : Number of alarms)
+6
(Data number)
M
+8
(Data attribute)
N
(Same as Input data)
Explanation of the value
+10
+12
+14
+16
Number of alarms
2byte unsigned binary data
Axis information
(first alarm)
2byte bit data (see below.)
Alarm number
(first alarm)
2byte unsigned binary data
Axis information
(second alarm)
+18
Alarm number
(second alarm)
X
+8+4 n
+10+4 n
X
Axis information
(nth alarm)
Alarm number
(nth alarm)
+12+4 n
D Axis information
For an axistype alarm, the bit indicating the corresponding axis
number is on.
(When an alarm occurs on axis 1, bit 0 is 1.)
For a nonaxistype alarm, the bit is 0.
1336
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.84
[Description]
Reading the Servo

Data of Control Axes
Actual speed of servo motor of CNCcontrolled axes can be read.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
207
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
11
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M=Axis number)
+10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
1337
M=1 to n : Actual speed of a specific axis.

n is the axis number
1 : Actual speed of all axes

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : The actual speed of servo motor has been read normally.
axes.
Top address +0
(Function code)
207
+2
+4
(Completion code)
?
completion codes)
(Data length)
L
(L=4 n)
+6
(Data number)
11
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M:Input data)
Value
+10
Actual speed of servo motor specified
(4 bytes)
Signed binary
Data unit : min1
When the number of controlled axes is 4, and specified all axes
Value
+10
+14
+18
+22
Actual speed of servo motor of the first Signed binary

axis
Data unit : min1
(4 bytes)
Actual speed of servo motor of the
second axis
(4 bytes)
third axis
(4 bytes)
fourth axis
(4 bytes)
1338
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

B.4.85
[Description]
Exchange of Tool
Management Data
Number in the
Magazine Management
Table (:Lowspeed
Response)
This function exchanges tool management data number in a pair of pots

of specified magazine.
When the magazine number is set to 1114(14th spindle position) or
2124(14th waiting position), the pot number may be dummy number.
It is necessary for specifying the 2nd or 3rd spindle/wait position at the
multipath system to specify the path number by the place of 100. For
example, the magazine number 213 means the 3rd spindle position at the
2nd path. Especially, the 1st spindle position can be specified without the
third of hundreds (The magazine number 22 and 122 indicates the same
magazine). Refer to note of the following description for details.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
329
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data)
8
+6
(Data number)
(Need not be set)

+8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)

+10
(Data number 2)
(Need not be set)
+12
(Detail completion code)
(Need not be set)

+14
Magazine No.1
(2byte)
Pot No.1
(2byte)
Magazine No.2
(2byte)
Pot No.2
(2byte)
+16
+18
+20
1339

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
5 : Specified magazine number / pot number is not registered.
6 : No required option.
[Detail completion code]
This code is 0 except completion code is 5.
Completion code = 5
21 : Error of magazine No.1
22 : Error of pot No.1
24 : Error of magazine No.2
25 : Error of pot No.2
Top address + 0
(Function code)
329
+2
(Completion code)
Refer to above description
+4
(Data length)
8
+6
(Data number)
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number 2)
+12
+14
Magazine No.1
(2byte)
Pot No.1
(2byte)
Magazine No.2
(2byte)
Pot No.2
(2byte)
+16
+18
+20
1340
B61863E/15

APPENDIX
NOTE
1 [Command of special magazine at multipath system]
The tool management data and the magazine management
table are common to all path. But the spindle position table
and wait position table are individual at each path.
When the spindle position or the wait position at each path
will be specifed as the magazine through PMC window, the
magazine number is depend on the following table.
spindle position
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
1st path
111(11)
112(12)
113(13)
114(14)
2nd path
211
212
213
214
3rd path
311
312
313
314
wait position
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
1st path
121(21)
122(22)
123(23)
124(24)
2nd path
221
222
223
224
3rd path
321
322
323
324
2 This function can be used in Series 16i/18i/21iMA/MB/TB.
1341

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.86
[Description]
Search of Empty Pot

(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function searches the nearest empty pot, which is expressed as tool
management data is 0, from specified pot in the magazine. Spindle and
waiting position are not searched as empty pot.
NOTE
1 See Note of B.4.85 for the command of special magazine
at multipath system

Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)

+14
Data area (4byte)
(Need not be set)
+16
[Search direction]
1 : Reverse
0 : No specify (The nearest pot is searched on both normal and
reversed direction)
1 : Normal
1342
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Error of magazine number/pot number
4 : Error of search direction
6 : No required option.
8 : No empty pot
Completion code = 3
21 : Error of magazine number
22 : Error of pot number
Top address + 0
(Function code)
330
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
4
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Search direction
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
+14
Searched magazine number (2byte)
+16
Searched pot number (2byte)
When this function is executed without specify of search direction, the

pot for normal direction is output if each empty pots for both normal
direction and reverse direction are found as same distance.
1343

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.87
[Description]
Newregister of a Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function registers new tool data according to specified magazine and
pot number. The tool data was registered at the first vacant area from the
top of the database in NC system.
Vacant area means that tool management data of the area is ignored. (It
is equal to the state that bit 0 of tool information is 0.) If there is no vacant
area, completion code 8 is returned.
If a set of specified magazine and pot number is allocated, completion
code 13 is returned.
NOTE
1 Data length is changed according to the option Additional
customized data on tool management function. If the
option exists, data length is 140. If not, data length is 76.
at multipath system.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
331
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)

+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)

+14
1344

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Top address + 14
Tool type number
(4byte)
+18
Tool life counter
(4byte)
+22
Maximum of tool life
(4byte)
+26
Previous notice tool life
(4byte)
+30
State of Tool life
(1byte)
+31
Customizing data 0
(1byte)
+32
Tool information
(2byte)
+34
Tool length compensation number H
(2byte)
Machining and
Lathe (Compound) system
+36
Cutter compensation number D
(2byte)
+38
Spindle speed S
(4byte)
+42
Feedrate F
(4byte)
+46
Dummy (magazine number)
(2byte)
+48
Dummy (pot number)
(2byte)
+50
Tool geometric compensation
number G
(2byte)
Lathe system
+52
Tool wear compensation number W
(2byte)
+54
1345

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Top address + 54
(reserve)
(20byte)
0
+74
Customizing data 1
(4byte)
Customizing data 2
(4byte)
Customizing data 3
(4byte)
Customizing data 4
(4byte)
Customizing data 5
(4byte)
Customizing data 6
(4byte)
+78
+82
+86
+90
+94
+150
Customizing data 20
(4byte)
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
2 : Error of data length
3 : Error of magazine or pot number
5 : There is an error in data area.
6 : No required option
7 : Protected area
8 : There is no space.
13 : Already allocated.
1346
B61863E/15
APPENDIX


Completion code = 5
1 : Error of tool type number
2 : Error of tool life counter
3 : Error of maximum of tool life
4 : Error of previous notices tool life
5 : Error of state of tool life
7 : Error of tool information
8 : Error of tool length compensation number (H)
(Machining and Lathe (Compound) system)
9 : Error of cutter compensation number (D)
10 : Error of spindle speed (S)
11 : Error of feedrate (F)
12 : Error of tool geometric compensation number (G)
(Lathe system)
13 : Error of tool wear compensation number (W)
(Lathe system)
31 to 50 : Error of customizing data 1 20
1347

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
331
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
+14
Tool type number
(4byte)
+18
Tool life counter
(4byte)
+22
(4byte)
+26
(4byte)
+150
Customizing data 20
1348
(4byte)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.88
[Description]
Writing a Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function writes a tool data according to specified magazine and pot
number. If the pot has no tool (if tool management data number is not
allocated), error 9 is output.
NOTE
1 Data length is changed according to the option Additional
customized data on tool management function. If the
option exists, data length is 140. If not, data length is 76.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
332
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)

+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)

+14
Tool type number
(4byte)
+18
Tool life counter
+22
(4byte)
1349

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Top address + 22
(4byte)
+26
(4byte)
+30
State of Tool life
(1byte)
+31
Customizing data 0
(1byte)
+32
Tool information
(2byte)
+34
(2byte)
Machining and
+36
(2byte)
+38
Spindle speed S
(4byte)
+42
Feedrate F
(4byte)
+46
(2byte)
+48
Dummy (pot number)
(2byte)
+50
Tool geometric compensation
number G
(2byte)
Lathe system
+52
(2byte)
+54
(reserve)
(20byte)
0
+74
Customizing data 1
+78
(4byte)
1350

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Top address + 78
Customizing data 2
(4byte)
Customizing data 3
(4byte)
Customizing data 4
(4byte)
Customizing data 5
(4byte)
Customizing data 6
(4byte)
+82
+86
+90
+94
+150
Customizing data 20
(4byte)
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
2 : Error of data length
3 : Error of magazine or pot number
5 : There is an error in data area.
7 : Protected area
9 : The pot has no tool.
1351

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

This code is 0 except completion code is 3 or 5.
Completion code = 3
23 : Error of tool management data number
Completion code = 5
3 : Error of maximum tool life value
(Machining center and Lathe (Compound) system)
(Machining center and Lathe (Compound) system)
(Lathe system)
13 : Error of tool wear compensation number (W)
(Lathe system)
1352

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
332
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
+14
Tool type number
(4byte)
+18
Tool life counter
(4byte)
+22
(4byte)
+26
(4byte)
+150
Customizing data 20
1353
(4byte)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.89
[Description]
Deletion of a Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function deletes a tool management data according to specified

magazine and pot number.
If the pot has no tool (if tool management data number is not allocated),
error 9 is output.
NOTE
at multipath system

Top address + 0
(Function code)
333
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)

+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Invalid magazine number or pot number
7 : Protected area
1354
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Completion code = 3
23 : Error of tool management data
Top address + 0
(Function code)
333
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
1355

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.90
[Description]
Reading a Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function reads a tool management data according to specified

magazine and pot number. If the pot has no tool (if tool management data
number is not allocated), error 9 is output.
NOTE
1 Customizing data 5 20 can be read when the option
Additional customized data on tool management function
exists.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
334
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
(Need not be set)

+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)

+14
(Data area)
76 or 140
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Invalid tool management data number
7 : Protected area
1356

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Completion code = 3
Top address + 0
(Function code)
334
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
76 or 140
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
+14
Tool type number
(4byte)
Tool life counter
(4byte)
+18
+22
(4byte)
+26
(4byte)
+30
State of Tool life
+31
(1byte)
1357

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Top address + 31
Customizing data 0
(1byte)
+32
Tool information
(2byte)
+34
(2byte)
Machining and
+36
(2byte)
+38
Spindle speed S
(4byte)
+42
Feedrate F
(4byte)
+46
(2byte)
+48
Dummy (pot number)
(2byte)
+50
Tool geometric compensation number G
(2byte)
Lathe system
+52
(2byte)
+54
(reserve)
(20byte)
0
+74
Customizing data 1
(4byte)
Customizing data 2
(4byte)
Customizing data 3
(4byte)
Customizing data 4
(4byte)
+78
+82
+86
+90
1358
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 90
Customizing data 5
(4byte)
Customizing data 6
(4byte)
+94
150
Customizing data 20
1359
(4byte)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.91
[Description]
Writing Each Tool Data

(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function writes specified data into tool management data.

The type of written data is input to the data attribute area.
The size of a necessary data area changes depending on the data type. The
relation among a data type, an input value and a necessary data area size
is as follows.
Table B.4.91 Input value to the data attribute and the data area size
Input
value
Data type
Data area
size
Tool type number
4byte
Tool life counter
4byte
4byte
4byte
State of tool life
4byte
Customizing data 0
1byte
Tool information
2byte
Tool length compensation

number (H)
2byte
Machining and
Lathe (Compound)
system
Cutter compensation
number (D)
2byte
Machining and
Lathe (Compound)
system
10
Spindle speed (S)
4byte
11
Feedrate (F)
4byte
12
Tool geometric
compensation number (G)
2byte
Lathe system
13
Tool wear compensation

number (W)
2byte
Lathe system
31
Customizing data 1
4byte
32
Customizing data 2
4byte
33
Customizing data 3
4byte
34
Customizing data 4
4byte
35
Customizing data 5
4byte
36
Customizing data 6
4byte
50
Customizing data 20
4byte
1360
Note
Bit type
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

NOTE
1 Customizing data 5 20 can be read when the option
Additional customized data on tool management function
exists.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
335
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
1, 2, 4
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Data type
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
(Need not be set)

+14
(Data area)
1, 2, 4
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Invalid magazine number, pot number or tool management data
number
4 : Error of data type
5 : Error of data area
7 : Protected area
1361

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

This code is 0 except completion code is 3 or 5.
Completion code = 3
23 : Error of tool management data
Completion code = 5
3 : Error of maximum of tool life
(Lathe system)
13 : Error of tool wears compensation number (W)
(Lathe system)
1362
APPENDIX
B61863E/15


Top address + 0
(Function code)
335
+2
(Completion code)
Refer to above structure
+4
(Data length)
1, 2, 4
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Data type
+10
(Data number2)
Pot number
+12
+14
(Data area)
1, 2, 4
1363

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.92
[Description]
Search of Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function searches the tool by customizing data.

This function searches whether there is corresponding data to the
specified customizing data for the tool registered in the magazine
management table, and returns the magazine and pot number of the tool
found first.
NOTE
at multipath system

Top address + 0
(Function code)
366
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
Customizing data number
+8
(Data attribute)
Comparison data
+10
(Data number 2)
+12
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Invalid customizing data number
1364

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Completion code = 3
1 : Too small customizing data number (under 0)
2 : Too large customizing data number (over 4 or 20)
3 : Not found the tool
Top address + 0
(Function code)
366
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
4 or 0
+6
(Data number)
+8
(Data attribute)
+10
(Data number2)
+12
+14
Magazine number
(2byte)
+16
Pot number
1365
(2byte)

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
B.4.93
[Description]
Shift of Tool
Management Data
(:Lowspeed
Response)
This function shifts the magazine management table.

This function shifts tool management table for the fixed pot number type
magazine.
NOTE
at multipath system
Top address + 0
(Function code)
367
+2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Shift direction
+10
(Data number2)
Shift amount
+12
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal end
3 : Invalid magazine number or shift amount
4 : Invalid shift direction
Completion code = 3
1 : Invalid magazine number
2 : Invalid shift amount
(Specified under 0 or over magazine number)
1366

APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
367
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Data length)
0
+6
(Data number)
Magazine number
+8
(Data attribute)
Shift direction
+10
(Data number2)
Shift amount
+12
The shift direction is define as follows.

Shift direction : 1
The tool data in pot 1 shifts to pot 2.
Shift direction : 1
Pot number
Direction: 1
Original condition
Direction: 1
1367
C. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
1368
B61863E/15
C.1
FUNCTION
APPENDIX

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
This window function is a functional instruction by which the data on the

CNC is read or is written.
Option (FS15B : A02B0162J917, FS15i : A02B0261J950) of NC
window is necessary.
1369

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.2
LOWSPEED
RESPONSE AND
HIGHSPEED
RESPONSE OF
WINDOW FUNCTION
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
In the way to process, there are window function high speed and one
processed at low speed.
In case of a lowspeed response, The data is read or written by the control
between CNC and PMC.
Therefore, it is necessary to ACT=1 of the window instrucion must be
held until the transfer completion information (W1) becomes 1
(interlock).
In a highspeed response, it is not necessity for take the interlock because
the data is directly read.
To read tool offset data, tool life management data, and the processing
time, the FS15B requires the installation of the NC window B option
(A02B0162J984), in addition to the NC window option.
CAUTION
1 The window instruction of a lowspeed response is controlled exclusively with the other window
instructions of lowspeed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written continuously, it is necessary to clear ACT of the
functional instruction once when the completion information (W1) become 1.
It does not work about ACT=1 of the other window instructions of lowspeed response such
as W1=1 and ACT=1 of the window instruction of a lowspeed response.
The window instruction of a highspeed response is not exclusively controlled like a lowspeed
response. Therefore, when the data is read or written continuously, yow need not make ACT=0.
The scan number of times to complete the processing is summarized on the following table.
TYPE
SCAN TIMES UNTIL PROCESSING ENDS
LOW
TWO SCAN TIMES OR MORE (This depends on the state of CNC)
HIGH
1SCAN TIME
(Only FS15B)
2 There is a version which does not support in the reading or writing of the window data by a new
format.
ROM VERSION
4047
AE
4078
CONTENT
It does not support a new format.
Please use #4 of NC parameter 7401 as 0.
It supports a new form.
When the window function of a new format is used, please set #4 of NC parameter 7401 as 1.
Function that is effected by #4 of NC parameter 7401.

FUNCTION
CONTENT
7401#4
Tool life management

data
The data of tool life management for 128 sets of tools can be read and written.
The data of tool life management for 512 sets of tools can be read and written.
Tool
offset
data
according to the
specified tool number
This function can not be used.
The tool offset data can be read and written.
3 Functions except the abovementioned are not related to #4 of NC parameter 7401.

If there is no option of the corresponding function, window instructions can not be used.
1370

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.2.1
Functional Instruction
WINDR
CTL0
Function code
Completion code
4
CTL1
CTL2
Data length
Data number
Axis specification
10
* Data length Depends on the function
Data area
DATA
part1
Data type
Type of
processing
Type of control data

CTL0
CTL1
CTL2
Data
length
Tool offset data
(low)
13
Offset number
Offset format
4 byte
Work origin offset
(high)
15
Axis number
4 byte
Parameter data
Setting data
(low)
17
Parameter number
Axis number
4 byte
Custom macro variables
(low)
21
Custom macro number 0
6 byte
CNC alarm state
(low)
23
2 byte
Current program number
(low)
24
6 byte
Current sequence number
(low)
25
6 byte
Actual velocity for controlled axes
(low)
26
4 byte
Absolute position on controlled axes
(high)
27
Axis number
4 byte
Machine position on controlled axes
(high)
28
Axis number
4 byte
Skip operation stop position on

controlled axes
(low)
29
Axis number
4 byte
Servo delay amount on controlled

axes
(high)
30
Axis number
4 byte
Acceleration/deceleration delay
amount on controlled axes
(high)
31
Axis number
4 byte
Modal data
(low)
32
Data type
Specified block
2 byte
6 byte
Diagnosis data
(low)
33
Diagnosis number
2 byte
Feed motor load current value

Generalpurpose analog input
(high)
(high)
34
34
200
0
Axis number
Axis number
2 byte
2 byte
(G function)
(other than G function)
1371

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
part2
Data type
Type of
processing
Tool life management data

Tool group No.
Number of tool groups
Number of tools
Tool life
Tool life counter
Tool length compensation No.1
Cutter compensation No.1
Tool information 1
Tool information 2
Tool No.
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
38
39
40
41
42
160
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
0
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool No.
0
0
0
0
0
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool order number
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
Clock data
(low)
151
Data format
6 byte
Relative position of controlled axes
(high)
74
Axis number
4 byte
Remaining travel of controlled axes
(high)
75
Axis number
4 byte
Estimate disturbance torque data of a

digital
Estimate disturbance torque data of a
serial spindle
(high)
211
Axis number
2 byte
(high)
211
Axis number
2 byte
Machining time
(low)
178
Program number
6 byte
Load information of the spindle motor
(high)
153
Axis number
2 byte
Tool offset data according to the

(low)
213
Data format
Tool number
4 byte
(low)
200
Tool number (4 bytes)
4 bytes
(low)
227
Tool group number
4 bytes
(low)
228
Tool group number
4 bytes
(low)
201
Tool group number
4 bytes
Real parameter data (Note)
(low)
321
Parameter number
(4 bytes)
Axis number
4 bytes
Actual machine position on controlled

axes (Note)
(high)
329
Axis number
4 bytes
Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data

(Statistical Calculation Results).
(Note)
(low)
226
Data number
Axis number
4 bytes
Reading Fine Torque Sensing Data

(Store Data). (Note)
(low)
232
Data attribute
Axis number
4 bytes
Reading detailed information of CNC

alarm. (Note)
(low)
330
Alarm type
Alarm count
8 bytes
Tool life management data (Note)

Tool group number
(supporting 8digit tool numbers)
Tool length compensation number 1
Cutter compensation number 1
Tool information 1
Data
length

CTL0
CTL1
NOTE
This function
(PMCNB6).
1372
is
supported
CTL2
only
by
the
FS15iA

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.2.2
Functional Instruction
WINDW
CTL0
Function code
Completion code
4
CTL1
CTL2
Data length
Data number
Axis specification
10
Data area
DATA
* Data length Depends on the function
part1
Data type
Type of
processing

CTL0
CTL1
CTL2
Data
length
Tool offset data
(low)
14
Offset number
Offset format
4 byte
Parameter data
Setting data
(low)
18
Parameter number
Axis number
4 byte
Custom macro variables
(low)
22
Custom macro number 0
6 byte
(low)
150
Data type
4 byte
(low)
150
201
4 byte
Torque limit override
(low)
152
Axis number
2 byte
Tool life management data

Number of tool groups
Tool life
Tool life counter
Tool information 1
Tool information 2
Tool No.
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
(low)
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
0
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
Tool No.
0
0
0
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool No.
Tool order number
Tool order number
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
Data on the program check screen

Spindle tool number
Number of the tool to be used
next
Tool offset data according to the

(low)
214
Data format
Tool number
4 byte
Superposition move command

(for three axes)
Superposition move command
(for four axes)
(high)
215
6 byte
(high)
215
Axis specification mode
Axis number
8 byte
Feedrate
(high)
216
6 byte
1373

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
part2
Data type
Tool life management data (Note)
Tool group number
Tool length compensation number 1
Cutter compensation number 1
Tool information 1
Real parameter data (Note)
Type of
processing
Data
length

CTL0
CTL1
CTL2
(low)
202
6 bytes
(low)
229
Tool group number
4 bytes
(low)
230
Tool group number
4 bytes
(low)
231
Tool group number
4 bytes
(low)
323
Parameter number
(4 bytes)
Axis number
6 bytes
NOTE
This function
(PMCNB6).
1374
is
supported
only
by
the
FS15iA

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3
FORMAT AND
DETAILS OF THE
CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDR
FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION
(1) See the description of the window function. The data item marked
with a dash () in the description of the data structure need not be
entered.
(2) The length of all data blocks and data items is represented in bytes.
(3) The read data becomes valid only when the instruction terminates
normally.
Completion
code
10
Meaning
The window instruction is being processed. Hold ACT until W1
is set to 1.
The instruction terminated normally.
An error occurred. The corresponding function number is not

found.
An error occurred. Possible causes include the following:

Wrong data is found in the CTL area. The NC does not have the
corresponding function.
An error occurred. The specified axis is not provided.
An error occurred. It is a mistake of data form. Though the

function supports only a new format, a old format is specified.
C.3.1
Reading a Tool Offset
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
Function code
13
[Description]
The tool offset value (tool compensation) is read from the CNC.
Read data
0
2
Completion code
Function code
13
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Offset number
Offset number
8
Offset format
Offset format
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool offset value

(4 byte)
14
14
1375

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
(Note 1) Offset format

M series (machining center system)
Data type
Tool compensation A
Compensation
Tool compensation B
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Tool compensation C
Tool length
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Cutter
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Format
T series (lathe system)
Offset number
(CTL+2, 3)
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
B61863E/15
Data type
Tool compensation A
Compensation along
the Xaxis
Compensation along
the Zaxis
Tooltip radius compensation
Compensation along
the Yaxis
Compensation related to the position
of the virtual tool
Tool compensation B
Geometry
compensation
Compensation
along the Xaxis
Compensation
along the Zaxis
Tooltip radius
compensation
Compensation
along the Yaxis
Wear
compensation
Compensation
along the Xaxis
Compensation
along the Zaxis
Tooltip radius
compensation
Compensation
along the Yaxis
Compensation
related to the
position of the
virtual tool
1376
Format
Offset number
(CTL+2, 3)
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
2
3
4
5
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.2
[Description]
Reading a Workpiece
Origin Offset Value
The offset from the workpiece origin of the current coordinate system
(including a shared offset) of the CNC is read.
The offset from the workpiece origin for each axis can be read
individually. The offset from the workpiece origin for an additional axis
can be read only when the additional axis is provided.
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
15
2
Completion code
Function code
15
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Workpiece origin
offset value
(4 byte)
14
14
1377

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.3
Reading a Parameter
(Setting Data)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A parameter of the CNC is read.
Read data
0
Function code
17
2
Completion code
Function code
17
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Parameter number
Parameter number
0 : No axis
Data attribute
Data attribute
1 to n : A specified axis
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Parameter data
(4 byte)
14
14
(Note) Format of parameter data
If the data is one byte long, it is set in the
DATA+0 area.
10
11
12
13
DATA+0
DATA+1
DATA+2
DATA+3
14
NOTE
A real parameter cannot be read using function code 17.
Read a parameter using:
D Real parameter: Function code 321
D Integer or bit parameter: Function code 17
1378
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.4
[Description]
Reading a Custom
Macro Variable
(Lowspeed Response)
A custom macro variable is read from the CNC.
Set data
0
NOTE
The position of the decimal point must be specified
beforehand.
Read data
0
Function code
21
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Custom macro
variable number
Data length
6
Custom macro
variable number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
14
Function code
21
Custom macro
variable value
(4 byte)
14
Position of
decimal point
(2 byte)
16
Position of
decimal point
(2 byte)
16
NOTE
In the case of reading a Custom Macro Variable of upper
100000.
Please input 10 to Data attribute, and input last four digits
of variable number to Custom macro variable number.
Examples
The relationship between the read value and the stored variable is:
(Read value) =
(Custom macro variable in the NC)
Read value
1
12
123
1234
12340
1379
10(Position of decimal point)
Custom macro
variable in the NC
1. 234
Position of
decimal point
0
1
2
3
4

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.5
Reading the CNC
Alarm Status
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
If the CNC is in the alarm state, the details of the alarm are read.
Read data
0
Function code
23
2
Completion code
10
Function code
23
Completion code
Data length
Data length
2
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
Data area
(2 byte)
11
12
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
12
The following alarm states can be read:

ALARM 1 Data format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ALARM 2 Data format

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 : Background P/S alarm

#1 : Foreground P/S alarm
#2 : Overheat
#3 : SubCPU error
#4 : Excessive synchronization error
#5 : Parameter enable switch enabled
#6 : Overtravel
#7 : PC error
#0 : External alarm message

#1 : Not defined
#2 : P/S alarm preventing the processing
from continuing (serious alarm)
#3 : Not defined
#4 : Servo alarm
#5 : I/O error
#6 : Parameter input requiring the power to be turned off
#7 : System error
1380

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.6
Reading the Current
Program Number
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
Function code
24
[Description]
The number of a running machining program is read from the CNC.
Read data
0
2
Completion code
Function code
24
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Program number
Data area
(6 byte)
14
15
16
FLAG 1
FLAG 2
16
FLAG 1 Data format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLAG 2 Data format

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 to 3 : Number of decimal places

#4 :
Whether a decimal point is provided
(0: Not provided, 1: Provided)
#5 :
Positive or negative
(0: Positive, 1: Negative)
#6 :
Whether only one digit is provided
(0: Not only one, 1: Only one)
#7 :
Not defined
#3 : Whether at least one address in the range

of D to the second miscellaneous
function is specified after the NC is reset
(0: Not specified, 1: Specified)
#7 : Whether the read data is specified in the
current block of the part program
Other bits are not defined.
1381

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.7
[Description]
Reading the Current

Sequence Number
(Lowspeed Response)
The sequence number of the running machining program is read from the
CNC. If the blocks of the running machining program have no sequence
numbers, the sequence number of the block most recently executed is
read.
Set data
0
Function code
25
Read data
0
2
Completion code
Function code
25
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(6 byte)
Sequence number
(4 byte)
14
15
16
FLAG 1
FLAG 2
16
FLAG 1 Data format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLAG 2 Data format

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 to 3 : Number of decimal places

#4 :
Whether the decimal point is provided
#5 :
#6 :
#7 :
Not defined
#3 : Whether at least one address in the

range of D to the second miscellaneous
(0: Not specified, 1: Specified)Other bits
are not defined.
1382
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.8
[Description]
Reading the Actual

Velocity of Controlled
Axes
(Lowspeed Response)
The actual speed of the feed axes controlled by the CNC is read.
Set data
0
The composite speed of the controlled axes is read. If the X, Y, and

Zaxes, the basic three axes, are controlled as feed axes, the composite
speed of the three axes is read.
Read data
0
Function code
26
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Function code
26
Data number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Feedrate
(4 byte)
14
14
C.3.9
Reading the Absolute
Position on a
Controlled Axis
Set data
0
[Description]
The absolute position (absolute coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by
the CNC is read.
Read data
0
Function code
27
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Function code
27
Data number
8
Axis number
0
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Absolute position
(4 byte)
14
14
1383

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Data specification
Kind of data
Current position
Data specification
1)
Indicates the current position in the workpiece coordinate system.

The current position is calculated by the following simple expression.
The read current position is stored in the 4byte area of DATA+0 to DATA+3.
Current position = machine coordinate value workpiece offset value
The workpiece offset value can be obtained by summing up the folloing offset.
(1) External workpiece origin offset
(2) Workpiece origin offset (G54 to G59,G54.1Pp)
(3) Workpiece coordinate system (G92)
(4) Local coordinate system (G52)
y
Local coordinate system (G52)
Workpiece origin offset (G54 or after)
External workpiece origin offset
Workpiece coordinate system (G92)

x
Origin of the machine coordinate system
2)
3)
Read value is determined as follows:

(1) For the machining center system or when the radius is specified for the axis of the lathe systm.
The data shows double of the present position with the least input increment as a unit.
(2) When the diameter is specified for the lathe system
The data shows the present position with the least input increment.
(3) When the input unit is multiplied by 10
The data shows twentytimes the present position (radius programming) or tentimes the
present position (diameter programming) with the last command increment as a unit.
The present position of a moving axis can be read whenever the function instruction is executed.
1384
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.10
Reading the Machine
Position (Machine
Coordinates) of
Controlled Axes
Set data
0
[Description]
The machine position (machine coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by
the CNC is read.
Read data
0
Function code
28
2
Completion code
Function code
28
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Feedrate
(4 byte)
14
14
1) Read value is determined as follows:

(1) For the machining center system (except for diameter
specification for the FS15MB) or when the radius is specified
for the axis of the lathe systm.
The data shows double of the present position with the least
input increment as a unit.
(2) When the diameter is specified for the maching center system
(FS15MB) and the lathe system
The data shows the present position with the least input
increment.
2) The present position of a moving axis can be read whenever the
function instruction is executed.
1385

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.11
Reading a Skip
Position (Stop Position
of Skip Operation
(G31)) of Controlled
Axes
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The absolute coordinates of the skip position specified in the CNC are
read.
Read data
0
Function code
29
2
Completion code
Function code
29
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Skip position
(4 byte)
14
14
1) Read value is determined as follows:

(2) When the diameter is specified for for the maching center system
increment.
2) Once the skip signal has been input to the NC, movement along the
relevant axis is stopped then, after the elapse of the servo delay, the
absolute position can be read.
1386
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.12
Reading the Servo
Delay for Controlled
Axes
Set data
0
[Description]
A servo delay, which is the difference between the specified position on
a controlled axis and the actual servo position, is read from the CNC.
Read data
0
Function code
30
2
Completion code
Function code
30
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Servo delay
(4 byte)
14
14
C.3.13
Reading the
Acceleration/
Deceleration Delay on
Controlled Axes
Set data
0
[Description]
An acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between the
programmed position on a controlled axis and the actual position after the
acceleration or deceleration, is read from the CNC.
Read data
0
Function code
31
2
Completion code
Function code
31
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Acceleration/
deceleration delay
(4 byte)
14
14
1387

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.14
[Description]
Reading Modal Data

(Lowspeed Response)
The continuousstate data is read from the CNC.

The continuousstate data can be broadly classified into two types: Data
of the preparatory function and data of other functions. When CTL2
(specified block) is set to 0, the continuousstate data of the previous
block is read. When CTL2 is set to 2, the continuousstate data of the next
block is read.
(1) Continuousstate data of the preparatory function
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
32
2
Completion code
Function code
32
Completion code
Data length
Data length
2
6
Data type
0 : Previous block
Data type
0 : Each data for G function

8
Specified block
Specified block
1 : Current block
10
Data area
(2 byte)
10
Modal data
2 : Next block
12
12
(Note) Format of the continuousstate data
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DATA+0
#0 to #6 : Continuousstate data
#7 : Specified block
1= Current block
0= Previous block
1388

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Continuousstate data of a function other than the preparatory

function
The following eleven data items of an NC part program can be read:
addresses D, E, H, L, M, N, O, S, T, and F, and second miscellaneous
function.
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
32
2
Completion code
Function code
32
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
6
Data type
0 : Previous block
Data type
24 : All data for G function

8
Specified block
Specified block
1 : Current block
10
10
Data area
(6 byte)
Modal data
(4 byte)
2 : Next block
14
15
16
FLAG 1
FLAG 2
16
FLAG 1 Data format
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLAG 2 Data format

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 3 : Number of decimal places

#4 :
Whether the decimal point is provided
#5 :
#6 :
#7 :
Not defined
#3 : Whether at least one address in the

range of D to the second miscellaneous
Other bits are not defined.
1389

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(3) Data specification

Kind of data
Modal data
Data specification
1)
Modal data of G function
The relationship between the numbers specified in the CTL1 (kinds of data), modal data codes is shown below. Into
CTL2 (the specified block), specify 0 (previous data), 1 (present date), or 2 (next data) in accordance with the
necessary modal data.
The G code for the lathe system is expressed with the G code system B. Refer to the table indicating the G function
system. For example, the G32 of the G code system A corresponds to the G33 of the G code system B. As a result,
the code fetched in the DATA + 0 is 4.
Specified number in
CTL1 (kinds of data)
G code for machining

center system
G code for lathe

system
(G code system B)
Code fetched in
DATA + 0
00
G00
G01
G02
G03
G33
G00
G01
G02
G03
G33
G77
G78
G79
0
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
01
G17
G18
G19
G97
G96
0
1
2
02
G90
G91
G90
G91
1
0
03
G22
G23
G22
G23
0
1
04
G93
G94
G95
G94
G95
2
0
1
05
G20
G21
G20
G21
1
0
06
G40
G41
G42
G40
G41
G42
0
1
2
07
G43
G44
G49
1
2
0
08
G80
G81
G82
G83
G84
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
G73
G74
G76
G80
G81
G82
G83
G84
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
G83.1
G84.1
G86.1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
09
G98
G99
G98
G99
0
1
10
G50
G51
0
1
1390
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Kind of data

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
Data specification
Modal data
Specified number in
G code for machining

center system
G code for lathe

system
(G code system B)
Code fetched in
DATA + 0
11
G66
G67
G66.1
G66
G66
G66.1
1
0
2
12
G96
G97
G68
G69
1
0
13
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
0
1
2
3
4
5
14
G61
G62
G63
G64
G61
G64
1
2
3
0
15
G69
G68
G17
G18
G19
0
1
2
16
G15
G16
0
1
17
G50.1
G51.1
G50.1
G51.1
0
1
1391

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
Kind of data
B61863E/15
Data specification
Modal data
Table 1 of G code system for a lathe system
G code system *1)
A
Function
G00
G01
G02
G03
G04
G07
G09
G10
G10.1
G11
G17
G18
G19
G20
G21
G22
G23
G27
G28
G29
G30
G31
G32
G34
G35
G36
G00
G01
G02
G03
G04
G07
G09
G10
G10.1
G11
G17
G18
G19
G20
G21
G22
G23
G27
G28
G29
G30
G31
G32
G34
G35
G36
G00
G01
G02
G03
G04
G07
G09
G10
G10.1
G11
G17
G18
G19
G70
G71
G22
G23
G27
G28
G29
G30
G31
G32
G34
G35
G36
G37
G37
G37
G37.1
G37.2
G37.3
G40
G41
G42
G50
G37.1
G37.2
G37.3
G40
G41
G42
G92
G37.1
G37.2
G37.3
G40
G41
G42
G92
G50.1
G51.1
G52
G53
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G61
G62
G64
G65
G66
G66.1
G67
G68
G69
G70
G71
G50.1
G51.1
G52
G53
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G61
G62
G64
G65
G66
G66.1
G67
G68
G69
G70
G71
G50.1
G51.1
G52
G53
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G61
G62
G64
G65
G66
G66.1
G67
G68
G69
G72
G73
1392
Positioning
Linear interpolation
Circular interpolation CW
Circular interpolation CCW
Dwell
Hypotherical axis interpolation
Exact stop
Data setting
PC data setting
Data setting mode cancel
XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axix or its parallel axis
YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Inch input
Metric input
Stored stroke check on
Stored stroke check off
Reference point return check
Reference point return
Return from reference point
Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
Skip function
Thread cutting
Variable lead thread cutting
Circular thread cutting CW
Circular thread cutting CCW or automatic tool
compensation (X axis)
Automatic tool compensation #1 or automatic tool
compensation (Z axis)
Automatic tool compensation #1
Tool nose radius compensation cancel
Tool nose radius compensation left
Tool nose radius compensation right
Workpiece coordinates change/maximum spindle spped
setting
Programmable mirror image cancel
Programmable mirror image
Local coordinate system setting
Machine coordinate system selection
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
Exact stop mode
Automatic corner override
Cutting mode
Macro call
Macro modal call A
Macro modal call B
Macro modal call A/B cancel
Mirror image for double currets on
Mirror image for double currets cancel
Finishing cycle
Stock removal in turning
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
Kind of data
Data specification
Modal data
Table 2 of G code system for a lathe system

G code system *1)
A
G72
G73
G74
G75
G76
G80
G81
G82
G83
G83.1
G84
G84.1
G85
G86
G86.1
G87
G88
G89
G90
G92
G94
G96
G97
G98
G99
*1)
2)
G72
G73
G74
G75
G76
G80
G81
G82
G83
G83.1
G84
G84.1
G85
G86
G86.1
G87
G88
G89
G77
G78
G79
G96
G97
G94
G95
G90
G91
G98
G99
Function
C
G74
G75
G76
G77
G78
G80
G81
G82
G83
G83.1
G84
G84.1
G85
G86
G86.1
G87
G88
G89
G20
G21
G24
G96
G97
G94
G95
G90
G91
G98
G99
Stock removal in facing

Pattern repeating
Peck drilling Z axis
Grooving in X axis
Threading cycle
Canned cycle for drilling cancel
Drilling cycle, spot boring
Drilling cycle, counter boring
Peck drilling cycle
Peck drilling cycle
Tapping cycle
Counter tapping cycle
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Fine boring cycle
Back boring cycle
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Outting cycle A
Thread cutting cycle
Outting cycle B
Constant surface speed control
Constant surface speed control
Feed per minute
Feed per revolution
Absolute command
Incremental command
Canned cycle initial level return
Canned cycle R point level return
G code system A/B can be selected by parameter setting (basic function).

Gcode sytem C is optinal function. However, when this option is selected, G code system A/B
is selectable.
Modal data other than the G function
Modal data other than

the G function
(address in the part program)
For machining
system
For turning
system
24
25
24
26
25
27
26
28
27
29
28
30
29
31
30
32
31
33
32
Second auxiliary function
34
33
1393
Field from which to

fetch data
DATA+0 to DATA+5

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.15
Reading Diagnosis
Data
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The data on the diagnostic data screen of the CNC is read.
Read data
0
Function code
33
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
2
6
Diagnosis number
Diagnosis number
8
Function code
33
Data attribute
0
10
Data attribute
0
10
Data area
(2 byte)
Diagnosis data
(2 byte)
12
12
NOTE
1 The valid range of diagnosis numbers is 0 to 103 and 200
to 303. (FS15B)
For the FS15i, the valid range of numbers is 1000 and
above. (FS15iA)
2 Only integer values can be read as diagnosis data.
(FS15iA)
3 For the FS15i, axis data can be read by specifying an axis
number for the data attribute.
1394

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.16
[Description]
Reading A/D
Conversion Data for
the Feed Motor
1.
The load current for an axis controlled by the CNC is converted to

adigital value and the digital value is read.
2.
The analog data input to the CNC is converted to a digital value by

the A/D converter and the digital value is read.
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
34
Function code
34
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
2
6
Data number
Data number
8
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(2 byte)
A/D conversion data

(2 byte)
12
12
An analog voltage ranging from 10V to +10V is input to the A/D

converter of the NC. The voltage is converted to a digital value ranging
form 0 to +255 and transferred by the window function to the PMC. This
value is called the A/D conversion data.
The digital value is proportional to the analog voltage: 0 corresponds to
10V, 128 corresponds to 0V, and 255 corresponds to +10V.
Type of analog voltage input
Generalpurpose analog input
Analog input of a voltage caluculated

from the load current for the axis controlled by the NC
(AC servo motor only)
Data number
Axis number
1
2
3
4
5
6
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Method of calculation of the load current of controlled axis from the read
A/D conversion data is as follows.
1395

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
a)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
In the case of peak current [Aop] of load current is calculated.

LOAD CURRENT[Aop] +
b)
In the case of ratings currents [Arms] of load current are calculated.

LOAD CURRENT[Arms] +
c)
(READ DATA) * 128

[Aop]
(COEFFICIENT)
(READ DATA) * 128

[Arms]
(COEFFICIENT) 2
In the case of percent (rate) is calculated.

rate of load[%] +
LOAD CURRENT[Aop]
PEAK CURRENT OF SERVO MOTOR
100[%]
COEFFICIENT:
It decides depending on the capacity of the amplifier to be used.
PEAK CURRENT OF SERVO MOTOR :
It dicides with the servo motor.
Examples
When the AC motor model 30s is used and the read A/D conversion
data is 150, method of calculating each load current.
The following is understood from manual of the servo.
AC motor model
Ratings currents(Arms)
30S
16
Moreover, the amplifier of 80A is used for the motor of 30S.

The coefficient is calculated.
The coefficient is a value by which the peak current of amplifier is
converted by 128.
COEFFICIENT +
128
+ 128 + 1.6
PEAK CURRENT VALUE OF AMPLIFIER
80
The peak current of the servo motor is calculated.

PEAK CURRENT[Aop]+ (ratings currents)
2 + 22.62742
+ 16
8 23 [Aop]
Since the rade A/D conversion data is 150, the peak current, the ratings
currents and the rate of the load can be calculated.
a)
Peak current[Aop] of load current

LOAD CURRENT[Aop] +
(READ DATA) * 128

+ 150 * 128
(COEFFICIENT)
1.6
+ 13.75 [Aop]
b)
Ratings currents[Arms] of load current

RATINGS CURRENTS[Arms] +
(READ DATA) * 128

+ 150 * 128
(COEFFICIENT) 2
1.6 2
+ 9.72 [Arms]
c)
PERCENT(RATE)
RATE OF LOAD[%]+
LOAD CURRENT[Aop]
PEAK CURRENT OF SERVO MOTOR
+ 13.75
23
1396
100 + 59.8 [%]
100
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
[Hardware]
When general analog input data is read, one of the following hardware
items is required:
1
SubCPU board
Analog I/O module on the additional axis board
For details of the relationship between input numbers and connectors,

refer to the connection manual. When an NC controlled axis load current
is read, the hardware described above is not required.
[NC parameters]
When this function is used, the NC parameters listed below need to be set.
For details, refer to the parameter descriptions.
1
Bit 6 of parameter No. 1810 = 0 (A/D conversion is performed.)
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1811 = 1 (A/D conversion data is output in

highspeed mode.)
C.3.17
Management Data
(Tool Group Number)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The number of the tool group in which the tool number is cataloged is
read.
Read data
0
Function code
38
2
Completion code
Function code
38
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Tool No.
Tool No.
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool group No.

(4 byte)
14
14
NOTE
The data can be read only when the tool life management
data function is provided.
1397

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.18
Management Data
(Number of Tool
Groups)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The number of tool groups contained in the tool life management data is
read.
Read data
0
Function code
39
Function code
39
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Number of tool
groups
(4 byte)
14
14
C.3.19
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Number of Tools)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The number of tools cataloged in the specified tool group is read.
Read data
0
Function code
40
2
Completion code
Function code
40
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Number of tools
(4 byte)
14
14
1398
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.20
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Tool Life)
(Lowspeed response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool life of the specified tool group is read.
Read data
0
Function code
41
Function code
41
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.

8
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool life
(4 byte)
14
14
C.3.21
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Tool Life Counter)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool life counter of the specified tool group is read.
Read data
0
Function code
42
2
Completion code
Function code
42
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.

8
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool life counter

(4 byte)
14
14
1399

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.22
Reading Tool Life
Management Data (Tool
Life Counter Type)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool life counter type of the specified tool group is read.
Read data
0
Function code
160
2
Completion code
Function code
160
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.

8
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)

(4 byte)
14
14
1 : The tool life counter indicates the number of times the tool has been used.
2 : The tool life counter indicates the period of time the tool has been used.
1400
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.23
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Tool Length
Compensation No.1)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A tool length compensation number is read according to the specified tool
group number and tool number.
Read data
0
Function code
43
2
Completion code
Function code
43
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
Tool No.
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool length compensation No.

(4 byte)
14
14
If nothing is specified after the H code, the NC transfers 255 (FFH).
1401

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.24
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Tool Length
Compensation No.2)
(Lowspeed response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A tool length compensation number is read according to the specified tool
group number and tool order number.
Read data
0
Function code
44
2
Completion code
Function code
44
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
Tool order number

10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool length
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
14
If nothing is specified after the H code, the NC transfers 255 (FFH).
1402
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.25
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
No.1)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A cutter compensation number is read according to the specified tool
group number and tool number.
Read data
0
Function code
45
2
Completion code
Function code
45
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
Tool No.
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Cutter
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
14
If nothing is specified after the D code, the NC transfers 255 (FFH).
1403

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.26
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
No.2)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A cutter compensation number is read according to the specified tool
Read data
0
Function code
46
2
Completion code
Function code
46
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
Tool order number

10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Cutter
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
14
If nothing is specified after the D code, the NC transfers 255 (FFH).
1404
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.27
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool information (status) is read according to the specified tool group
number and tool number.
Read data
0
Function code
47
2
Completion code
Function code
47
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
Tool No.
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool information
(4 byte)
14
14
Tool information
1 : The tool is cataloged.
2 : The tool life has expired.
3 : The tool was skipped.
1405

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.28
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool information (status) is read according to the specified tool group
number and tool order number.
Read data
0
Function code
48
Function code
48
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
Tool order number

10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool information
(4 byte)
14
14
Tool information
See the description in Section C.3.27.
C.3.29
Reading Tool Life
Management Data
(Tool Number)
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
A tool number is read according to the specified tool group number and
tool order number.
Read data
0
Function code
49
2
Completion code
Function code
49
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
Tool order number

10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Tool No.
(4 byte)
14
14
1406

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.30
[Description]
Reading Clock Data

(Lowspeed Response)
The current data (year, month, day) and current time (hours, minutes,
seconds) can be read from the clock built into the CNC.
Set data
0
Function code
151
Read data
0
2
Completion code
Function code
151
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
0 : Current data 6
6
Data format
Data format
1 : Current time 8
8
Data attribute
0
Data attribute
10
10
Data area
(6 byte)
Clock data
(6 byte)
16
16
(Note) Format of clock data
The data is binary.
Current date
DATA+ 0
+2
+4
Years (Example: 1992)

Months (Example: 12)
Days (Example: 16)
+6
Current time
DATA+ 0
+2
+4
+6
1407
Hours (Example: 23)

Minutes (Example: 59)
Seconds (Example: 59)

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.31
Reading the Relative
Position on a
Controlled Axis
Set data
0
[Description]
The relative position (relative coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by
the CNC is read.
Read data
0
Function code
74
2
Completion code
Function code
74
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Relative position
(4 byte)
Data area
(4 byte)
14
14
1) The unit of the read value is determined as follows:

(2) When the diameter is specified for the machining center system
increment.
2) The present position of a moving axis can be read whenever the
function instruction is executed.
1408
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.32
[Description]
Reading the Remaining

Travel
The remaining traveling distance on a feed axis controlled by the CNC is

read.
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
75
2
Completion code
Function code
75
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
Data number
8
Axis number
Axis number
10
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Remaining travel
(4 byte)
14
14
The unit of the read value is determined as follows:

(1) When the radius or diameter (except for the FS15MB) is
specified
increment.
(2) When the diameter is specified (FS15MB)
The data shows half the present position with the least input
increment as a unit.
1409

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.33
[Description]
Reading an Estimate
Disturbance Torque
Data
1)
The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/

deceleration of the torques of the servo axis are read.
2)
The load torques except a necessary torque for acceleration/

deceleration of the torques of the serial spindle axis are read.
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
211
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
6
Data number
0 or 1
8
10
Function code
211
Axis number
(1 to n)
0: Estimate disturbance
torque data of a digital
servo
1: Estimate disturbance
torque data of a serial
spindle
Data area
(2 byte)
12
Data length
2
6
Data number
8
10
Axis number
(1 to n)
Estimate disturbance
torque
(2 byte)
12
Kind of data
Data specification
Estimate disturbance torque data Please refer to FANUC AC SERVO AMPLIFIER AMINTENANCE MANUAL
of a digital servo
(B65005E) for correspondence of the load torque with the value of the read data.
Estimate disteurbance torque data Please refer to FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (SERIAL INTERFACE) MAINTEof a serial spindle
NANCE MANUAL (B65045E) for correspondence of the load torque with the value of
the read data.
The load torque of the spindle is understood from the undermentioned calculation type.
Load torque + The read data
16384
Maximum output torque of spindle
* For an explanation of the CNC parameters, refer to the CNC

Parameter Description.
1410
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.34
Reading the Machining
Time
(Lowspeed Response)
Set data
0
[Description]
The machining time currently specified for a program is read.
Read data
0
Function code
178
2
Completion code
Function code
178
Completion code
Data length
Data length
6
6
Program number
Program number
8
Data attribute
1
Data attribute
1
10
10
Data area
(6 byte)
Machining time
(6 byte)
16
16
1411

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.35
Reading the Load
Current (A/D
Conversion Data) for
the Spindle Motor
Set data
0
[Description]
The load current for the spindle (spindle motor) is converted to a digital
value and the digital value is read. (See Subsection C.3.16, Reading the
Load Current (A/D Conversion Data) for the Feed Motor.)
Read data
0
Function code
153
2
Completion code
Function code
153
Completion code
Data length
Data length
2
6
Data number
0
8
Axis number
(1 to n)
10
Data number
The 15B supports
two spindles, while
the 15iA supports
four spindles.
Axis number
(1 to n)
10
Data area
(2 byte)
A/D conversion data

(2 byte)
12
12
[Hardware]
When general analog input data is read, one of the following hardware
items is required:
1
SubCPU board
Analog I/O module on the additional axis board
With a serial spindle, however, the hardware described above is not

required if CNC software of mass production version IV or later is used.
For the relationship between input numbers and connectors, refer to the
connection manual.
[NC parameters]
When this function is used, the NC parameters listed below must be set.
For details, refer to the parameter descriptions.
1
Bit 6 of parameter No. 1810 = 0 (A/D conversion is performed.)
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1811 = 1

(A/D conversion data is output in highspeed mode.)
1412

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.36
Reading the Tool Offset
Data According to the
Specified Tool Number
Set data
0
[Description]
The tool number is spedified and the tool offset data is read.
Read data
0
Function code
213
2
Completion code
Function code
213
Completion code
Data length
Data length
4
6
Data format
Data format
8
Tool number
Tool number
10
10
offset data
(4 byte)
Data area
(4 byte)
16
16
Kind of the data to be read

Tool number
Pot number
Pot number
Tool length compensation value
Cutter compensation value
The data form

CTL1
01
10
11
20
21
30
31
Tool number
CTL2
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
NOTE
Please use the bit 4 of NC parameter No. 7401 as 1.
When the completion code 5 is returned, change the
format of the window in the SETTING Screen.
(REFERENCE:chapter II 4.4 SETTING Screen)
1413

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.37
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Group Numbers)
(Lowspeed Type)
The tool group number in which a tool number is registered is read.

Note that the tool number area is four bytes in length so that a tool number
of up to eight digits can be specified.
Settings
0
After reading
0
Function code
200
+2
+2
Completion code
+4
+6
Completion code
+4
Data length
Data format
+8
Tool number
+10
+12
Tool number
+12
Data area
+14
Data length
4
+6
Data format
0
+8
+10
Function code
200
Tool group number

+14
(4 byte)
+16
+16
1414
(4 byte)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.38
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Length
Compensation Number
1) (Lowspeed Type)
The tool length compensation number corresponding to the specified tool

group number and tool number is read.
Settings
0
After reading
0
Function code
227
+2
+2
Completion code
+4
Completion code
+4
Data length
+6
Tool group number
+8
+8
Tool number
+10
+12
Tool number
+12
Data area
+14
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+10
Function code
227
+14
(4 byte)
+16
+16
1415
Tool length
compensation number
(4 byte)

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.39
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
Number 1)
(Lowspeed Type)
The cutter compensation number corresponding to the specified tool

group number and tool number is read.
Settings
0
After reading
0
Function code
228
+2
+2
Completion code
+4
Completion code
+4
Data length
+6
Tool group number
+8
+8
Tool number
+10
+12
Tool number
+12
Data area
+14
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+10
Function code
228
+14
(4 byte)
+16
+16
1416
Cutter compensation
number
(4 byte)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.40
Reading Tool Life

Management Data
(Lowspeed Type)
The tool information (state) corresponding to the specified tool group

number and tool number is read.
Settings
0
After reading
0
Function code
201
+2
+2
Completion code
+4
Completion code
+4
Data length
+6
Tool group number
+8
+8
Tool number
+10
+12
Tool number
+12
Data area
+14
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+10
Function code
201
+14
(4 byte)
+16
+16
Explanation of tool information

1 : The tool is registered.
2 : The tool has expired.
3 : The tool has been skipped.
1417
Tool length
compensation number
(4 byte)

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.41
Reading Real
Parameters
(Lowspeed Type)
Settings
0
Real parameters are read from the CNC.
After reading
0
Function code
321
+2
+2
Completion code
+4
Completion code
+4
Data length
+6
+8
Data length
4
+6
Parameter number
+10
Data attribute
+8
0: no axis
1 to n:
axis specified
+12
Parameter number
+10
Data attribute
+12
Decimal point position

+14
+14
Parameter value
Data area
+16
Function code
321
+16
(4 byte)
+18
(4 byte)
+18
NOTE
An integer or bit parameter cannot be read using function
code 321.
Read a parameter using:
D Real parameter: Function code 321
D Integer or bit parameter: Function code 17
Example) The value of a readout parameter is as follows:
(Value of a readout parameter) =
(value of the parameter on the NC)
10(specified decimal point position)
Parameter value
1
12
123
1234
12340
1418
Value on the NC
1.123
0
1
2
3
4
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.3.42
Reading the actual
Machine Position
(Machine Coordinates)
of Controlled Axes.
[Description]
The machine position (machine coordinates) on a feed axis controlled by
the CNC can be read.
The machine position value includes the servo delay and the acceleration
/ deceleration delay.
So, this value might be not corresponding to the machine position value
on the position screen in the CNC.(This screen can be displayed by
pressing the function button POS.)
[Structure]
Input data
0
Output data
0
Function code
329
2
Completion code
Completion code
4
Data length
6
Data number
0
Function code
329
Data attribute
M
(M=Axis number)
10
Data length
4
Data number
0
Data attribute
M
(M=Axis number)
10
Data area
(4 byte)
Data area
(4 byte)
14
14
When either of the diameter or the radius is specified, the read value
shows double the present position with the least input increment as a unit.
NOTE
1 This function is provided by the FS15iA (PMCNB6) only.
2 To use this function, please set NC parameter 1013#7 to 1.
This parameter should be set only for necessary axes
because this parameter increases the load of CNC CPU.
1419

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.43
Reading Fine Torque
Sensing Data
(Statistical Calculation
Results).
[Description]
This function reads the statistical calculation results (average value,
maximum value and distribution) in the fine torque sensing function.
[Structure]
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
226
2
Completion code
Function code
226
Completion code
Data length
Data number
Data length
6 Axis count
Data number
8
Axis number
10
Axis number
1: Read all axes
n: Read one axis
Data area
10
In case that Axis number is set to n
10
Average value of
target axis
12
Maximum value of
target axis
14
Output only for number of axes specified to

parameter NO.4670 to 4673.
Distribution of
target axis
16
In case that Axis number is set to 1:
10
Average value of
target axis 1
12
Maximum value of
target axis 1
14
Distribution of
target axis 1
16
Average value of
target axis 2
18
Maximum value of
target axis 2
20
Distribution of
target axis 2
22
:
NOTE
This function is provided by the FS15iA (PMCNB6) only.
1420

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.44
(1) Store Counter
Reading Fine Torque

Sensing Data (Store
Data)
[Description]
This function reads the number of stored torque data items. (Store
Counter)
[Structure]
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
232
2
Completion code
Function code
232
Completion code
Data length
Data attribute
Data length
4
Data attribute
8
Axis number
0
10
0: Newest data counter

1: Sample data counter
Axis number
0
10
Data area
Store counter value

14
NOTE
1421

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Stored torque data (newest data)

[Description]
This function reads the newest stored data among stored torque data
[Structure]
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
232
2
Completion code
Function code
232
Completion code
Data length
Data attribute

Data length
2 or 0
Data attribute
8
Axis number
N
Axis number
N
10
10
Data area
Newest stored data

12
NOTE
1 When no data is stored, 0 is read as data length and no
data is read. The function completes normally.
2 When data attribute is set to 11, the sample data whose
number is same as the last number of newest data is read.
Ex.) In case that 10000 sample data items (the data number
from 0 to 9999) and newest data items 5000 (the data
number from 0 to 4999) are stored, newest data which
number is 4999 is read when data attribute is set to
10. And sample data which number is 4999 is read
when data attribute is set to 11.
3 When data attribute is set to 11 and no sample data whose
number is same as the last number of newest data is stored,
0 is read as data length and no data is read. The function
completes normally.
Ex.) In case that 5000 sample data items (the data number
from 0 to 4999) and newest data items 10000 (the data
number from 0 to 9999) are stored, no data is read, and
the function completes normally when data attribute is
set to 11.
1422

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(3) Stored torque data (any data)

[Description]
This function reads the newest stored data among stored torque data
[Structure]
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
232
2
Completion code
Function code
232
Completion code
Data length
Data attribute
6
Data length
2 n
Data attribute
8
Axis number
N
Axis number
N
10
10
Data number
m
Data number
m
14
14
Number of data items
n
Number of data items

n
16
16
Number m data
18
Number m+1 data
20
Number m+2 data
22
:
24
Number m+n1 data
26
1423

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
NOTE
1. The valid area of data number m is as follows:
0 m (524288 1/a 1/b) 1
1 : the number of the axes for Fine Torque Sensing is 1
for a = 2 : the number of the axes for Fine Torque Sensing is 2
4 : the number of the axes for Fine Torque Sensing is 3 or 4
1 : sample data saving function is disabled
b=
2 : sample data saving function is enabled
The valid area of the number of data n is as follows:
1 n 120
2. When data number m which is in the valid range exceeds the number of actually stored data
items, 0 is read as data length and no data is read. The function completes normally.
Ex.) In case that the number of target axes is 2 and the sample data store function is enabled,
the data numbers are valid in the range between 0 and 13107. However, if an attempt is
made to read data from data number m 131020 when the number of actually stored data
items is 131000 (the data number from 0 to 130999), 0 is read as data length and no data
is read. The function completes normally.
(Example 1 in figure below)
3. When data number m is within the number of actually stored data items, and the number
m+n1 exceeds the number of actually stored data items, data of the stored data items is read.
The function completes normally.
In this case, double of the number of read data items is read as data length.
Ex.) If an attempt is made to read number of data items n 120 from data number m 130900
under the same conditions as in the example above, the data number from 130900 to
130999 is read and 200 is read as data length.
Also if an attempt is made to read number of data items n 120 from data number m
130990 under the same conditions as in the example above, the data number from 130990
to 130999 is read, and 20is read as data length.
Data number vallid range

Range of actually stored data
Specified range (Ex. 1)

Reading range

Reading range

0
131000
131071
1424

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.3.45
Reading detailed
information of CNC
alarm.
[Description]
This function reads detailed information of CNC alarm.
The detailed information of CNC alarm is as follows.
D axis number
D alarm type
D alarm number
[Structure]
Set data
0
Read data
0
Function code
330
2
Completion code
Function code
330
Completion code
Data length
Number of alarm
1 to 30
Data length
8n+2
Number of alarm
1 to 30
8
Alarm type
1 to 20
1
: All alarm types
0 to 20 : Alarm type
Alarm type
10
10
Data area
Alarm information
(n = read number of alarm.)
NOTE
[Alarm type]
Following is a correspondence table of the alarm type and the alarm type
number.
Alarm type
number
Alarm type
Alarm type
number
Alarm type
BG alarm
10
PS alarm
11
OH alarm
12
SV alarm
13
IO alarm
SR alarm
SN alarm
14
PW alarm
SW alarm
15
SY alarm
OT alarm
16
PC alarm
17
EX alarm
18
19
MC alarm
1425
Alarm type
number
20
Alarm type
SP alarm

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Structure of detailed alarm information]

2 byte
4 byte
2 byte
2 byte
Number
of read
alarm
Axis information
Alarm
type
Alarm
number
7
15
23
31
6
14
22
30
5
4
13 12
21 20
29 28
3
11
19
27
2
10
18
26
1
9
17
25
0
8
16
24
8 byte
.....
0
: Not axis type.
bit0=1 : An alarm is issued for
the first axis.
bit1=1 : An alarm is issued for
the second axis.
:
:
First alarm
8 byte
.....
.....
Second
nth
alarm
alarm
[Example]
NC alarm : OT alarm NO.6
(An alarm is issued for the 1st axis.)
: SV alarm NO.10,11 (Alarms are issued for the 3rd axis.)
: Ex alarm NO.5
(Not axis type)
When these alarms are issued, the read data is as follows.
1.
Set data
0
2
4
6
8
Function code
Completion code
Data length
Number of alarm
Alarm type
In case that the SV alarm is read.

Read data
0
Function code
330
10
12
10
10
12
16
18
20
24
26
28
1426
330
Completion code
Data length
18
Number of alarm
10
Alarm type
12
Number of read alarms
Axis information 1
Alarm type 1
12
Alarm number 1
10
Axis information 2
Alarm type 2
12
Alarm number 2
11

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
2.
Set data
0
2
4
6
8
Function code
Completion code
Data length
In case that all alarms are read.

Read data
0
Function code
330
Number of alarm
10
Alarm type
6
8
10
10
12
16
18
20
24
26
28
32
34
36
40
42
44
1427
330
Completion code
Data length
34
Number of alarm
10
Alarm type
Number of read alarms
Axis information 1
Alarm type 1
Alarm number 1
Axis information 2
Alarm type 2
12
Alarm number 2
10
Axis information 3
Alarm type 3
12
Alarm number 3
11
Axis information 4
Alarm type 4
Alarm number 4

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4
FORMAT AND
DETAILS OF THE
CONTROL DATA OF
THE WINDW
FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(1) See the description of the window function. The data item marked
with a dash () in the description of the data structure need not be
entered.
When output, the data item has no meaning.
(2) The length of all data blocks and data items is represented in bytes.
(3) The output data becomes valid only when the instruction terminates
normally.
Completion code
10
Description
The window instruction is being processed. Hold ACT
until W1 is set to 1.
The instruction terminated normally.
An error occurred. The corresponding function number is

not found.
An error occurred. Possible causes include the following:

Wrong data is found in the CTL area. The NC does not
have the corresponding function.
An error occurred. The specified axis is not provided.
An error occurred. it is a mistake of data form. Though the

function supports only a new format, a old format is specified.
1428
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.1
[Description]
Writing a Tool Offset

Data
The data is directly written into the tool offset value (tool compensation)
area of the CNC.
Set data
0
Function code
14
2
Completion code
4
Data length
4
6
Offset number
8
Offset format
10
Tool offset value
(4 byte)
14
(Note 1) Offset format
M series (machining center system)
Data type
Tool compensation A
Compensation
Tool compensation B
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Tool compensation C
Tool length
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Cutter
Geometry
compensation
Wear
compensation
Format
T series (lathe system)

Offset number
(CTL+2, 3)
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
Offset number
+1000
Data type
Tool compensation A
Compensation along the
Xaxis
Zaxis
Yaxis
Compensation related to the position of the virtual tool
Format
Offset number
(CTL+2, 3)
Offset number
Offset number
3
4
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Tool compensation B
Geometry compensation
Compensation along the Xaxis
Compensation along the Zaxis
Compensation along the Yaxis
Wear compensation
Compensation along the Xaxis
1
2
3
4
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Offset number
Compensation along the Zaxis
Compensation along the Yaxis
Compensation related to the

position of the virtual tool
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
+1000
Offset number
1429

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.2
[Description]
Writing a Parameter
(Setting Data)
The data is written into the parameter area of the CNC.

The parameters of the CNC are classified into four types according to the
smallest unit that has a meaning. Bit parameter: Each bit has a meaning.
Byte parameter: Each byte has a meaning. Word parameter: Each set of
two bytes has a meaning. Double word parameter: Each set of four bytes
has a meaning.
Each bit of a bit parameter cannot be written individually. The eight bits
(one byte) of the parameter must be written at a time. To change a bit of
a bit parameter, read the entire parameter, change the desired bit, then
write the entire parameter.
Set data
0
Function code
18
2
Completion code
4
Data length
4
6
Parameter number
0 : No axis
8
Data attribute
1 to n : A specified axis
10
Parameter data
(4 byte)
14
(Note 1) Format of parameter data

If the data is one byte long, it is set in the DATA+0 area.
10
11
12
13
DATA+0
DATA+1
DATA+2
DATA+3
14
NOTE
For the PMCNB6, realtype parameters cannot be written,
causing a CTL ERROR to occur.
1430

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.3
Writing a Custom
Macro Variable
[Description]
The data is written into the custom macro variable area of the CNC.
Set data
0
Function code
22
2
Completion code
4
Data length
6
Custom macro
number
8
Data attribute
0
10
Custom macro
variable value
(4 byte)
14
Position of
decimal point
(2 byte)
16
(Note 1) In the case of writing a Custom Macro Variable of
upper than 100000.
Please input 10 to Data attribute, and input last
four digits of variable number to Custom macro
variable number.
(Note 2) Specification of the position of the decimal point
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DATA+4
#0 to #3 : Set number of digit beelow decimal point.
#4 to #7 : Set to 0.
Examples
(Value written in the NC) +

Value in the NC
1234. 000
123. 400
12. 340
1. 124
0. 1234
1431
(value of custom macro variable)

10 (Positon of decimal point)
Custom macro variable value
1234
Position of
decimal point
0
1
2
3
4

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.4
[Description]
Writing a Data on the

Program Check Screen
The data to be displayed on the program check screen of the CNC is

rewritten.
Set data
0
Function code
150
2
Completion code
4
Data length
2, 4
6
Data type
8
Data attribute
0
10
Data on the program
check screen
(2 byte)
12
Data length
15B
15i
Data
type
Attrib
ute
M code which is being executed (1 to 5)
1 to 5
Spindle speed range
100
Spindle tool number
2, 4
200
Number of the tool to be used next
2, 4
201
Data type
NOTE
1 As much program check screen data as the amount
specified with the data length can be written.
2 When the 15i is used, the spindle tool number and the next
machining tool number can each be written into a 2 or
4byte area.
1432
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.5
Writing the Torque
Limit Override
[Description]
The torque limit override of the specified feed axis is rewritten.
Set data
0
Function code
152
2
Completion code
4
Data length
2
6
Data type
0
8
Axis number
Value
10
Torque limit override
Unsigned binary <Unit: %>

The values from 0 to 255 correspond to
0% to 100%.
12
[Example]
If the torque limit override is 50%, please set to 128.
NOTE
This window is valid for parameters set on the CNC.
0: Fixed to override 100%
Parameter 1802#4
1: This window enabled.
1433

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.6
Management Data
(Tool Group Number)
Set data
0
The tool number and the tool life value are written into the specified tool
group.
Function code
163
Data type
2
Completion code
[Description]
Number of
tool groups
Data length
4
6
Data number
0
8
Tool No.
Specification
Register the tool group.
Set group number, tool life value, and tool life counter for
transmission data.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Group number
DATA+0
Life counter type
DATA+1
DATA+1 BIT 7
DATA+2
Tool life value
DATA+3
Group number 1 to 512
Tool life value 1 to 9999 (Specified number of time)
1 to 4300 (Specified time)
Tool life counter type ( DATA+1 BIT 7)
0: Number of time
1: Time (minute)
10
Tool group No.
12
(4 byte)
Tool life value
14
C.4.7
Management Data
(Tool Life)
[Description]
The data is written into the tool life value area of the specified tool group.
Set data
0
Function code
164
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Data attribute
0
10
Tool life
(4 byte)
14
1434
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.8
Management Data
(Tool Life Counter)
[Description]
The data is written into the tool life counter area of the specified tool
group.
Set data
0
Function code
165
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Data attribute
0
10
Tool life counter
(4 byte)
14
C.4.9
Management Data
(Tool Life Counter Type)
[Description]
The data is written into the tool life counter type area of the specified tool
group.
Set data
0
Function code
166
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Data attribute
0
10
(4 byte)
14
1 : The tool life counter indicates the number of times the tool has been used.
2 : The tool life counter indicates the period of time the tool has been used.
1435

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.10
Length Compensation
Number 1)
[Description]
The data is written into the tool length compensation number area
specified by the tool group number and tool number.
Set data
0
Function code
167
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
10
Tool length
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
C.4.11
Length Compensation
Number 2)
[Description]
The data is written into the tool length compensation number area
specified by the tool group number and tool order number.
Set data
0
Function code
168
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
10
Tool length
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
1436
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.12
Management Data
Number 1)
[Description]
The data is written into the cutter compensation number area specified by
the tool group number and tool number.
Set data
0
Function code
169
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
10
Cutter
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
C.4.13
Management Data
Number 2)
[Description]
The data is written into the cutter compensation number area specified by
the tool group number and tool order number.
Set data
0
Function code
170
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
10
Cutter
compensation No.
(4 byte)
14
1437

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.14
Management Data
[Description]
The data is written into the tool information (status) area specified by the
tool group number and tool number.
Set data
0
Function code
171
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool No.
10
Tool information
(4 byte)
14
Tool information
1 : The tool is cataloged.
2 : The tool life has expired.
3 : The tool was skipped.
C.4.15
Management Data
[Description]
The data is written into the tool information (status) area specified by the
tool group number and tool order number.
Set data
0
Function code
172
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
10
Tool information
(4 byte)
14
1438
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.16
Management Data
(Tool Number)
[Description]
A tool number is written into (added to) the area specified by the tool
Set data
0
Function code
173
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Tool group No.
8
Tool order number
10
Tool No.
(4 byte)
14
1439

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.17
Writing the Tool Offset
Data According to the
Specified Tool Number
[Description]
The tool number is specified and the tool offset data is written.
Set data
0
Function code
214
2
Completion code
Data length
4
6
Data format
8
Tool number
12
offset data
(4 byte)
16
Kind of the data to be written

Change of Tool number
Change of Tool number
Pot number
Pot number
Addition of Tool number
Addition of Tool number
The data form

CTL1
Tool number
CTL2
00
01
10
11
20
21
30
31
40
41
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
Tool No.
Tool display number
NOTE
(Only Series 15B)
Please use the bit 4 of NC parameter No. 7401 as 1.
When the completion code 5 is returned, change the
format of the window in the SETTING Screen.
(REFERENCE : chapter II 4.4 SETTING Screen)
1440
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.18
Writing the
Superposition Move
Command
[Description]
After the axes for manual handle feed are selected in the manual handle
feed mode, the traveling distances (number of pulses) corresponding to
three manual pulse generators are written. The set value ranges from 256
to +256.
The specified number of pulses is assumed to be the number of pulses
entered from the manual pulse generator. The speed is calculated as
follows: (specified number of pulses)
(magnification)
62.5
(pulses/second) The data in parameters 1413 and 1414 of the CNC is
valid for this function.
(1) For three axes
Set data
0
Function code
215
2
Completion code
4
Data length
6
Data number
0
8
Data attribute
0
10
Superposition
move command
(6 byte)
16
(Note 1) Format of superposition move command
DATA+0
DATA+2
DATA+4
First manual pulse generator

Second manual pulse generator
Third manual pulse generator
DATA+6
The data for using the fourth manual pulse generator is as shown on the
next page.
1441

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) For four axes

Set data
0
Function code
215
2
Completion code
4
Data length
8
Axis specification
mode
8
Axis number
10
Superposition
move command
(8 byte)
18
Axis specification mode
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#0 : Mode selection (0: The BMI signal is selected. 1: An axis number is selected.)
Axis number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CTL+8
P2
P1
CTL+9
P4
P3
CTL+8, #0 to #3:
CTL+8, #4 to #7:
CTL+9, #0 to #3:
CTL+9, #4 to #7:
(Note 1) Format of superposition move command

DATA+0
DATA+2
DATA+4
DATA+6
First manual pulse generator

Second manual pulse generator
Third manual pulse generator
Fourth manual pulse generator
DATA+8
1442
Axis number of the first pulse generator (P1)

Axis number of the second pulse generator (P2)
Axis number of the third pulse generator (P3)
Axis number of the fourth pulse generator (P4)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.19
[Description]
Writing the Feedrate
Feedrate writing can be specified only in the feedperminute mode. The

velocity command is specified with F 10d. A flag is provided to
validate either the command of the PMC or the feedrate of the CNC. After
the flag is set, the velocity command specified in the NC is invalidated.
To validate the feedrate of the NC, set the flag to 0.
Set data
0
Function code
216
2
Completion code
4
Data length
6
Data number
0
8
Data attribute
0
10
Feedrate
(6 byte)
16
(Note 1) Format of feedrate
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DATA+0
Flag for validating the velocity command
: Bit 2 of DATA+0
(0: The NC is valid.
DATA+2
Feedrate, F
1: The PMC is valid.)
Feedrate, F
: DATA+2 and DATA+3
DATA+4 Exponent
Exponent of feedrate, d : DATA+4 and DATA+5
of feedrate, d
DATA+6
NOTE
With the FS15iA (PMCNB6), this function is of the
lowspeed type. Therefore, this function need not be
interlocked with other windows.
1443

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.20
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
(Tool Group Numbers)
A tool number and a tool life value are written to a specified tool number.
Settings
0
Function code
202
+2
Completion code
+4
Data type
Data specifications
Tool group number

Data length
6
The tool group is registered. As transfer data, the group

number, life value, and life counter type are set.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+6
Data number
0
DATA+0
DATA+1
+8
+10
DATA+2
Tool number
DATA+3
DATA+4
+12
+14
Group number +
life counter type
(DATA+1 BIT7 7)
Life values
DATA+5
Tool group number
(6 byte)
Tool life value
Group number 1 to
Life value
1 to 99999999 (if a count is specified)
1 to 59940 (if a time is specified)
Life counter type (DATA+BIT 7)
0 : Count
1 : Time (in minutes)
+16
+18
NOTE
1444
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.21
Writing Tool Life

Length Compensation
Number 1)
Data is written to the tool length compensation number specified by a tool

group number and a tool number.
Settings
0
Function code
229
+2
Completion code
+4
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+8
+10
Tool number
+12
+14
Tool length
compensation number
(4 byte)
+16
NOTE
1445

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.22
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
Number 1)
Data is written to the cutter compensation number specified by a tool

group number and a tool number.
Settings
0
Function code
230
+2
Completion code
+4
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+8
+10
Tool number
+12
+14
Cutter compensation
number
(4 byte)
+16
NOTE
1446
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
C.4.23
Writing Tool Life

Management Data
Data is written to the tool information (state) specified by a tool group

number and a tool number.
Settings
0
Function code
231
+2
Completion code
+4
Data length
4
+6
Tool group number
+8
+10
Tool number
+12
Tool information
+14
(4 byte)
+16
Explanation of tool information

1 : The tool is registered.
2 : The tool has expired.
3 : The tool has been skipped.
NOTE
1447

(PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
C.4.24
Writing Real
Parameters
(Lowspeed Type)
Real parameters are written to the CNC.
Settings
0
Function code
323
+2
Completion code
+4
Data length
6
+6
+8
Parameter number
+10
0: no axis
1 to n: axis specified
Data attribute
+12
+14
Data area
+16
(4 byte)
+18
NOTE
Integer parameters cannot be written.
Example)
(Value to be set on the NC) =
(Parameter variable value)

10(specified decimal point position)
Value to be set on
the NC
Custom macro
variable value
1234.000
123.400
12.640
1.234
0.1234
1234
0
1
2
3
4
1448
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
D. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
1449

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
D.1
OUTLINE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The following function is added to PMCCNC window function for

FS16LA.
(1) Transferring a processing condition file in nonvolatile memory to
data area in CNC memory, and vice versa.
(2) Reading a comment command in a part program.
(3) Reading data commanded to laser oscillator
The following functions are added to the PMCCNC window function on
the FS16iLA/LB:
(1) Reading of comments
Comments specified within programs can be read.
(2) Laser command value data and laser setting data can be read and
written, and command value data to the laser oscillator can be read.
CAUTION
Data transfer of machining condition files between data
areas is not possible by ladder diagrams on the
FS16iLA/LB.
1450

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
D.2
FUNCTION
D.2.1
Transfer Between Data
Area and Nonvolatile
Memory
(1) Transfer from data area to nonvolatile memory. (% lowspeed

type)
[Contents of data]
The data can be transferred from the data area in CNC to PMC
nonvolatile memory by PMCRC application.
Setting the original data set or group in data attribute M.
Setting the written address of nonvolatile memory for the offset address
from the top address in address N.
Setting the total byte No. of written data set in address L.
Setting the forward structure of data set in data.
And the data can be transferred set or group from data area to nonvolatile
memory.
[Structure of input data]
The following End Code is output at reading end.
Top address + 0
0 : normal end
3 : The incorrect data is set in Address.
4 : The incorrect data is set in Data attribute.
(Function code)
183
2
(End Code)
(No need to set)

4
L = Set the total byte No. of the data structure

for 1 set in nonvolatile memory.
This data must be set in case of transferring
the data group.
(Noneed to set in case of transferring the set)
(Data length)
L
6
N = Set the forward address by the offset from

the top address of nonvolatile memory.
(Address)
N
8
M = Set the kind of data set or group to transfer
(Data attribute)
M
110
101103
201205
1000
1001
1002
10
(Data)
: Set of processing data

: Set of piercing d data
: Set of edge process data
: Group of processing data
: Group of piercing data
: Group of edge process data
Structure of data set

Set the correspondence of 1 set of data item in
data area and data item in nonvolatile memory
by relative address for nonvolatile memory.
(See note for details.)
1451

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Transfer from nonvolatile memory to data area (% lowspeed type)

[Contents of data]
The data can be transferred from the processing condition file registered
in nonvolatile memory to the data area in CNC by PMCSC application.
Setting the forward data set or group in data attribute M.
Setting the original read address for the offset address from nonvolatile
memory top address in address N.
Setting the total byte No. of original data set in address L.
Setting the original structure of set in data.
And the data of set or group can be transferred from nonvolatile memory
to data area.
The following End Code is output at reading end.
Top address + 0
0 : normal end
3 : The incorrect data is set in Address.
4 : The incorrect data is set in Data attribute.
(Function code)
184
2
(End Code)
(No need to set)

4
(Data length)
L
L = Set the total byte No. of the data structure

for 1 set in nonvolatile memory.
This data must be set in case of transferring
the data group.
(Noneed to set in case of transferring the set)
(Group No.)
N
N = Set the original address by the offset from

the top address of nonvolatile memory.
8
M = Set the kind of data set or group to transfer
(Data attribute)
M
110
101103
201205
1000
1001
1002
10
(Data)
: Set of processing data

: Set of piercing d data
: Set of edge process data
: Group of processing data
: Group of piercing data
: Group of edge process data
Structure of data set

Set the correspondence of 1 set of data item in
data area and data item in nonvolatile memory
by relative address for nonvolatile memory.
(See note for details.)
1452
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
(3) Data structure of data area

(a) Processing data set
Address
Data item
Byte No.
Feedrate
Peak power
Pulse frequency
Pulse duty
10
Assist gas pres.
12
Assist gas select
14
Assist gas settling time
16
Reference displacement
18
Offset amount
22
Edge process select
24
Startup process select
(b) Piercing data set

Address
Data item
Byte No.
Peak power
Initial frequency
Initial duty
Frequency increment
Duty increment
10
Step time
12
Step No.
14
Piercing time
18
Assist gas pres.
20
Assist gas select
22
24
(c) Edge processing data set

Address
Data item
Byte No.
Judge angle
Peak power
Pulse frequency
Pulse duty
Piercing time
12
Assist gas pres.
14
Assist gas select
16
Return distance
20
Return feed rate
22
Return frequency
24
Return duty
1453

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
NOTE
Example of data set
The address in Data is set as follows, for example, in case
of the following data structure of processing condition file in
nonvolatile memory.
Data structure of data area
Address
The example of data structure for

the processing condition file in
nonvolatile memory
Data
Address
Data
Feedrate
Feedrate
Peak power
Peak power
Pulse frequency
Pulse frequency
Pulse duty
Pulse duty
10
Assist gas pres.
10
Focus distance
12
Assist gas select
12
Assist gas pres.
14
Assist gas time
14
Assist gas select
16
Ref. displacement
16
Assist gas time
18
Offset amount
18
Ref. displacement
22
Edge select
20
Offset amount
24
Startup select
24
Pulse type
26
Edge select
28
Startup select
Data item in data area

Feedrate
Peak power
Pulse frequency
Pulse duty
Assist gas pres.
Assist gas select
Assist gas time
Ref. displacement
Offset amount
Edge select
Startup select
Address
Top address +10
Top address +12
Top address +14
Top address +16
Top address +18
Top address +20
Top address +22
Top address +24
Top address +26
Top address +28
Top address +30
1454
Data setting value

0
4
6
8
12
14
16
18
20
26
28

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
D.2.2
Reading of the
Comment
The data in the parentheses is written in the comment area, if the following
Mcode is commanded in a part program. This comment can be read from
PMC.
Mxxx (* * * * * * *) ;
Less than 24 characters,
including alphabet, numeral, decimalpoint and +/
[Contents of data]
Contents of the data can be read for ASCII code.
The following End Code is output at writing end.
Top address + 0
0 : normal end
1 : The data length of comment data is over 24
bytes
(Function code)
140
2
(End Code)
(No need to set)

4
L = Data length of the comments read in.

(Added 1 in case of the odd number.)
(Data length)
L
6
(Group No.)
8
(Data attribute)
10
(Data)
The read comment data is set.
NOTE
1 The comment is overwritten if the next comment is input.
2 Mcode number for reading of the comment is set to
parameter number 15350.
Setting value is 0 to 999.
1455

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
D.2.3
Reading and Writing
the Laser Command
Data and Laser Setting
Data
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(1) Reading the laser command data and laser setting data
(:highspeed type)
[Contents of the data]
The laser command data and laser setting data for CNC can be read by
PMCSC application. The data are separated to groups and can be read
by the group.
Top address + 0
0 : normal end
2 : The incorrect data is set for Data length.
3 : The incorrect data is set for Data No.
(Function code)
186
2
(End Code)
(No need to set)

4
L = Set the byte No. assigned for the group.
(Data length)
L
6
N = Set the group No.
(Group No.)
N
8
(Data attribute)
(No need to set)

10
(Data)
1456

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(2) Writing the laser command data and laser setting data (:lowspeed
type)
[Contents of the data]
The data can be written to the laser command data for CNC by PMCSC
application. The data are separated to groups and can be written by the
group.
Top address + 0
0:
2:
3:
5:
(Function code)
187
2
(End Code)
(No need to set)
normal end
The incorrect data is set for Data length.
The incorrect data is set for Data No.
The data beyond the allowable range is set
for data command to write.
4
L = Set the byte No. assigned for the group.
(Data length)
L
6
N = Set the group No.
(Group No.)
N
8
(Data attribute)
(No need to set)

10
(Data)
1457

(FS16/16iLA/16iLB)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(3) The data structure of the laser command data and laser setting data
Group No.
Address Top
add. +
Byte No.
for every item
Data length
Byte No.
Item
10
12
2
2
Power control duty const

Power control minimum duty
10
12
14
16
2
2
2
4
10
Power monitor
Power offset
Actual power
Actual feedrate
10
Power input offset coe.
10
12
2
2
Assist gas select

Assist gas flow select
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
30
Assist gas flow1
10
12
14
2
2
2
Processing peak power

Processing pulse frequency
Processing pulse duty
0
12
14
16
2
2
2
4
10
Piercing peak power

Piercing pulse frequency
Piercing pulse duty
Piercing time
10
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
22
Feedrate command
Peak power command
Pulse frequency command
Pulse duty command
Assist gas select command
Assist gas pressure
Offset amount
10
10
Ref. displacement command
Assist gas flow2
Assist gas flow3
1458
(Read only)
(Read only)
(Read only)
(Read only)
pretime
prepres
wrkpres
afttime
aftpres
pretime
prepres
wrkpres
afttime
aftpres
pretime
prepres
wrkpres
afttime
aftpres
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
E. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

(FS16W)
WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16W)
1459

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.1
[Description]
READING THE WIRE

DIAMETER OFFSET
The wire diameter offset value recorded in the CNC can be read.
Top address
(Function)
13
+2
(Completion)
+4
+6
+8
(Data length)
Offset
CornerR
Clearance
Condition
(Number)
N
015
16
17
(Attribute)
M
Offset
CornerR
Clearance
Condition
(Data length)
L
(Number)
N
015
16
17
(Attribute)
M
(Data area)
D
Offset value
CornerR value
Clearance value
Actual offset value
+ 10
(Data area)

Top address
(Function)
13
+2
(Completion)
?
+4
+6
+8
+ 10
+ 14
Direction
0, 1, 2
+ 16
Offset mode
0, 1
+ 18
1460
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
[Data number]
015 : Reads the Offset value.
016 : Reads the CornerR value.
017 : Reads the Clearance value.
[Data attribute]
0 : Reads the Offset value, CornerR value or Clearance value.
1 : Reads the condition.
[Contents of data]
a)
Unit of Offset, CornerR, Clearance and actual offset value

Metric system input : 103 [mm]
(In case the incremental system is 1/10,
output data unit is 104 [mm].)
Inch system input :
b)
105 [inch]
Direction in condition data

0 : Cancel offset (G40)
1 : Wire diameter compensation left (G41)
2 : Wire diameter compensation right (G42)
c)
Offset mode in condition data

0 : Offset mode is 0.
[Completion codes]
0 : The data has been read normally.
1461

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.2
[Description]
WRITING THE WIRE

DIAMETER OFFSET
(:LOWSPEED
RESPONSE)
The wire diameter offset value can be written into the CNC.
Top address
(Function)
14
+2
(Completion)
Offset
CornerR
Clearance
Condition
(Data length)
L
(Number)
N
015
16
17
(Attribute)
M
(Data area)
D
Offset value
CornerR value
Clearance value
0, 1
+4
+6
+8
+ 10
+ 12
+ 14

Top address
(Function)
14
+2
(Completion)
?
+4
+6
+8
(Data length)
L
(Number)
N
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Data area)
D
1462
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
[Data number]
015 : Writes the Offset value.
016 : Writes the CornerR value.
017 : Writes the Clearance value.
[Data attribute]
0 : Writes the Offset value, CornerR value or Clearance value.
1 : Writes the condition.
[Contents of data]
a)
Unit of Offset, CornerR, Clearance and actual offset value

Offset, CornerR, Clearance or Actual offset value is signed
binary in 4 bytes. A negative value is represented in 2s
complement.
b)
Offset mode in condition data

[Completion codes]
0 : The data has been written normally.
2 : Invalid data is specified as the data length.
5 : Invalid data is specified as the data value.
1463

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.3
[Description]
READING THE
PARAMETER
(:LOWSPEED
RESPONSE)
Parameter data in the CNC can be read.

4byte data. Therefore, the length of the read data varies according to the
parameter number specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be read in bit units. The eighth bits (one
byte) for a parameter number must be read at a time.
For axis parameters (servo parameters), data for a specific axis can be
read, or data for all axes can be read at a time.

Top address

Top address
(Function)
17
+2
+2
(Completion)
+4
(Function)
17
(Completion)
?
+4
(Data length)
+6
(Data length)
L
+6
(Number)
N
(Number)
N
+8
+8
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Data)
(Data)
[Data length]
L = 1 : Reads bit or byte type parameter or pitch error compensation
value.
2 : Reads word type parameter.
4 : Reads 2 words type parameter.
When the servo parameter all axis is specified
L = 18 : Reads bit or byte type parameter.
[Data number]
When the pitch error compensation value
N = 11000 to 11511 : Pitch error compensation value of the 1st (X) axis
N = 12000 to 12511 : Pitch error compensation value of the 2nd (Y) axis
N = 13000 to 13127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 3rd (U) axis
N = 14000 to 14127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 4th (V) axis
N = 15000 to 15255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 5th (Z) axis
1464
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
N = 16000 to 16255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 6th (W) axis
N = 17000 to 17255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 7th (A) axis
N = 18000 to 18255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 8th (E) axis
[Data attribute]
When the servo parameter
M=
0 : Reads the no axis parameter.

1 to n : Reads the specific axis parameter
1 : Reads the all axes parameter.
(Note: n is the axis number.)
If a parameter other than the servo parameters is read, M is set to 0.

[Completion code]
6 : When the data with the parameter number specified for reading
cannot be used if options such as pitch error compensation are not
available, those options are not provided.
1465

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.4
[Description]
WRITING THE
PARAMETER
(:LOWSPEED
RESPONSE)
Parameter data in the CNC can be written.

There are four types of parameters in the CNC: Bit parameters having
a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters holding 1byte data, word
4byte data. Therefore, the length of the written data varies according to
the parameter specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be written in bit unit. The eighth bits (one
byte) for the parameter number must be written at a time. This means that
when a bit needs to be written, the whole data for the corresponding
parameter number shall be read first, then the target bit in the read data
shall be written.
For axis parameters (servo parameters), data for a specific axis can be
written, or data for all axes can be written at a time.
Some parameters cause a P/S alarm 000 when data is written. (The power
must be turned off before continuing operation.)

Top address

Top address
(Function)
18
+2
+2
(Completion)
?
(Completion)
+4
(Function)
18
+4
(Data length)
L
+6
(Data length)
L
+6
(Number)
N
(Number)
N
+8
+8
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Data)
Parameter data
(Data)
D
[Data length]
L = 1 : Reads bit or byte type parameter or pitch error compensation
value.
When the servo parameter all axis is specified
L = 18 : Writes bit or byte type parameter.
28 : Writes word type parameter.
48 : Writes 2 words type parameter.
[Data number]
When the pitch error compensation value
N = 11000 to 11511 : Pitch error compensation value of the 1st (X) axis
1466
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
N = 12000 to 12511 : Pitch error compensation value of the 2nd (Y) axis
N = 13000 to 13127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 3rd (U) axis
N = 14000 to 14127 : Pitch error compensation value of the 4th (V) axis
N = 15000 to 15255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 5th (Z) axis
N = 16000 to 16255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 6th (W) axis
N = 17000 to 17255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 7th (A) axis
N = 18000 to 18255 : Pitch error compensation value of the 8th (E) axis
[Data attribute]
M=
0 : Writes the no axis parameter.

1 to n : Writes the specific axis parameter
1 : Writes the all axes parameter.
(Note: n is the axis number.)
If a parameter other than the servo parameters is written, M is set to 0.

[Completion code]
0 : Parameter data has been written normally.
2 : Invalid data is specified as the data length.
6 : When the data with the parameter number specified for writing
cannot be used if options such as pitch error compensation are not
available, those options are not provided; or, the system is not in
the parameter writing state.
1467

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Types of parameters]
In the B908 system, data type of ( ) are used.
No.
Length
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte()
Byte()
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
2words
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
0080
0081
0082
0083
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
0099
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0128
0129
0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0135
0136
0137
0138
0139
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0140
0141
0142
0143
0144
0145
0146
0147
0148
0149
0150
0151
0152
0153
0154
0155
0156
0157
0158
0159
0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167
0168
0169
0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
0180
0181
0182
0183
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
0198
0199
0200
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
Word
2words
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte
2W(Byte)
2words
Byte(2W)
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Byte
Byte
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Word
2words
Byte
2words
Byte
word
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
0230
0231
0232
0233
0234
0235
0236
0237
0238
0239
0240
0241
0242
0243
0244
0245
0246
0247
0248
0249
0250
0251
0252
0253
0254
0255
0256
0257
0258
0259
0260
0261
0262
0263
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
0270
0271
0272
0273
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
2W()
1468

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
No.
Length
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
0280
0281
0282
0283
0284
0285
0286
0287
0288
0289
0290
0291
0292
0293
0294
0295
0296
0297
0298
0299
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
0313
0314
0315
0316
0317
0318
0319
0320
0321
0322
0323
0324
0325
0326
0327
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0338
0339
0340
0341
0342
0343
0344
0345
0346
0347
0348
0349
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Word
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
2words
2words
Word
Word
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Byte
Word
Byte
Word
Byte
2words
2words
0350
0351
0352
0353
0354
0355
0356
0357
0358
0359
0360
0361
0362
0363
0364
0365
0366
0367
0368
0369
0370
0371
0372
0373
0374
0375
0376
0377
0378
0379
0380
0381
0382
0383
0384
0385
0386
0387
0388
0389
0390
0391
0392
0393
0394
0395
0396
0397
0398
0399
0600
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607
0608
0609
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
2words
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0625
0626
0627
0628
0629
0630
0631
0632
0633
0634
0635
0636
0637
0638
0639
0640
0641
0642
0643
0644
0645
0646
0647
0648
0649
0650
0651
0652
0653
0654
0655
0656
0657
0658
0659
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0666
0667
0668
0669
0670
0671
0672
0673
0674
0675
0676
0677
0678
0679
0680
0681
0682
0683
0684
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
0690
0691
0692
0693
0694
0695
0696
0697
0698
0699
0700
0701
0702
0703
0704
0705
0706
0707
0708
0709
0710
0711
0712
0713
0714
0715
0716
0717
0718
0719
0720
0721
0722
0723
0724
0725
0726
0727
0728
0729
0730
0731
0732
0733
0734
0735
0736
0737
0738
0739
0740
0741
0742
0743
0744
0745
0746
0747
0748
0749
0750
0751
0752
0753
0754
0755
0756
0757
0758
0759
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
Word
Word
Word
2words
2words
1469

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
No.
Length
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
No.
Data type
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
0776
0777
0778
0779
0780
0781
0782
0783
0784
0785
0786
0787
0788
0789
0790
0791
0792
0793
0794
0795
0796
0797
0798
0799
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
0806
0807
0808
0809
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
2words
0810
0811
0812
0813
0814
0815
0816
0817
0818
0819
0820
0821
0822
0823
0824
0825
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0835
0836
0837
0838
0839
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0848
0849
0850
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
0856
0857
0858
0859
2words
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
Word(2W)
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
0865
0866
0867
0868
0869
0870
0871
0872
0873
0874
0875
0876
0877
0878
0879
0880
0881
0882
0883
0884
0885
0886
0887
0888
0889
0890
0891
0892
0893
0894
0895
0896
0897
0898
0899
0900
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0907
0908
0909
Word
Bit
Bit
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
(Word)
(Bit)
(Bit)
(Bit)
(Byte)
(Byte)
0910
0911
0912
0913
0914
0915
0916
0917
0918
0919
0920
0921
0922
0923
0924
0925
0926
0927
0928
0929
0930
0931
0932
0933
0934
0935
0936
0937
0938
0939
0940
0941
0942
0943
0944
0945
0946
0947
0948
0949
1470
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
E.5
READING SETTING
DATA
[Data contents]
Setting data on the CNC can be read.

Top address

Top address
(Function code)
19
+2
+2
(Completion code)
?
(Completion code)
+4
(Function code)
19
+4
(Data length)
+6
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
+8
(Data attribute)
+ 10
+ 10
(Data area)
(Data length)
L
(Data number)
Input data
(Data attribute)
(Data area)
Setting data
[Data number]
See the setting data list.
[Completion code]
0 : Read operation was terminated normally.
3 : An incorrect data number was specified.
1471

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.6
WRITING SETTING
DATA
(LOWSPEED TYPE)
[Data contents]
Setting data on the CNC can be written.

Top address

Top address
(Function code)
20
+2
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
L
+6
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
(Data length)
Input data
(Data number)
Input data
+8
(Data attribute)
+ 10
(Function code)
20
(Data attribute)
+ 10
(Data area)
Setting data
(Data area)
Input data
[Data length]
[Data number]
[Completion code]
0 : Read operation was terminated normally.
2 : An incorrect data length was specified.
1472

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Setting Data List

Setting data
Screen
Data number
Data length
Bit name
X mirror image
Y mirror image
Axis switching
TV check
Output code
Input unit
Parameter writable
Input unit multiplication by 10 times
Automatic recovery from power failure
Automatic poweroff M20/M30
Automatic poweroff M00/M10
Automatic power backward movement
alarm
Automatic power disconnection
Input/output device
Figure magnification ratio
Figure rotation angle
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Handy
Handy
Handy
Handy
3
4
5
6
1
1
4
4
Bit 3
Taper machining mode

Guide type
Program surface position
Workpiece thickness
Drawing surface position
Upper guide position
(Lower guide position)
(Vertical position U)
(Vertical position V)
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
Taper
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Bit 0
Enable/disable
Wire diameter
Machining groove width
Workpiece thickness
Wire deflection
Effectiveness of concave
Effectiveness of convex
Automatic override
Enable/disable
Differential voltage
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
2
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
PWB
PWB
2
13
1
2
Bit 5
Enable/disable
Disconnection repair
Prepared hole of 0.5
Sump machining
Portion to be left uncut
Power reduction ratio (setting)
Connection position U1
Connection position V1
Connection position Z1
Number of retries (setting)
Number of allowable disconnections
(setting)
Number of retries (current)
Number of allowable disconnections
(current)
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
2
2
2
2
14
24
26
27
28
40
41
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
AWF
AWF
42
43
1
1
WIRE
WIRE CUTTER
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
LIFE
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
REST
REST
REST
REST
REST
REST
REST
REST
1473

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Setting Data List

Setting data
OP. BLOCK SKIP /0
OP. BLOCK SKIP /1
OP. BLOCK SKIP /2
OP. BLOCK SKIP /3
OP. BLOCK SKIP /4
OP. BLOCK SKIP /5
OP. BLOCK SKIP /6
OP. BLOCK SKIP /7
OP. BLOCK SKIP /8
OP. BLOCK SKIP /9
Number or tries
Number of retries
Number or tries
Number of retries
Program number
(for machining distance calculation)
Screen
Data number
Data length
Bit name
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
Others
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
AWF
AWF
AWF
AWF
40
41
42
43
1
1
1
1
Graphic
44
1474

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.7
[Description]
READING THE CNC

ALARM STATUS
When the CNC is placed in the alarm status, the alarm status data can be
read.

Top address

Top address
(Function)
23
+2
(Function)
23
+2
(Completion)
0
(Completion)
+4
+4
(Data length)
+6
(Data length)
2
+6
(Number)
(Number)
+8
+8
(Attribute)
(Attribute)
+ 10
+ 10
+ 11
+ 12
(Data area)
First byte
(Data area)
Alarm status
Second byte
[Contents of data]
(1) Alarm status data in first byte.
#7
#6
#5
#4
EOR
OTM
OTS
OH
PS
#3
#2
#1
#0
SV
OTH
PS
#2
#1
: P/S alarm
OTH : Over travel alarm

SV
: Servo alarm
OH
: Overheat alarm
OTS
: First stroke limit alarm
OTM : Second stroke limit alarm

EOR : Edit alarm
(2) Alarm status data in second byte.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#0
APCER
APCER : Absolute pulco alarm

[Completion codes]
0 : This alarm status in the CNC has been read normally.
1475

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.8
[Description]
READING MODEL
DATA
Modal information in the CNC can be read.
(1) Format and types of modal data for the G function

Data with a specified identification code is read and stored in the data
area. Whether the data is located in the block specified with the data
attribute can be determined with the most significant bit.
3
Code in a group
: 1 byte
0 : Not specified in the current block

1 : Specified in the current block
Identification code
Data type
Data
Identification code
Data type
Data
G04
G19
G28
G30
G92
G31
G70
G71
G72
G73
G74
G75
G76
G77
G78
G79
0
1
5
7
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
G00
G01
G02
G03
G17
G90
G91
G22
G23
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
1
0
G94
G95
G20
G21
G40
G41
G42
G50
G51
G52
G60
G61
G62
G63
G48
G49
G65
G66
G67
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
1
0
26
0
1
2
3
4
6
7
10
11
1476
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
(2) Format and types of modal data for other than the G function
: 4 bytes
Data
Flag
: 1 byte
1 byte
Number of input digits
0 : Positive
1 : Negative
0 : Not specified in the current block
1 : Specified in the current block
Identification code
Specified address
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
B
D
E
F
H
L
M
S
T
R
P
Q

Top address
(Function)
32
+2
(Completion)
+4
(Data length)
+6
(Number)
N
+8
(Attribute)
M
+ 10
(Data area)
1477
Meaning of value
Offset number
Feedrate
Tapper data

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address
(Function code)
32
+2
(Completion code)
?
+4
+6
+8
(Data length)
L
(Data number)
Input data
(Data attribute)
Input data
+ 10
(Data area)
Modal data of
G functions
Modal data of other than

G functions
Modal data of
ID code 0
Modal data of
ID code 100
+ 12
Modal data of
ID code 1
+ 14
Flag part of
modal data
Modal data of
ID code 2
Flag part of data

of ID code 100
+ 16
X
Modal data of
ID code 16
X
Modal data of
ID code 111
+ 44
Flag part of data

of ID code 111
+ 78
[Data length]
L= 2
: G function
2*16 : All data of G functions
6
: Other than G functions
6*12 : All data of other than G functions
[Data number]
N = 0 and up: See each data list.
1 : All data of G functions
2 : All data of other than G functions
[Data attribute]
M = 0 : Current block
1 : Next block
2
: Block after the next block

1478
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
[Completion code]
1 : The modal data read command could not be executed. This
means that, because the modal data was being updated on
the CNC, the command could not be executed.
0
: Modal data read operation terminated normally.
: An incorrect data number was specified.
: An incorrect data attribute was specified.
1479

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.9
READING
MACHINING
DISTANCES
[Data contents]
The distance (machining distance) from the machining start point to the
current point, and the distance (whole distance) from the machining start
point to the point where M02 or M30 is specified can be read.

Top address

Top address
(Function code)
182
+2
+2
(Completion code)
+4
(Function code)
182
(Completion code)
?
+4
(Data length)
+6
+6
(Data number)
N
+8
+8
(Data attribute)
+ 10
(Data length)
4
(Data number)
Input data
(Data attribute)
+ 10
(Data area)
(Data area)
Machining distance
+ 14
[Data number]
N= 0
: Machining distance
N= 1
: Whole length obtained with the dry run function
N= 2
: Whole length obtained by drawing
N= 3
: Whole length obtained with the machining distance

calculation function
[Data unit]
Metric input : 103 [mm]
(When the increment system is 1/10: 104 [mm])
Inch input : 105 [inch]
[Completion code]
1 : Data could not be read. This means that, because the data was
being updated on the CNC, the command could not be executed.
0 : Data read operation terminated normally.
1480

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
E.10
[Description]
READING THE
MEASURED POINT
The measured point that are get by positioning can be read. Also, the slit
width by slitting and the hole diameter by centering can be read.
Top address
(Function)
185
+2
(Completion)
+4
+6
+8
(Length)
Reads
measured point
Reads slit width

of hole diameter
(Number)
N
Point number
(Attribute)
M
(Completion)
?
Reads
measured point
Reads slit width

of hole diameter
(Length)
L
10
(Number)
N
Point number
(Attribute)
M
(Data area)
Type
Slit width of hole

diameter
+ 10
(Data area)

Top address
(Function)
185
+2
+4
+6
+8
+ 10
+ 12
Machine
coordinate of
X axis
+ 14
+ 16
Machine
coordinate of
Y axis
+ 18
+ 20
1481

(FS16W)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Data unit]
(In case the incremental system is 1/10, output
data unit is 104 [mm].)
Inch system input :
105 [inch]
[Completion codes]
0 : The measured point has been read normally.
3 : Invalid data is specified as data number.
4 : Invalid data is specified as data attribute.
1482
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16W)
E.11
WRITING THE
MEASURED POINT
(:LOWSPEED
RESPONSE)
[Description]
The measured point that are get by positioning can be written. Also, the
slit width by slitting and the hole diameter by centering can be written.

Top address
+2
+4
+6
+8
+ 10

Top address
(Function)
186
+2
(Completion)
+4
(Length)
10
+6
(Number)
Point number
+8
(Attribute)
0
(Function)
186
(Completion)
?
(Length)
10
(Number)
N
(Attribute)
0
+ 10
(Data area)
Type
(Data area)
+ 12
+ 12
Machine
coordinate of X axis
+ 14
+ 14
+ 16
+ 16
Machine
coordinate of Y axis
+ 18
+ 18
+ 20
+ 20
[Data unit]
(In case the incremental system is 1/10, output
data unit is 104 [mm].)
Inch system input :
105 [inch]
[Completion codes]
0 : The measured point has been written normally.
3 : Invalid data is specified as data number.
4 : Invalid data is specified as data attribute.
1483
F. WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

(FS16/16i/0iP)
APPENDIX
WINDOW FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (FS16/16i/0iP)
1484
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16/16i/0iP)
F.1
[Description]
READING OF TOOL
SETTING DATA
Various Tool setting data recorded in the CNC can be read.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
188
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data Number)
N
(See F.1.1)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(See F.1.1)
10
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
[Completion codes]
0:
The tool setting data has been read normally.
3 : The data number specified for reading is invalid.

the tool setting data to be read.
6 : For the tool setting data specified for reading, an additional option
(graphic or multitool control) is required, but it is missing.
1485

(FS16/16i/0iP)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
188
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of codes)
4
(Data length)
?
(See F.1.1)
6
(Data Number)
N
(N : Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Input data)
10
(Data area)
?
(See F.1.1)
48
1486
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
F.1.1
Data Number,
Data Attribute,
Data Length, Data Area
Various tool setting data

(FS16/16i/0iP)
Data number, data attribute, data length and data area of various tool
setting data are as follows.
Data attribute (M)
Data length
Data area
Used tool number
2 bytes
Binary
1 to 136
Number of turret indexing
2 bytes
Binary
1 to 136
2 bytes
Binary
1 to 136
Feed amount per revolution of

turret
4 bytes
Binary
1 to 99999999
Total punch count
8 bytes
Binary
1 to 99999999
Tool number
2 bytes
Binary
1 to 9999
Punch count
4 bytes
Binary
1 to 99999999
Tool position compensation of X
4 bytes
Binary
99999999
Tool position compensation of Y
4 bytes
Binary
99999999
4 bytes
Binary
99999999
2 bytes
Binary
1 to 136
Tool life
4 bytes
Binary
Tool shape (C) for graphic
2 bytes
High byte=0
Binary
0 to 4
Tool shape (I) for graphic
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 999999
Tool shape (J) for graphic
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 999999
Tool shape (K) for graphic
10
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 360000
Tool number for multitool
2 bytes
High byte=0
Binary
0 to 99
Tool angle for multitool
4 bytes
Binary
360000
4 bytes
Binary
99999999
2 bytes
High byte=0
Binary
0 to 4
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 999999
Tool shape (J) for multitool
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 999999
Tool shape (K) for multitool
4 bytes
Binary
0 to 360000
Tool number of reference point
Data number (N)
Machine position of tool

Tool number for tool change
Number of tool
setting data
1 to 136
Tool position compensation of Y

Tool shape (C) for multitool
Tool shape (I) for multitool
Number of
Multitool setting
data +200
201 to 264
1487

(FS16/16i/0iP)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
data unit
Tool position
compensation
Tool shape and

angle for graphic
Tool angle for
multitool
1488
Machine
Input of ISA
Input of ISB
mm
0. 01
0. 001
inch
0. 001
0. 0001
Input unit
Input of ISA
Input of ISB
mm
0. 01
0. 001
inch
0. 001
0. 0001
deg
0. 01
0. 001
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16/16i/0iP)
F.2
[Description]
WRITING OF TOOL
SETTING DATA
(:LOWSPEED
RESPONSE)
The various tool setting data can be directly written into the CNC.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
189
2
(Completion code)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
?
(See F.1.1)
6
(Data Number)
N
(See F.1.1)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(See F.1.1)
10
(Data)
?
(See F.1.1)
[Completion code]
0 : The tool setting data has been written normally.
2 : The data length specified for writing is invalid.
3 : The data number specified for writing is invalid.
4 : The data attribute specified for writing is invalid.
5 : The data specified for writing is invalid.
6 : The additional option (multitool control or graphic) is required
but it is missing.
1489

(FS16/16i/0iP)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Top address + 0
(Function code)
189
2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of codes)
4
(Data length)
?
(See F.1.1)
6
(Data Number)
N
(N : Input data)
8
(Data attribute)
M
(M : Input data)
10
(Data area)
?
(See F.1.1)
48
NOTE
See Sec. F.1.1 for data unit.
1490
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(FS16/16i/0iP)
F.3
READING TOOL
SETTING DATA BY
SPECIFYING TOOL
NUMBER
[Description]
Setting data for a tool (such as registration order, tool punch count, and
tool shape) can be read by specifying the tool number.
Top address + 0
(Function code)
141
2
(Completion)
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N=Tool number)
10
(Data attribute)
M
(See F.1.1)
12
(Data area)
(Need not be set)
NOTE
1 The area for specifying the data number consists of four
bytes.
2 As the data attribute, specify the type of the tool setting data
to be read, in the same way as for function code 188. If 0
is specified as the data attribute, the registration order of the
tool is read.
1491

(FS16/16i/0iP)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
[Completion code]
0:
The tool setting data has been read normally.
3:
The specified data number is invalid.
4:
The specified data attribute is invalid.
6:
For the tool setting data specified for reading, an additional option
(graphic or multitool control) is required, but it is missing.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
141
2
(Completion code)
?
4
(Data length)
?
(See F.1.1)
6
(Data number)
N
(N: Input data)
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
12
(Data area)
?
(See F.1.1)
A
X
A
X
48
1492
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
F.4
OTHER WINDOW
FUNCTIONS

(FS16/16i/0iP)
The FS16PA supports the following window functions, described in

Appendix B of this manual.
Function
code
Number
1
Reading CNC system information
Reading a tool offset
13
Writing a tool offset
Reading a workpiece origin offset
Writing a workpiece origin offset
:lowspeed response
16
Reading a parameter
:lowspeed response
17
Writing a parameter
:lowspeed response
18
:lowspeed response
19
Writing setting data
:lowspeed response
20
10
Reading a custom macro variable
:lowspeed response
21
11
Writing a custom macro variable
:lowspeed response
22
12
Reading the CNC alarm state
23
13
Reading the current program number
24
14
Reading the current sequence number
25
15
Reading an actual velocity for a controlled axis
26
16
Reading an absolute position on a controlled axis
27
17
Reading a machine position on a controlled axis
28
18
Reading a skip position on a controlled axis
29
19
Reading a servo delay amount on a controlled axis
30
20
Reading an acceleration/deceleration delay amount on a controlled axis
31
21
Reading modal data
32
22
Reading diagnostic data
38
Reading clock data (date and time)
151
41
Reading a parameter
154
42
155
43
Reading diagnostic data
156
44
Reading a character string of the CNC program being executed in the buffer
45
Reading the relative position on a controlled axis
74
46
Reading the remaining travel on a controlled axis
75
47
Reading CNC status information
76
48
Reading an operator message
83
:lowspeed response
14
15
:lowspeed response
*1 Functions marked with *SB567N are not provided for the PMCSB5/SB6/SB7.
1493
*SB567
33
157

(FROM THE PMCMODEL L/M TO
THE PMCMODEL SB/SC)
APPENDIX
SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERSION (FROM THE

PMCMODEL L/M TO THE PMCMODEL SB/SC)
1494
B61863E/15
B61863E/15
G.1
GENERAL
G.2
FUNCTION
APPENDIX

THE PMCMODEL SB/SC)
DI/DO signals used in the PMCMODEL L/M can be converted to

signals for the PMCMODEL SB/SC using the FANUC LADDER
program for the PMCMODEL SB/SC.
The DI/DO signals used between the NC unit and the PMC correspond
to word addresses consisting of addresses and values. Word addresses of
bit type are converted. The program is not logically converted.
The conversion is performed under the following conditions.
(1) A word address of bit type used in a basic instruction is to be
converted.
(2) A word address of byte type used in a functional instruction is not
converted.
(3) Word addresses used in the standard FANUC Series 0T/M are
converted to those used in the standard FANUC Series 16T/M. If
a value in a word address is 1000.0 or more, the address is not
converted.
(4) When the same signal name is used in the FANUC Series 0 and 16,
and the addresses corresponding to the signal in the Series 0 and 16
have onetoone relationship, the word address is converted. For
details, see the signal conversion table.
G.3
(1) Load the FANUC LADDER program for the PMCSB/SC.
CONVERSION
(2) Press the R0 key to display the programmer menu screen.

(3) Press the F2 key. Enter 2 and press the <NL> key. then the following
message appears on the screen. Insert a data floppy for the
PMCSB/SC. Select the name of the file corresponding to the
conversion from Table G.3 and enter it.
SET FD & KEYIN OK, KILL OR NO
FD0 = OK<DRIVE> <@NAME OR :NUMBER>
FD0 =
Table G.3 File Name in the Data Floppy for the PMCSB/SC
File name
FS0T FS16T
COMV.FS0T
FS0M FS16M
COMV.FS0M
(4) Read a source ladder program created with FANUC LADDER for
the PMCL/M from the floppy in the same way as in Item 3.
If an address not listed in the signal conversion table is used in the
ladder program file, an error occurs. In this case, enter E, then press
the <NL> key to return to the programmer menu screen.
PART= E <NL>
(5) Entering 9 and pressing the <NL> key on the programmer menu
screen changes the screen. The following message appears at the
lower left corner of the screen. Enter 2, then press the <NL> key to
delete the symbol data.
KEYIN 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 OR 6 OR NO
CLEAR/KEEP=
1495

THE PMCMODEL SB/SC)
G.4
MODIFYING THE
CONVERTED
SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
G.4.1
Modification Procedure
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The above operation terminates the conversion. Check the converted

program. If an error occurs in the conversion, modify the program.
Enter 1 on the programmer menu to change the screen to the screen for
editing a sequence program. Editing operation is the same as usual.
NOTE
Some addresses not converted have no error indication.
After modifying the program, check that all addresses are
correct according to the signal conversion table and the
connecting manual.
(1) When the Series 0 and 16 differ in the number of parameters used in
a functional instruction
Because the Series 0 and 16 differ in the numbers of parameters used
for TMR (timer), TMRB (timer), and CTR (counter), errors are
indicated at the parameters. Check the program, then delete the
parameter. Set the timer and counter again.
(2) When an address not used in functional instructions is specified
When an address used in the ladder program for the Series 0 is not
defined in the Series 16, the messages (NO PARAMETER) and
#PARAM.ERROR# appear as follows. Set the parameter again and
delete the latter message.
Example
00001 RD XXX.X
00002 SUB 8
00003 XXXX
00004 XXXX
00005 XXXX
00006 (NO PARAMETER) . . Set the parameter again.
00007 #PARAM.ERR# . . . . . Delete the message. This
message may not appear.
(XXX.X and XXXX are addresses and values.)
(3) Deleting SUB48 (END3) (In the PMCSB)
If SUB48 (END3) is specified in the PMCSB, an error occurs
because the PMCSB is not provided with SUB48 (END3). When
this error occurs, delete thirdlevel programs, or change the
thirdlevel programs to secondlevel programs and delete SUB48.
(4) Address conversion for signals not listed on the signal conversion
table Modify the address for a signal by referring to the connection
manual.
1496
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
H. CONNECTING THE OPERATORS

PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH FS16,
FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate
CONNECTING THE OPERATORS PANEL FOR FS 0 WITH

FS16, FS18, FS21, OR Power Mate
1497

H.1
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The Series 0 operators panel consists of key switches, LEDs, a rotary

switch, and so on. Because the states of key switches and lamps are coded,
the number of the signal lines required for connecting the operators panel
with the CNC may not be the same as the number of actual switches. PMC
management software automatically codes the states of the key switches
and lamps and transmits data.
GENERAL
Therefore, simple bit images of switches and LEDs must only be

manipulated with the PMC ladder program.
I/O unit
I/O card
CNC (Series 16 or 18)
Bit image
Rk and on
Input
Xn and on
Coding
Output
Ym and on
Coding
Input
X* and on
Contact
Keyboard
PMC
management
software
Bit image
Rl and on
LED
Protect key
Emergency stop
button
Override rotary
switch
etc.
Series 0 operators manual
Input
X* and on
G* and
after (X)
PMC ladder
program
(of the user)
CNC
software
F* and on
Interface with
other machines
Output
Y* and
after
Fig. H.1 (a) Connection between the CNC and the operators panel
1498
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

The operators panel is made up of the following keys, LEDs, etc.

D Key switch (Seat key)
D 42 keys (0TC)
D 46 keys (0MC)
D LEDs (red) .......................Prepared for all key switches
D Override rotary switch ..... 4 bits
D Emergency stop button .... 1 bit
D Program protect key ........ 1 bit
(Coordinate)
Fig. H.1 (b) Front view of operators panel for 0TC
(Coordinate)
Fig. H.1 (c) Front view of operators panel for 0MC
1499

APPENDIX
(Coordinate)
Fig. H.1 (d) External view of operators panel for 9 CRT/MDI with fullkeyboard (0TC)
(Coordinate)
Fig. H.1 (e) External view of operators panel for 9 CRT/MDI with fullkeyboard (0MC)
1500
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

H.2
CONNECTION
H.2.1
Connecting the I/O Unit
MAIN CPU
I/O unit
Series 0 operators panel
I/O Link
JD1A
(I/O Link)
JD1B
DI
module
M1A
DO
module
M2A
CP32
PSU
CP6
JD1A
24 VDC
Another I/O unit

DI module
: +24 V common, 20 ms
Example) AID32A1
DO module : 0 V common
Example) AOD32A1
H.2.2
Connecting the I/O
Card

To another I/O unit
MAIN CPU
JD1A
(I/O Link)
Interface with other machines
Series 0 operators panel

I/O card
DI
connector
M1A
DO
connector
M2A
1501

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
H.3
SIGNALS FOR
CONNECTING THE
OPERATORS PANEL
H.3.1
This signal is used for the fixed address directly monitored by the CNC.
Emergency Stop Signal

(*ESP)
For connecting the signal, refer to the description of the interface between
the CNC and the PMC in the Series 16 or 18 Connection Manual.
H.3.2
Their key switch contact signals are directly input to the PMC. Handle
them with the PMC ladder program.
Override Signals (*OV1

to *OV8) and Program
Protect Key Signal
(KEY)
H.3.3
Key Switch Signals
(Xn, Xn+2)
For connecting these signals, refer to the description of the interface

between the CNC and the PMC in the Series 16 or 18 Connection
Manual.
The key switch signals are coded by the PMC management software, and
input to the area indicated by address R in the form of to the bit image.
Whether necessary keys are already pressed can be checked by the bit
image of the key switches using the user PMC ladder program. (See
Tables H.3.4 (a), H.3.4 (b), and H.3.4 (c))
While a key is pressed, the bit corresponding to the key is 1.
Two keys can be pressed at the same time. Create a user PMC program
so that it does not require pressing more than two keys at a time. If more
than two keys are pressed simultaneously, the relevant data is not entered
correctly.
A maximum of 60 ms is required before the corresponding bit is set to 1
or 0 after a key is pressed (released).
Key switch signal addresses (Xn to Xn+2: Table H.3.4 (a)) and their bit
image addresses (Rk to Rk+7: Tables H.3.4 (b) and H.3.4 (c)) can be
defined using fixed addresses or unused addresses as desired. (In Series
0, the key switch signal addresses are fixed to X20 and after. The bit
image addresses are fixed to F292 and after.)
1502
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
H.3.4
LED Signals (Ym)

Specify the LED signals at PMC address R using the user PMC ladder
program in the form of a bit image. PMC management software changes
the bit image LED signals to the coded output signals. (See Tables H.3.4
(a), H.3.4 (b), and H.3.4 (c))
While 1 is written in a LED bit image, the relevant LED automatically
goes on. When 0 is written in the LED bit image, the relevant LED goes
off. All LEDs are off before the power is turned on.
A maximum of 200 ms is required before the LED goes on or off after 1
or 0 is written in a bit image in the PMC.
LED signal address (Ym: Table H.3.4 (a)) and the bit image addresses (Rl
to Rl+7: Tables H.3.4 (b), and H.3.4 (c)) can be defined using fixed
addresses or unused addresses as desired. (In Series 0, the LED signal
address is fixed to Y51. The bit image addresses are fixed to G242 and
after.)
Table H.3.4 (a) Key switch and LED signal addresses
Xn
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
KD7
KD6
KD5
KD4
KD3
KD2
KD1
KD0
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA0
LD3
LD2
LD1
LD0
Xn+1
Xn+2
KST
Ym
LD7
LD6
LD5
LD4
Table H.3.4 (b) Bit Image addresses of key switch and LED signals
(for the small operators panel)
#7
#6
#5
KEY/LED
F3
F2
F1
Rk/Rl
F4
Rk+1/Rl+1
D4
Rk+2/Rl+2
Rk+3/Rl+3
F8
Rk+4/Rl+4
D8
D3
C4
F6
F5
#4
C3
#3
#2
#1
#0
D1
C1
B1
A1
D2
C2
B2
A2
B4
B3
A4
A3
D5
C5
B5
A5
D6
C6
B6
A6
A8
A7
C8
B8
Rk+5/Rl+5
F9
D9
C9
B9
A9
Rk+6/Rl+6
F10
D10
C10
B10
A10
1503

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Table H.3.4 (c) Bit image addresses of key switch and LED signals
(for the operators panel with the full keyboard)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
KEY/LED
E1
C1
A1
E6
D6
C6
B6
A6
Rk/Rl
E2
C2
A2
E7
D7
C7
B7
A7
Rk+1/Rl+1
E3
C3
A3
E8
D8
C8
B8
A8
Rk+2/Rl+2
E5
C4
A4
E9
D9
C9
B9
A9
Rk+3/Rl+3
D2
C5
A5
E10
D10
C10
B10
A10
Rk+4/Rl+4
D4
D5
B2
E11
D11
C11
B11
A11
Rk+5/Rl+5
D1
B1
B4
E12
D12
C12
B12
A12
Rk+6/Rl+6
D3
B3
B5
E13
D13
C13
B13
A13
1504
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
H.4
SPECIFYING
ADDRESSES

The following section describes how to specify key switch and LED
signal addresses and the bit image addresses.
H.4.1
Parameter Menu
(PMCSB7)
KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT TO SET PARA.S
NO. ITEMS
CURRENT PARAMETERS
01
(UNUSED)
02
COUNTER DATA TYPE
; BINARY
03
OPERATOR PANEL
KEY/LED ADDRESS
; YES
; X0000/Y0000
KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADRS. ; R0900/R0910

04
PMC TYPE
; PMCRB
05
(UNUSED)
06
(UNUSED)
07
(UNUSED)
08
(UNUSED)
09
IGNORE DIVIDED CODE
; NO
10
(UNUSED)
00
NOTHING TO SET
;
; ROM WRITER = FA WRITER
NO. =
H.4.2
1)
Procedure
Select 3 from the parameter menu. Then, the following message is

displayed:
EXAMPLE 0:NO, 1:YES
OP.PANEL=_
2)
Select 1(:YES). Then, the following message is displayed:

SET KEY/LED ADDRESS(KEY ADRS., LED ADRS.)
ADDR=_
3)
Specify a key or LED address (X or Y). For example, to specify a

key switch address as X0 and LED address as Y0, enter X0,Y0 and
press the [NL] key ([NL]: New line key). The following message is
then displayed:
SET KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS(KEY ADRS., LED ADRS.)
ADDR=_
1505

APPENDIX
4)
B61863E/15
Specify bit image addresses. For example, to specify R900 and

R910, enter R900,R910 and press the [NL] key.
Then, the current display returns to the original parameter menu, and
the following message appears:
:
03
:
:
OPERATOR PANEL
KEY/LED ADDRESS
; YES
; X0000/Y0000
KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADRS. ; R0900/R0910

:
:
CAUTION
1 After the above procedure, the addresses in Tables 3.1,
3.2A, and 3.2B are defined as the following PMC
addresses:
Xn
X0000
Rk
/ Rl
R0900/R0910
Xn+1 X0001
Rk+1 / Rl+1R0901/R0911
Xn+2 X0002
Rk+2 / Rl+2R0902/R0912
Rk+3 / Rl+3R0903/R0913
Ym
Y0000
Rk+4 / Rl+4R0904/R0914
Rk+5 / Rl+5R0905/R0915
Rk+6 / Rl+6R0906/R0916
Rk+7 / Rl+7R0907/R0917
2 Since the PMC addresses for the I/O card are already fixed,
specify the signals to be used at the fixed addresses.
Examples
To use X1000, X1001, X1002, and Y1000 for key switches and LEDs,
enter the following:
SET KEY/LED ADDRESS(KEY ADRS., LED ADRS.)
ADDR= X1000,Y1000 [NL]
1506
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
I. EDITING FOR Power MateMODEL D

(PMCPA1/PA3)
EDITING FOR Power MateMODEL D (PMCPA1/PA3)
1507

(PMCPA1/PA3)
I.1
OUTLINE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Ladder diagram editing function for FANUC PMCMODEL PA1/PA3

has high compatibility in a basic specification between ladder diagram
editing function for FANUC PMCMODEL SA1/SA2.
Following abbreviations are used in this chapter.
CNC Model
Product/Card Name
FANUC Power MateMODEL D
FANUC PMCMODEL PA1
PMCPA1
FANUC PMCMODEL PA3
PMCPA3
Ladder diagram editing

memory card
Editing card
FANUC PMCMODEL SA1
PMCSA1
FANUC PMCMODEL SA2
PMCSA2
FANUC Series 18
I.2
COMPATIBILITY
WITH CNC BASIC
SOFTWARE
Abbr.
Editing card described herein apply to the following software or later.

CNC
Version 08(H) or later of Power MateMODEL D basic software
8830 Series.
PMC
Version 04(D) or later of PMCPA1/PA3 control software 4075
Series.
1508
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
I.3
PMC PROGRAMMER
(CRT/MDI OR
PDP/MDI) [LADDER
EDITING FUNCTION]
I.3.1
Component Units and
Connections

(PMCPA1/PA3)
This function is used to set PMC system parameters and also generate and
execute sequence programs by using soft keys a on the CRT/MDI unit or
PDP/MDI unit. You can not use following function because FANUC
Power MateMODEL D does not use ROM for sequence program.
Sequence Program Copy Function
Writing, Reading, and Verification of the Sequence Program and

PMC Parameter Data to/from/with ROM.
The units required for generating a sequence program and connection

methods are described below.
1509

(PMCPA1/PA3)
I.3.1.1
Component units
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(1) Editing card

This is used for editing sequence program.
If this card is inserted in CNC at the time of its poweron, PMC
displays the programmer menu.
When you want to put on and take off, you must turn off the CNC
power.
CAUTION
Please do not release the write protect switch of editing card
for preventing a mistake deleting.
WRITE PROTECT
Editing Card
(A02B0166K701#4076)
Fig. I.3.1.1
(2) CRT/MDI unit, PDP/MDI unit

CRT/MDI unit or PDP/MDI unit are necessary when you generate
or edit sequence program using editing card.
CRT/MDI unit (A02B0166C001)
PDP/MDI unit (A02B0166C010, A02B0166C011)
1510
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(PMCPA1/PA3)
I.3.1.2
Feed the editing card into connector CNMC of the CNC.
Connection of
components
When you want to put on and take off, you must turn off the CNC power.
(Refer to the fig. I.3.1.2)
Fig. I.3.1.2
I.3.1.3
Please set bit 1 in K17 of keep relay area for PMC parameters.
#7
Parameter
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
K17
#1
PRGRAM
PRGRAM 0: The programmer function is disabled.

(The programmer menu is not displayed.)
1: The programmer function is enabled.
(The programmer menu is displayed.)
1511
#0

(PMCPA1/PA3)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
I.3.2
FANUC Power MateMODEL D can set only COUNTER DATA TYPE.
Specification and
Display of System
Parameters (SYSPRM)
The meaning of this parameter is same as PMCSA1/SA2.
PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER

COUNTER DATA TYPE =
[BINARY] [ BCD
] [
BINARY/BCD
] [
] [
Fig. I.3.2 PMCPA1 or PA3 System Parameter Screen
I.3.3
Condense
When the following condition is satisfied, the CONDNS key will be used
in FANUC Power MateMODEL D.
Some unused area remain by repeating the addition or the deletion

of the symbol/comment and the message in the memory.
Ladder might be able to be made more by compressing the unused

area by pushing [CONDNS] key when the memory is insufficient
while ladder is added.
[Example: When you want to expand ladder area by deleting

symbol/comment data at the memory status Fig.I.3.3 (a)]
(1) Delete symbol data(0.2KB).
(2) Push [CONDNS] key.
(3) The memory status becomes as Fig.I.3.3 (c) and LADDER can be
edited more.
NOTE
1 Sequence program area in Fig. I.3.3 (a) (c) is 64KB.
2 The underlined memory in Fig. I.3.3 (a) (c) is the same as
the memory display of the TITLE screen.
3 The symbol/comment area in Fig. I.3.3 (a) is 20KB (Unused
area 0.9KB is contained.)
4 In case of deleting message and expending another area,
it is as same as this example.
1512
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Message
10.0KB
Message
10.0KB
Symbol/Comment
19.1KB
Symbol/Comment
18.9KB

(PMCPA1/PA3)
Message
10.0KB
Executed
Condense
Symbol/Comment
18.9KB
Symbol/
Comment
0.2KB
Delete
20.0KB
19.0KB
(Unused area 1.1KB)
(Unused area 0.1KB)
Ladder
34.0KB
Ladder
34.0KB
(Unused area 0.9KB)
Ladder
34.0KB
(Unused area 1.0KB)
Fig. I.3.3 (a)
Fig. I.3.3 (b)
1513
Fig. I.3.3 (c)

(PMCPA1/PA3)
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
I.4
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
OF SOFT KEY
PCLAD
PCDGN
PCPRM
NEXT
STOP
EDIT
I/O
SYSPRM
TITLE
LADDER
SYMBOL
MESAGE
RETURN
NEXT
MODULE
CROSS
CLEAR
Fig. I.4 (a)
TITLE
LADDER
SYMBOL
MESAGE
FUNCTN
NEXT
RETURN
COMAND
INSNET
DELNET
INSERT
ADRESS
SEARCH
NEXT
COPY
MOVE
CHANGE
Fig. I.4 (b)
1514
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
J. APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS
APPLICABLE FANUC LADDER EDITIONS
The following tables list the editions of offline programs required to

program each PMC model.
1515
J.1
B61863E/15
Body of FANUC LADDER

Body of FANUC LADDER
PMCSA module
PMCSA module
PMCSB/SC module
PMCSB/SC module
PMCNB module
PMCNB module
FANUC LADDERII
Ladder editing package
FANUC LADDERIII
Ladder editing package
(Windows)
FANUC LADDER,
FANUC LADDERII,
FANUC LADDERIII,
LADDER EDITING
PACKAGES
Model
APPENDIX
(PC9801)
(IBM PC/AT)
(PC9801)
(IBM PC/AT)
(PC9801)
(IBM PC/AT)
(PC9801)
(IBM PC/AT)
(IBM PC/AT)
(IBM PC/AT)
(IBM PC/AT)
A08B9200J502#JP
A08B9201J502#EN
A08B9200J603#JP
A08B9201J603#EN
A08B9200J604#JP
A08B9201J604#EN
A08B9200J606#JP
A08B9201J606#EN
A08B9201J503
A08B9201J510
A08B9210J505
(IBM PC/AT)
A08B9210J511
PMC
PA1
PMC
PA3
PMC
SA1
PMC
SA2
PMC
SA3
PMC
SA5
PMC
SB
PMC
SB2
PMC
SB3
5.0
and later
5.0
and later
2.0
and later
2.0
and later
5.0
and later
6.2
and later
(Note)
1.0
and later
2.0
and later
5.0
and later
4.0
and later
4.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
4.0
and later
4.2
and later
(Note)
A08B9201J603#EN
A08B9200J604#JP
1.0
and later
3.0
and later
4.5
and later
A08B9201J503
1.0
and later
2.0
and later
1.0
and later
2.0
and later
1.0
and later
A08B9201J510
2.1
and later
1.3
and later
2.2
and later
1.0
and later
A08B9210J505
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
A08B9210J511
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
1.0
and later
Drawing number
A08B9200J502#JP
A08B9201J502#EN
A08B9200J603#JP
A08B9201J604#EN
1516
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Model
Drawing number
A08B9200J502#JP
A08B9201J502#EN
A08B9200J603#JP
PMC
SB4
PMC
SB5
PMC
SB6
7.1
8.5
8.5
and later and later and later
PMC
SB7
PMC
SC
PMC
SC3
PMC
SC4
PMC
NB
PMC
NB2
PMC
NB6
1.0
5.0
7.1
6.1
8.5
and later and later and later and later and later
1.0
4.5
5.0
A08B9201J603#EN
A08B9200J604#JP
5.0
7.0
7.0
A08B9201J503
1.0
1.1
1.1
(Note2) (Note2)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.2
A08B9201J510
1.0
1.0
1.0
(Note3) (Note3)
1.0
1.0
2.1
2.1
3.1
A08B9210J505
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
and later and later and later and later
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A08B9210J511
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
and later and later and later and later
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A08B9201J604#EN
1.0
3.0
and later and later
NOTE
1 When a PMCSA5 ladder is to be created in the FANUC
LADDER, set the model to PMCSA3 (RA3).
2 Version 2.1 and later when the online function is used in
the Power Mate iD/H
3 Version 2.4 and later when the online function is used in
the Power Mate iD/H
1517
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
J.2
A08B0035J595#E (PG Mark II): FANUC LADDER PMCSA1/SA2
FANUC LADDER
(SYSTEM P SERIES)
A08B0036J595#E (PG Mate):

Model
Edition
PMC
PA1
PMC
PA3
PMC
SA1
PMC
SA2
PMC
SA3
1.1 and later
2.1 and later
3.1 and later
4.1 and later

: Not supported,
: Supported, n: Restrictedly supported (Note)
NOTE
A sequence program cannot be transferred from the
PMCSA1 of the FANUC Series 20 to the offline
programmer (edition 6.0 or an earlier edition). If this is
attempted, alarm 89 occurs in the offline programmer.
A08B0036J964 (PG Mark II and PG Mate):

PMCSA1/SA2/SB/SC/PA1/PA3 data
Model
Edition
PMC
PA1
PMC
PA3
PMC
SA1
PMC
SA2
PMC
SA3
1.1 and later

2.1 and later
: Not supported,
A08B0035J595#E (PG Mark II):

FANUC LADDER PMCSB/SB2/SC
A08B0036J595#E (PG Mate):
Model
Edition
PMC
SB
1.1 and later
4.1 and later
: Not supported,
1518
PMC
SB2
PMC
SB3
PMC
SC
PMC
SC3
PMC
NB
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
NOTE
The edition of FANUC LADDER adopted for the PMCSA2
or PMCSB2 can be used to program the PMCSA3 or
PMCSB3 as long as some functional instructions including
structured programming are not used (as long as FANUC
LADDER is used within the range of the specifications of the
PMCSA2 or PMCSB2).
When this edition is used:
(1)The following functional instructions cannot be used.
(For details, see Section 5 of Part I.)
MOVB, MOVW, MOVN
DIFU, DIFD
AND, OR, NOT, EOR
END, CALL, CALLU, SP, SPE
JMPB, JMPC, LBL
(2)A sequence program created by the editing function
(ladder editing module) contained in the PMCSA3/SB3
cannot be edited after it is read into the offline programmer.
(3)A sequence program created by the offline programmer
and transferred to the PMC (sequence program
transferred and edited by the builtin editing function)
can be edited again after it is read into the offline
programmer.
1519
K. LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

APPENDIX
WITH MEMORY CARD
LEVEL UP OF INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION WITH

MEMORY CARD
1520
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
K.1
OUTLINE OF
LEVELED UP
CONTENTS

WITH MEMORY CARD
The function is leveled up, that is Input/Output function with Memory

Card by CNC or Offline Programmer. The leveled up contents are as
follows.
(1) The time is reduced in Inputing/Outputing between CNC and
Memory Card by PMC I/O function. This is the same between
Offline Programmer and Memory Card.
(2) Sequence programs can be inputted from Memory Card by BOOT
SYSTEM, by which CNC management software or so can be
inputted.
Memory Card function can be used in the following editions of CNC
basic software and PMC management software and FANUC
LADDER for Personal Computer.
CNC basic software
non leveled up
leveled up
FANUC Series 20FA basic software (D001)
0506
More than 07
FANUC Series 20TA basic software (D101)
02
More than 03
PMC management software

non leveled up
leveled up
0405
More than 06
PMCSA1/SA3 management software (4080)
FANUC LADDER for Personal Computer

non leveled up
FANUC LADDER PMCSA1/SA2/SB/SB2/SC
SYSTEM
(A08B9200J502#JP (PC9801))
(A08B9201J502#EN (IBM PC/AT))
6.1
PMCSA1/SA2 MODULE
(PMCSA1/SA2/SA3/PA1/PA3)
(A08B9200J603#JP (PC9801))
(A08B9201J603#EN (IBM PC/AT))
4.1
1521
6.2
leveled up
More than 6.3
More than 4.2

APPENDIX
WITH MEMORY CARD
B61863E/15
K.2
OPERATION
K.2.1
CNC Offline
Programmer
(1) Operation of CNC

1) On PMC I/O screen, specify MCARD as DEVICE, WRITE
as FUNCTION, LADDER as DATA KIND, any file name,
which is omissible, as FILE NO. (See Fig. K.2.1 (a)) and
press the soft key [EXEC].
PMC I/O PROGRAM
CHANNEL
DEVICE
FUNCTION
DATA KIND
FILE NO.
( #NAME )
MONIT
STOP
=
1
= MCARD
= WRITE
= LADDER
=
[ EXEC ][CANCEL][ WRITE ][ READ ][COMPAR]

[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT ][
][SETUP ]
Fig. K.2.1 (a) PMC I/O screen
(2) Operation of Offline Programmer (FANUC LADDER for Personal

Computer)
2) Mount a Memory Card interface on the personal computer.
3) Select [INOUT] (I/O) from the main menu.
4) Select [MCARD] (Memory Card) from the I/O menu. (See
Fig. K.2.1 (b))
I/O
PMCRA1
F1
KEY :
FA WRITER
F2
KEY :
PMC WRITER
F3
KEY :
PMC
F4
KEY :
Handy File
F5
KEY :
Memory Card
F10 KEY :
FAWRT PMC
WRT
PMC
<O>[A:FLADDER
END
FDCAS M
CARD
Fig. K.2.1 (b) I/O Menu screen
1522
END
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

WITH MEMORY CARD
5) Select [READ] (PROGRAMMER Memory Card). (See Fig.

K.2.1 (c).)
I/O (M_CARD)
PMCRA1
<O> [A:FLADDER
F1
KEY :
WRITE
(PROGRAMMER > Memory Card)
F2
KEY :
READ
(PROGRAMMER < Memory Card)
F10 KEY :
END
WRITE READ
END
Fig. K.2.1 (c) I/O (I/O M_CARD) screen
6) Specify the followings (See Fig. K.2.1 (d).):
Name of the Memory Card file

Specify the name of the file in the Memory Card which is to be
converted and the Memory Card drive on which the Memory
Card is mounted.
Name of the ROM format file to be created

Specify a file name to be given to the converted ROM format
data.
I/O (FROM MC)
PMCRA1
<O> [A:FLADDER
READ (PROGRAMMER < Memory Card)

Memory Card FILE NAME
:
(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)
ROM FORMAT FILE NAME
EXEC
END
Fig. K.2.1 (d) I/O (FROM MC) screen
7) After it is decompiled, the converted ROM format file can be

edited by the personal computer.
1523

APPENDIX
WITH MEMORY CARD
K.2.2
Offline Programmer
CNC
B61863E/15
(1) Operation of Offline Programmer (FANUC LADDER for Personal

computer)
1) Mount a Memory Card interface on the personal computer.
2) Compile a source program and create a ROM format file.
3) Return to the main menu and select [INOUT] (I/O).
4) From the I/O menu, select [MCARD] (memory Card).
5) Select [WRITE] (PROGRAMMER
Fig. K.2.1(c)).
Memory Card). (See
6) Specify the following (see Fig. K.2.2.):
Name of the ROM format file

Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.
Name of Memory Card file name

Specify the name to be given to the converted Memory Card
file and the Memory Card drive to which the data is output.
(The file can be accessed by the Memory Card interface
incorporated into the CNC.)
I/O (TO MC)
PMC RA1
<O> [A:FLADDER
WRITE(PROGRAMMER > Memory Card)

ROM FORMAT FILE NAME
Memory Card FILE NAME

:
(Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)
EXEC
END
Fig. K.2.2 I/O (TO MC) screen
(2) Operation of CNC

There are 2 methods by which the sequence program can be inputted
from Memory Card.
The method of using I/O function of PMC

On PMC I/O screen, specify MCARD as DEVICE, READ
as FUNCTION, the file name or file No. you want to input as
FILE NO. and press the soft key [EXEC].
The method of using BOOT SYSTEM (When CNC starting up)

Refer to K.2.3.
1524
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
K.2.3

WITH MEMORY CARD
Sequence programs which are output from leveled up CNC or Offline

Programmer to Memory Card can not be input to non leveled up CNC or
Offline Programmer. (Refer to the table of K.1)
Note
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Offline Programmer
CNC
: Leveled up
: Available with no condition

: Available with some condition
: Non leveled up
The case of (1), (2), (3) and (4) are explained as follows.
In case of (1), (2)

Output operation : There is no special operation
Input operation : Input sequence programs buy BOOT SYSTEM.
1525

APPENDIX
WITH MEMORY CARD
B61863E/15
In case of (3)
Output operation : Output sequence programs by setting the output
format to 1 (:SFORMAT) on the following
SETUP screen PMC I/O. The default output
format is 0 (:BINARY).
PMC I/O PROGRAM
CHANNEL
DEVICE
FUNCTION
DATA KIND
FILE NO.
( #NAME )
MONIT
=
=
=
=
=
STOP
1
MCARD
WRITE
LADDER
[ EXEC ][CANCEL][ WRITE ][ READ ][COMPAR]

[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT ][
][SETUP ]
PMC SETUP MCARD
MONIT
OUTPUT FORMAT (PROGRAM) =

(0:BINARY,1:SFORMAT)
[ INPUT ][
][
][
STOP
][
INIT
Press [INIT] key to reset default value 0.
Input operation
: Input sequence programs by selecting F6:I/O

on main menu screen of FANUC LADDER, then
F3:Handy File & Memory Card.
In case of (4)
Output operation : Output sequence programs by selecting F6:I/O
on main menu screen of FANUC LADDER, then
F4:Handy File.
Input operation
1526
: Input sequence programs by selecting F6:I/O on

main menu screen of FANUC LADDER, then
F3:Handy File & Memory Card.
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

WITH MEMORY CARD
K.3
Ladder data can be transferred by using a memory card.
NB/NB2 DATA
COMPATIBILITY
Two data formats are used:
Handy file format
Memory card format
The handy file format defines the S format data used with RS232C.
The memory card format defines the binary format data used for a boot.
Data output to a memory card from the I/O screen of an NB of the 4047
series is handy file format data.
Data output to a memory card from the I/O screen of an NB/NB2 of the
4048 series is memory card format data.
K.3.1
Data Transfer Between
NB (4047 Series) and
FANUC LADDER
Transfer in handy file format
PMC I/O screen

NB (4047)
FANUC LADDER
(personal computer
version)
Transfer function not provided
NC boot function
NB (4047)
K.3.2
NB/NB2 (4048 Series)
and FANUC LADDER
Transfer in memory card format
FANUC LADDER
(personal computer
version)
Transfer in handy
file format
PMC I/O screen

NB/NB2 (4048)
1527
NC boot function
NB/NB2 (4048)

APPENDIX
WITH MEMORY CARD
B61863E/15
K.3.3
NB (4047 Series) and
NB (4048 Series)
PMC I/O screen

NB (4047)
NC boot function
NB (4047)
FANUC LADDER
(personal computer
version)
1528
PMC I/O screen

NB (4048)
NC boot function
NB (4048)
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
L. MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS

BETWEEN DIFFERENT MODELS
MIGRATION OF LADDER PROGRAMS BETWEEN

DIFFERENT MODELS
1529

L.1
MIGRATION OF
LADDER PROGRAMS
FROM
Power MateD/H TO
Power Mate iD/H
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The PMCSB5/SB6 for the Power Mate iD/H are upwardcompatible

with the PMCPA1/PA3 for the Power MateD/H, according to their
basic specifications. Because, however, sequence programs are not
objectcompatible with the PMCPA1/PA3 for the MateD/H, Ladder
programs sent from the Power MateD/H to a memory card cannot be
directly loaded into the Power Mate iD/H. For this reason, to migrate
from the Power MateD/H to the Power Mate iD/H, you must convert
the PMC sequence programs.
This section provides information about the PMC programming
compatibility that should be noted when you convert sequence programs.
Differences between the

PMCPA1/PA3 for the
Power MateD/H and the
PMCSB5/SB6 for the
Power Mate iD/H
(1) PMC model change

Sequence programs for one PMC model must be converted to those
for the other. These models are Laddersource compatible with each
other, and conversion is possible using the procedure described in the
following manual:
Appendix 3.3, Converting Sequence Programs for One PMC Model
to Those for the Other in the FANUC LADDERII Operators
Manual
(2) Changes in the interface signals between CNC and PMC and between
PMC and machine
The F, G, X, and Y address signals have been partially changed.
Change the sequence programs, referring to the following manual:
FANUC Power Mate iMODEL D/H Connection Manual
(Functions)
(3) Change in the basic command processing time
Because of the increase in command execution time, the following
changes may occur:
D Changes in the execution cycle at the second Ladder level
D Changes in the timing of secondlevel division and firstlevel
execution
D Changes in the timing of Ladder program execution and I/O
transfer
(4) PMC addresses expansion
In the PMCSB5, the inner relay (R) and the data table (D) have been
expanded.
In the PMCSB6, the inner relay (R), message request signal (A),
variable timer (T), counter (C), keep relay (K), data table (D), and
subprogram number (P) have been expanded.
1530

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Model
PMC address type
Inner relay (R)
Power MateD
Power MateD/H
Power Mate iD/H
PMCPA1
PMCPA3
PMCSB5
PMCSB6
R0 to R999
R9000 to R9099
R0 to R999
R9000 to R9117
R0 to R1499
R9000 to R9117
R0 to R2999
R9000 to R9199
Message request signal (A)
A0 to A24
A0 to A124
Variable timer (T)
T0 to T79
T0 to T299
Counter (C)
C0 to C79
C0 to C199
Keep relay (K)
K0 to K19
K0 to K39, K900 to K909
Data table (D)

Subprogram number (P)
D0 to D1859
D0 to D2999
P1 to P512
D0 to D7999
P1 to P2000
(5) Function command specification expansion

Expanded specifications have been added to the function commands
DECB, NUMEB, XMOVB, and PSGN2. The conventional, basic
specifications are still valid and, therefore, sequence programs need
not be changed for migration. For an explanation of the expanded
specifications, see Section I.5, PMC Function Commands.
(6) Changes in a window function
The CNC alarm state read function code has been changed from 23 to
186. In addition, the window function has been changed to the
lowspeed type. For details, see Section B.4.83.
1531

L.2
MIGRATION FROM
THE PMCNB/NB2 TO
THE PMCNB6
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
If you previously used the Series 15B PMCNB/NB2, you must convert
from the PMCNB/NB2 to the PMCNB6. The conversion procedure is
as described below.
(1) Model change from the PMCNB/NB2 to the PMCNB6 (source
programs)
When changing the model from the PMCNB/NB2 to the NB6, you
must convert the source programs for one PMC model to those for the
other using FANUC LADDERII. Conversion is possible using the
procedure described in the following manual:
Appendix 3.3, Converting Sequence Programs for One PMC
Model to Those for the Other in the FANUC LADDERII
Operators Manual (B66184EN)
The mnemonic file format for the PMCNB6 system parameters used
for model conversion is as follows:
%@0
2 BCD
2. Counter data type
(BINARY or BCD)
3 NO
3. Whether the operator panel exists

(exits: YES, does not exist: NO)
4 PMCNB6
4. PMC type
(PMCNB6)
7 100
7. Ladder execution time
(100%)
The specification changes in the NB6, described in Section I.1.2,

Overview of the Ladder Specifications, must be dealt with
separately.
(2) When using FANUC LADDER
When creating Ladder programs for the PMCNB6 using FANUC
LADDER, specify use of the PMCNB2. When PMCNB2 is
specified, however, the following restrictions are imposed:
a) Do not use the functions supported by the PMCNB6. (See
Section I.1.2, Overview of the Ladder Specifications for details.)
b) Do not use sequence programs with C programs linked.
(3) If using sequence programs located on the FANUC Series 15B
a) If using sequence programs for the PMCNB2 that are located on
the Series 15B in the Series 15i, the same restrictions as those
described in (2) are imposed. Provided that these restrictions are
observed, programs for the PMCNB2 can be output to a memory
card (by specifying LADDER for DATA KIND on the I/O
screen) and directly loaded into the Series 15i.
b) Sequence programs for the PMCNB that are located on the Series
15B cannot be used in the Series 15i, without first being
converted. They must be converted into programs for the
PMCNB6 with the model change procedure using FANUC
LADDERII, described in (1).
1532

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
L.3
MIGRATION FROM
THE PMCSA5/
SB5/SB6 TO THE
PMCSB7
L.3.1
Compatibility of PMCs
for Series
16i/18i/21iMODEL A
and B
(1) Differences between PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 and PMCSB7

The following list shows the difference of each PMC models. It is
possible to convert ladder for PMCSA5, PMCSB5, and PMCSB6
into PMCSB7. As for opposite compatibility, there are some
restrictions such as the range of PMC address. The ladder for
PMCSB7 therefore cannot be converted into other PMC models.
16i/18i/21iA
16i/18i/21iB
Series
SA5
PMC
address
SB5
SB7
PMC/CNC
interface(F,G)
F0 to F255
G0 to G255
F0 F511
G0 G511
F0 F767
G0 G767
PMC/Machine
interface(X,Y)
X0 to X127
Y0 to Y127
X200 X327
Y200 Y327
Compatible
Keep relay(K)
for system software
K17 to K19
K900 to K909
K900 to K919
Basic instruction
Functional
instruction
SB6
Compatible
END3
CTRB
MOVD
DISP
Not available
Available
Available
Not available
NOTE
This list does not contain the addition of reserved area of
PMC address.
(2) The conversion of ladder from PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 into PMCSB7
(source program)
When you want to change ladder from PMC SA5/SB5/SB6 to
PMCSB7, you can convert the source program using FANUC
LADDERIII. Please refer to following manual for details.
FANUC LADDERIII OPERATORS MANUAL B66234EN
10.3 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAM BETWEEN
PMC MODELS
The sequence of the conversion is as follows.
i) Convert a source program into the mnemonic file by FANUC
LADDERIII.
ii) Change the system parameters in the mnemonic file for
PMCSB7 by text editor.
iii) Create a new source program for PMCSB7 by FANUC
LADDERIII.
1533

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
D If you want to change the model PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 to model

PMCSB7, change the item PMC TYPE to PMCSB7.
D If the mnemonic file has insufficient parameters for PMCSB7,
the initial values are set with conversion for the source program.
D The mnemonic file format of the system parameter for
PMCSB7 is as follows.
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMCSB7
7 150
%
2. Counter type
3.Operator panel
4. PMC type
7. Ladder execution ratio
(BINARY or BCD)
(YES or NO)
(PMCSB7)
(150%)*
NOTE
The default value is 150. The meaning is described in (7)
Addition of LADDER EXEC in the system parameter
(PMCSB7)
iv) Convert the mnemonic file to the source program and overwrite
it on the new source program for PMCSB7.
(3) The ladder programs depend on execution time (PMCSB7)
As the execution speed of instructions become fast, the following
items about execution timing may be changed.
The execution cycle of both first and second level of ladder
The timing of the execution cycle of first level of ladder according
to the partition of second level ladder
The timing between ladder execution and I/O transfer
The working test of the machine is necessary.
(4) Change of sequence program size (PMCSB7)
As described in Section 3.4, the used size of system and
symbol/comment are changed. Generally, the program size for
PMCSB7 becomes bigger than one for PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 even if
the same source program is converted. If the program size exceed the
capacity of the flash ROM, please change the ladder step option or
reduce the symbol and comment.
(5) Operation/display of screens (PMCSB7)
The operation of the PMC screens for PMCSB7 is almost same as
PMCSA5/SB5/SB6. Some screens, however, are changed for the
improvement of operations and some functions. Please refer to
FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7 MANIPULATION.
(6) Input/output of PMC parameters (PMCSB7)
Through the expansion of size of the PMC parameters (T/C/K/D
areas), the data format of the PMC parameters on PMC I/O screen is
changed. As for the details of the data format, refer to 4
PMCMODEL SB7 Parameter Format.
The PMC parameters output from PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 can be
input to PMCSB7.
1534
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

The PMC parameters output from PMCSB7 cannot be input to

PMCSA5/SB5/SB6.
The extra relay address (E) is available as PMC address. The PMC
parameters for PMCSB7 contain the E addresses. When the PMC
parameters for PMCSB7 are input, the E addresses are overwritten.
(7) Addition of LADDER EXEC in the system parameter (PMCSB7)
In PMCSB7, according to addition of ladder level 3, the system
parameter LADDER EXEC is added.
Specify the ladder execution ratio of both level 1 and level 2 in this
parameter.
Defaut value
150
Setting range
1 to 150
In case that you dont use level 3 ladder, set the parameter to
maximum value (150).
In case that you use level 3 ladder, level 3 ladder may not run well
under the maximum value (150). Set the parameter to decrease the
ladder execution time of level1 and level 2.
The ladder execution time of level1 and level2 is calculated as
following formula.
Ladder execution time of = 5msec
level1 and level2
LADDER EXEC
100
The ladder execution time of level3 is calculated as following formula.

Ladder execution time of level3 =
7.5msec Ladder execution time of level1 and level2.
For example, in case that 100 is set to the parameter, the ladder
execution time of level1 and levle2 is assigned 5msec in ladder
execution cycle(8msec) and the ladder execution time of level3 is
assigned 2.5msec.
NOTE
Since the level 3 ladder is not required when importing
ladders from the PMCSA5/SB5/SB6, set this parameter to
the upper limit value (150).
When creating a new level 3 ladder or importing ladders
including the level 3 ladder from, for example, the
PMCNB6, set this parameter to an appropriate value.
1535

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(8) Addition/Change of Setting Parameters/System Keep Relays

The following setting parameters and keep relays are added.
Keep relays
16i/18i/21iA
PMCSA1/SA5/SB5/SB6
16i/18i/21iB
PMCSA1/SB7
Applied Software
K901.6/K18.6
EDIT ENABLE
406G/01 or later
406H/01 or later
K902.2/K19.2
ALLOW PMC STOP
406G/01 or later
406H/01 or later
I/O GROUP SELECTION
406G/02 or later
SA1 does not apply
K906.1
Saved in the nonvolatile

memory
K902.6/K19.6
HIDE PMC PARAM
406G/03 or later
406H/02 or later
K902.7/K19.7
PROTECT PMC PARAM
406G/03 or later
406H/02 or later
The meanings of the following keep relays are changed for the
improvement of the signal trace function.
Keep relays
16i/18i/21iA
PMCSA5/SB5/SB6
16i/18i/21iB
PMCSB7
Applied Software
K900.5/K17.5
Signal trace function starts

automatically.
Signal trace function for offline

programmer starts automatically.
406G/01or later
K900.6/K17.6
Signal Analysis function

starts automatically.
Signal analysis function for offline

programmer starts automatically.
406G/01or later
Signal trace function for embedded

screen starts automatically.
406G/01or later
K906.5
The meanings of the following setting parameters/keep relays are

changed for the reinforcement of the programmer protection function.
Keep relays
K900.0/K17.0
16i/18i/21iA
PMCSA1/SA5/SB5/SB6
Hide ladder program.
16i/18i/21iB
PMCSB7
Hide PMC program
Applied Software
406G/01or later
The allocations of following keep relays are changed for the I/O link
assignment function with 2 channels. (PMCSB6/SB7)
Keep relays
16i/18i/21iA PMCSB6
16i/18i/21iB PMCSB7
Applied Software
K904 to K905
Effective group selection for

channel 1 for single channel
composition
Effective group selection for
channel 2 for dual channel
composition
PMCSB7 does not applied.
K910 to K911
Effective group selection for channel 1
406G/02 or later
K912 to K913
Effective group selection for channel 2
406G/02 or later
As for the details of the each setting parameter, refer to V.2. Setting
Function
1536
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

(9) Addition of PMC alarm (PMCSB7)

The number of groups of I/O Link defined in the sequence program is
compared with the number of groups of actually connected I/O
devices. If the selectable I/O link assignment function is used, the
number of selected I/O groups is compared to the number of groups
of actually connected I/O devices. When the number of groups does
not match, the following PMC alarm occurs.
Alarm message
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE
(CHx yyGROUP)
Contents
The allocation of the I/O module in group
yy does not match the actual I/O device
configuration.
Solution
1) Check the connection of the cable leading to the I/O device in group yy.
2) Check that the I/O device was turned on
before the CNC
3) Check the setting data of the I/O link assignment function.
4) Check the setting parameter of the selectable I/O link assignment function.
NOTE
All I/O devices connected with the channel on which this
alarm occurs are not linked.
And the sequence program runs regardless of this alarm.
This function is controlled by K906.2.
K906.2 = 0: Connection check of I/O link is effective. (Initial
value)
K906.2 = 1: Connection check of I/O link is not effective. (Same
as 16i/18i/21iA)
CAUTION
When the I/O devices are linked on the several abnormal
status, for example, a failure of the I/O devices, a failure of
the I/O devices connection and a change of the setting of
the I/O devices by unintentional operation, there is
possibility that the machine may not work normally. If this
function is effective, it is possible to inspect the abnormality
of the I/O devices in power on. It is recommended that this
setting is set to initial value (0) to troubleshoot the I/O
devices easily.
(10) PMC C Language program
As for the conversion of C language applications from Series
16i/18i/21iA to Series 16i/18i/21iB, see the description below.
The C language libraryA08B9201J701 is applied in version 14
or later. As for the details, refer to B618631/061.
1537

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
D Action for modifications of library function specification

The following functions in III PMC LIBRARY are not available
to Series 16i/18i/21iB because PMC memory is extended for
PMCSB7 on Series 16i/18i/21iB and because there are the
sections which these conventional functions can not access.
*5.1 pl_memc, pl_mems, pl_meml, pl_memuc, pl_memus,
pl_memul
5.2 pl_membrd
5.3 pl_membwrt
Please use following functions instead of them.
5.4 pl_memc2, pl_mems2, pl_meml2, pl_memuc2,
pl_memus2, pl_memul2
5.5 pl_membrd2
5.6 pl_membwrt2
To keep the compatibility of source program according to each
PMC model having the different PMC addresses, it is
recommended to use above functions from 5.4 to 5.6.
D Action for different operation timing
With Series 16i/18i/21iB, the ladder is made faster when
compared with Series 16i/18i/21iA. So, the C language
application depending on the ladder program execution speed may
not operate as it is. Check the operation design.
(11) NC Parameter number 24 (PMCSA1/SB7)
You can enable and disable the online connection for Ethernet, HSSB
and RS232C by NC parameter No.24 without setting on the PMC
online monitor setting screen.
When you used the Ladder Editing Package or the FANUC
LADDERIII on the Open CNC or the system with the Ethernet
option on the 16i/18i/21iA, the high speed I/F (HSSB or Ethernet)
has been effective with the initial value 0 automatically.
On 16i/18i/21iB, the initial value does not make High Speed I/F
effective.
The 16i/18i/21iB has the Ethernet function as a basic, and it is
impossible to distinguish by the option. So, the initial value is
modified.
If you use the Ladder Editing Package or FANUC LADDERIII
(through the Ethernet), please set this parameter to 10, or set this
parameter to 0 and set HIGH SPEED I/F to USE in the online
setting screen. If you do not use these software, please keep the initial
value.
1538
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

The contents of NC Parameter No.24

NC
Parameter
No.24
Meaning on 16i/18i/21iA
Meaning on 16i/18i/21iB
Disables RS232C and enables HIGH SPEED The settings on the online monitor setting screen
I/F.
are effective.
However, enables HIGH SPEED I/F if the
LADDER EDITING PACKAGE or the Ethernet
option exists.
Enables Channel 1 of RS232C and disables

HIGH SPEED I/F.

HIGH SPEED I/F.

HIGH SPEED I/F.

HIGH SPEED I/F.
Reserve (Dont use this setting.)
Disables RS232C and enables HIGH SPEED

I/F.
However, enables HIGH SPEED I/F if the
LADDER EDITING PACKAGE or the Ethernet
option exists.
11
Enables Channel 1 of RS232C and HIGH

SPEED I/F.

SPEED I/F.
12

SPEED I/F.

SPEED I/F.
Terminates communication forcibly.

It is the same effect as soft key [EMG ST].
Terminates communication forcibly.

It is the same effect as soft key [EMG ST].
10
3 to 9
13 to 254
255
As for the details, refer to V.10. Online function.
1539

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
L.3.2
PMC Parameter Format
L.3.2.1
General
L.3.2.2
Format for PMCMODEL
SA1/SA5/SB5/SB6
This is the specification for the format to output the PMC nonvolatile
parameter to I/O device.
(1) Timer (T)

[Format]
N60xxx Pnnnnn; Setting value of timer
N:
The numbers of timer address plus 60000.
The range:
PMCSA1/SA5/SB5: N60000 to N60078
PMCSB6:
N60000 to N60298
P:
The timer value with decimal numeric. The effective values
are from 0 to 32767.
(Example)
N60000 P1;
Timer Number 1
T0
N60002 P20;
Timer Number 2
T2
........
N60078 P32767;
Timer Number 40
T78
(2) Counter (C)
[Format]
N61xxx Pnnnnn; Counter Reset Value, Counter Current Value
N:
The numbers of counter address plus 61000.
The range:
PMCSB6:
N61000 to N61198
P:
The counter value with decimal numeric. The effective
values are from 0 to 32767. Counter Preset value and
Counter Current value are output alternately. Binary data are
always output regardless of the setting of BCD format or
binary format.
(Example)
N61000 P7;
Counter Number 1
C0
N61002 P7;
C2
.......
N61076 P9999; Counter Number 20
C76
N61078 P0;
C78
(3) Keep relay (K)
[Format]
N62xxx Pnnnnnnnn;
N:
The numbers of keep relay address plus 62000.
The range:
PMCSB6:
N62000 to N62039, N62900 to
N62909
1540
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
P:

The value of the keep relay with binary numeric. The

effective values from N62000 to N62019are from 00000000
to 11111111. The effective values from N62900 to N62909
are also from 00000000 to 11111111.
(Example)
N620000 P00000000;
N620001 P11111111;
......
N620019 P10101010;
K0
K1
K19
(4) Data (D)

(i) Data Table Control
[Format]
N63000 Pnn;
Number of Table group (1 to 100)
N63002 Pnnnnnnnn;
Parameter of the group 1 (Binary

format)
N63003 Pn;
Data type of the group 1 (0,1,2)
N63004 Pnnnn;
Data number in the group 1

(PMCSA1/SA5:
1 to 1860,
PMCSB5: 1 to 3000, PMCSB6: 1
to 8000)
N63006 Pnnnn;
Top address of the data in the group 1

(PMCSA1/SA5:
0 to 1859,
PMCSB5: 0 to 2999, PMCSB6: 0
to 7999)
N63010 Pnnnnnnnn;
Parameter of the group 2(Binary

format)
N63011 Pn;
N63012 Pnnnn;
Data number in the group 2 (1

to10000)
N63014 Pnnnn;

(0 to 9999)
N:
The numbers of data table control address plus 63000.

The range is from N63000 to N63800.
P:
The values of the data table control.

D Total number of the table group
Range: 1 to 100
D Table parameter Range:
00000000 to 11111111
D Data type
0 to 2
Range:
D Data number in group

Range:
PMCSA1/SA5: 1 to 1860
PMCSB5: 1 to 3000
PMCSB6: 1 to 8000
D Top address of data in group

Range: 0 to 9999
1541

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
(Example)
N63000 P2;
N63002 P00000000;
N63003 P0;
N63004 P10;
N63006 P0;
N63010 P00000001;
N63011 P0;
N63012 P10;
N63014 P10;
(ii)Data Table
[Format]
N64xxx Pnnnnn;
N:
The offset of the Data Table address plus 64000.

The range:
PMCSA1/SA5: N64000 to N65859
PMCSB5:
N64000 to N66999
PMCSB6:
N64000 to N71999
P:
The value of the Data Table address with signed decimal

numeric. The ranges of the value depend on the data type
of the Data Table and are from 128 to 127 with the
1byte type, from 32768 to 32767 with the 2byte type,
from 2147483648 to 2147483647 with the 4byte type.
(Example)
N64000 P128;
N64001 P100;
N64002 P0;
.......
N64010 P1000;
N64012 P1;
.......
N64992 P50000000;
N64996 P50000000;
L.3.2.3
Format for PMCMODEL
SB7
(1) Header
[Format]
%; (PMC=SB7,MSID=0)
PMC:
MSID:
PMC Series. In PMCSB7, SB7 is output.

Reserve for FANUC. Always MSID=0.
(2) Timer (T)

[Format]
N60xxxx Pnnnnn; Setting value of timer
N:
The numbers of timer address plus 600000. The ranges are

from N600000 to N600498 and from N609000 to N609498.
P:
The timer value with decimal numeric. The effective values

from N600000 to N600498 are from 0 to 32767. The
effective values from N609000 to N609498 are from 0 to 5.
1542
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

(Example)
N600000 P1;
N600002 P20;
......
N600498 P32767;
Timer Number 1
Timer Number 2
T0
T2
Timer Number 250
T498
N609000 P0;
N609002 P0;
......
609498 P0;
*Note:
T9000
T9002
T9498
The area from N609000 to N609498 is reserve and P0

should be set.
(3) Counter(C)
[Format]
N61xxxx Pnnnnn; Counter Reset Value, Counter Current Value
N:
The numbers of counter address plus 610000. The ranges are

from N610000 to N610398 and from N615000 to N615198.
P:
The counter value with decimal numeric. The effective

values from N610000 to N610398 are from 0 to 32767.
Counter Preset value and Counter Current value are output
alternately. The effective values from N615000 to N615198
are from 0 to 32767. Only Current values are output. Binary
data are always output regardless of the setting of BCD
format or binary format.
(Example)
N610000 P7;
Counter Number 1
N610002 P7;
......
N610396 P9999; Counter Number 100
N610398 P0;
N615000 P7;
Fixed Counter Number 1
N615002 P20;
Fixed Counter Number 2
......
N615198 P9999; Fixed Counter Number 100
C0
C2
C396
C398
C5000
C5002
C5198
(4) Keep relay (K)

[Format]
N62xxxx Pnnnnn;
N:
The numbers of keep relay address plus 620000. The ranges

are from N620000 to N620099 and from N620900 to
N620919.
P:
The value of the keep relay with binary numeric. The

effective values from N620000 to N620099 are from
00000000 to 11111111. The effective values from N620900
to N620919 are also from 00000000 to 11111111.
(Example)
N620000 P00000000;
N620001 P11111111;
......
N620099 P10101010;
1543
K0
K1
K99

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
N620900 P00000000;
K900
N620901 P11111111;
K901
......
N620919 P10101010;
K919
(5) Data(D)
(i) Data Table Control
[Format]
N630000 Pnn;
Number of Table group (1 to 100)
N630002 Pnnnnnnnn; Parameter of the group 1(Binary
format)
N630003 Pn;
N630004 Pnnnn;
Data number in the group 1 (1 to
10000)
N630006 Pnnnn;
(0 to 9999)
N630010 Pnnnnnnnn; Parameter of the group 2(Binary
format)
N630011 Pn;
N630012 Pnnnn;
Data number in the group 2 (1
to10000)
N630014 Pnnnn;
(0 to 9999)
N:
The numbers of data table control address plus 630000.
P:
The values of the data table control.
D Total number of the table group
Range: 1 to 100
D Table parameter
Range: 00000000 to
11111111
D Data type
Range: 0 to 2
D Data number in group
Range: 1 to 10000
D Top address of data in group Range: 0 to 9999
(Example)
N630000 P2;
N630002 P00000000;
N630003 P0;
N630004 P10;
N630006 P0;
N630010 P00000001;
N630011 P0;
N630012 P10;
N630014 P10;
(ii)Data Table
[Format]
N64xxxx Pnnnnn;
N:
The offset of the Data Table address plus 640000. The
range is from N640000 to N649999.
1544
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

P:
The value of the Data Table address with signed decimal

numeric. The ranges of the value depend on the data type
of the Data Table and are from 128 to 127 with the
1byte type, from 32768 to 32767 with the 2byte type,
from 2147483648 to 2147483647 with the 4byte type.
(Example)
N640000 P128;
N640001 P100;
N640002 P0;
......
N640010 P1000;
N640012 P1;
......
N649992 P50000000;
N649996 P50000000;
(6) Extend Memory(E)
[Format]
N69xxxx Pnnnnn;
N:
The numbers of the Extend Memory address plus 690000.
P:
The value of the Extend Memory address with signed
decimal numeric. The range of the value is from 128 to 127.
(Example)
N690000 P128;
N690001 P100;
.......
N697998 P127;
N697999 P0;
%
L.3.2.4
The difference between
PMCSA1/SA5/SB5/SB6
and PMCSB7
Regarding the PMC parameters, the PMCSB7 has the following

differences compared with the PMCSA1/SA5/SB5/SB6.
D Change of N number (from 60,000 to 600,000)
D Addition of the header
D Extended addresses in PMCSB7
*Note: The meaning of the value with P has not been changed.
1545

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
L.4
MIGRATION FROM
THE Series 0 AND
Series 21B TO
Series 0iA
L.4.1
Compatible With
Series 0
The object and the source of the ladder program are not compatible
between PMCSA1/SA3 for Series 0iA and PMCL/M for Series 0.
Therefore, to apply the ladder program of PMCL/M for Series 0 to the
ladder program of PMCSA1/SA3 for Series 0iA, you need to convert
from the ladder program of PMCL/M to the mnemonic form, correct the
mnemonic form data, and convert from the mnemonic form data to the
ladder program of PMCSA1/SA3.
D The difference between PMCL/M for Series 0 and PMCSA1/SA3
for Series 0iA and the countermeasure
1. TMR, TMRB, and CTR instruction.
PMCSA1/SA3 are different from PMCL/M in the number of the
parameter in TMR,TMRB and CTR instructions. Therefore, please
check the mnemonic form data, and delete the parameter, and set
up the timer or the counter.
(Example)
Instruction
Before the modification

(PMCL/M)
After the modification

(PMCSA1/SA3)
TMR
RD R400.0
TMR 1
D300
WRT R401.1
RD R400.0
TMR 1
WRT R401.1
TMRB
RD R400.1
SUB 24
2
1000
D310
WRT R401.2
RD R400.1
SUB 24
2
1000
WRT R401.2
CTR
RD.STK R400.2
SUB 5
1
D320
WRT R401.3
RD.STK R400.2
SUB 5
1
WRT R401.3
2. END3(SUB48), PACTL(SUB25) and DISP(SUB49) instruction

Instruction
Countermeasure
END3
(SUB48)
This instruction has not been supported in PMCSA1/SA3.

Please delete the ladder program of third level. Or, please move to second level
from third level, and delete END3(SUB48).
PACTL
(SUB25)

Please delete PACTL(SUB25).
DISP
(SUB49)

Please change the ladder, and use the DISPB instruction.
Please delete DISP(SUB49).
1546
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

3. The difference of the addresses

Converting of the addresses except F/G/X addresses
Please correct the range of the address when the address which
is out of range in PMCSA1/SA3 is used.
(Example) The below address cannot be used in PMCSA1/
SA3.
D3584D3839, R3840R4095 etc.
Converting of F/G/X addresses
Please refer to the connection manual of Series 0 and Series 0i,
and convert F/G/X addresses.
Also, FANUC LADDER and FANUC LADDERII can
convert the F/G signals between NC and PMC from Series 0 to
Series 0iA.
This conversion has the following limitations.
(1) The ladder program converted into a mnemonic form is
necessary.
(2) The bit address that is used in basic instruction is
converted.
(3) The byte address that is used in functional instruction is not
converted.
(4) This conversion can avail only the case that the addresses
are converted from standard Series 0T/M to standard
Series 0iTA/MA. The F/G addresses of 1000.0 or more
are not converted.
(5) When the same signal name is used in the Series 0 and
Series 0iA, and the addresses corresponding to the signal
in the Series 0 and Series 0iA have onetoone
relationship, the bit address is converted.
NOTE
FANUC LADDERIII cannot convert the address.
[Operation of conversion]
In case of FANUC LADDER (Example: Converting the ladder to
PMCSA1 for Series 0iMA from PMCM for Series 0M)
(1) Prepare the mnemonic form file of PMCM that you want to convert.
(*A)
(2) Input a new source program name in EDIT of FANUC LADDER,
and select the PMCRA1(SA1) in SETUP, and quit the edit screen
without edit operation.
(3) Convert to the mnemonic form file from source program of (2). (*B)
The empty mnemonic form file is made.
(4) Exit FANUC LADDER, and start up the text editor.
Specify the mnemonic form file of (3) as the edit file name.
(5) Replace the symbol data of the mnemonic form file(PMCSA1) of (3)
with the converter file of FS0T_CNV.SYM or FS0M_CNV.SYM.
(*C)
1547

APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The converter file is stored in OAppendix of the installed

directory of FANUC LADDER.
FS0MCNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0iMA from
Series 0M
FS0TCNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0iTA from
Series 0T
(6) Replace the ladder data of the mnemonic form file(PMCSA1) of (3)
with the ladder data of the mnemonic form file(PMCM) of (1). (*D)
(7) Exit the text editor, and start up FANUC LADDER.
(8) Specify the PMCRA1(SA1) as PMC model, and convert to the
source program from the mnemonic form file of (5).
(9) Delete all symbols and comment on the EDIT screen.
*A Original mnemonic file
(PMCM)
%@A
%@0
1 400
20
30
40
50
60
7 100
80
90
%
%@1
%
%@2
%
%@3
RD X21.4
WRT G121.3
RD.NOT X22.3
WRT.NOT G122.3
SUB1
SUB2
%
%@4
%
%@E
Converter file
FS0MCNV.SYM
*B Converted mnemonic file

(PMCSA1)
%@2
G000.0 G100.0
G000.1 G100.1
G000.2 G100.2
G000.3 G100.3
...
F132.5 F272.5
F132.6 F272.6
F132.7 F272.7
%
*C insertion
*D insertion
%@A
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMCRA1
%
%@1
%
%@2
%
%@3
%
%@4
%
%@5
%
%@E
In case of FANUC LADDERII (Example: Converting the ladder to

PMCSA3 for Series 0iTA from PMCM for Series 0T)
(1) Prepare the mnemonic form file of PMCM that you want to convert.
(**A)
(2) Input the new source program name on the Program Selection in
FANUC LADDERII, and select the PMCSA3/RA3, and select
the OffLine function.
1548
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

(3) Convert to the mnemonic form file from source program of (2). (**B)
Select the MNEMONIC EDIT, and specify the SOURCE
PROGRAM MNEMONIC FILE. The empty mnemonic form file
is made.
(4) Exit FANUC LADDERII, and start up the text editor.
Specify the mnemonic form file of (3) as the edit file name.
(5) Replace the symbol data of the mnemonic form file(PMCSA3) of (3)
with the converter file of FS0T_CNV.SYM or FS0M_CNV.SYM.
(**C)
The converter file is stored in \Appendix of the installed
directory or system floppy of FANUC LADDERII.
FS0MCNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0iMA from
Series 0M
FS0TCNV.SYM: For converting to Series 0iTA from
Series 0T
(6) Replace the ladder data of the mnemonic form file(PMCSA3) of (3)
with the ladder data of the mnemonic form file(PMCM) of (1). (**D)
(7) Exit the text editor, and start up FANUC LADDERII.
(8) Select the PMCRA1(SA1) as PMC model, and convert to the source
program from the mnemonic form file of (5). Select the
MNEMONIC EDIT, and specify the MNEMONIC FILE
SOURCE PROGRAM.
(9) Delete all symbols and comment data on the SYMBOL &
COMMENT of the EDIT.
1549

*A Original mnemonic file

(PMCM)
%@A
%@0
1 400
20
30
40
50
60
7 100
80
90
%
%@1
%
%@2
%
%@3
RD X21.4
WRT G121.3
RD.NOT X22.3
WRT.NOT G122.3
SUB1
SUB2
%
%@4
%
%@E
L.4.2
Compatibility With
Series 21MODEL B
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Converter file
FS0TCNV.SYM
**B Converted mnemonic file

(PMCSA3)
%@2
G000.0 G100.0
G000.1 G100.1
G000.2 G100.2
G000.3 G100.3
...
F0135.5 F275.5
F0135.6 F275.6
F0135.7 F275.7
%
**C insertion
**D insertion
%@A
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMCRA3
%
%@1
%
%@2C
%
%@3
SUB 64
%
%@4
%
%@5
%
%@E
The ladder program of PMCSA1/SA3 for Series 0iA has the objective
compatibility with the ladder program of PMCSA1/SA3 for Series 21B
or PMCSA1/SA5 for Series 21i/210i.
Therefore, you can load the ladder program outputted from Series 21B
by using memory card on BOOT screen of Series 0i.
However, correction of the ladder program might be needed in the
following cases.
(1) Ladder program depending on execution time
The execution timing might change as follows because the execution
time of the instruction is changed.
Change in the execution cycle at the second ladder level.
Change in the timing of secondlevel division and firstlevel
execution.
Change in the timing of ladder program execution and I/O transfer.
1550
B61863E/15
L.4.3
Limited Function
L.5
COMPATIBILITY OF
PMC BETWEEN
Series15iMODEL A
AND B
APPENDIX

The PMC specification of Series 0iA is the same as PMCSA1/SA3 for

Series 21B. However, the following function is not supported.
The memory card cannot be used on the I/O Screen of PMC.
In other words, the ladder program and the PMC parameter cannot be
input or output on the PMC screen with a memory card.
Please use the BOOT screen when you input or output the ladder program
with a memory card.
Please use the FANUC floppy disk cassette, the Handy File or
PC(personal computer) when you input or output the PMC parameter.
The online function of FANUC LADDERII or FANUC LADDERIII
is not supported.
In PMCNB6 for Series 15iMODEL A/B, there is compatibility as

follows.
Data/Application
Compatibility
Ladder Program
Compatible between Model A and B
PMC Parameter
PMC C Language Application
Each data/applications in Model A can be available in Model B.

Each data/applications in Model B may not be available in Model A in the
future because the fuctions depend on CNC feature like the window
function may be improved.
1551
M. ALARM MESSAGE LIST
APPENDIX
ALARM MESSAGE LIST
1552
B61863E/15
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.1
ALARM MESSAGE
(PMCPA1/PA3/SA1/
SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/
SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/
SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/
NB2/NB6)
Alarm messages 1 (alarm screen)
Message
ALARM NOTHING
or
NO ALARM
Contents and solution

Normal status
(In case of PMCNB6)
ER00 PROGRAM DATA ERROR (ROM)
The sequence program in the ROM is not written correctly.

(solution) Please exchange ROM for the sequence program.
ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR (RAM)
The sequence program in the debugging RAM is defective.

(solution) Please clear the debugging RAM and input LADDER again.
The debugging RAM is not installed though the RAM is selected.
(solution) Please install the debugging RAM or install ROM for sequence
program and select ROM with K17#3=0.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER
The size of a sequence program exceeded the maximum allowable

ladder size.
(solution) The ordered RAM size is smaller than the option. Contact FANUC.
Change the value of MAX LADDER AREA SIZE on the SYSPRM
screen, then turn the power off then back on (only with PMCSC).
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION)
The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size.

(solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH
The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to

an actual model.
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE ERROR
The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.

(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
ER06 PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING
Both ROM for sequence program and the debugging RAM do not exist
(PMCSC only).
For a 3path system, the PMC model must be SB6.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER07 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP)
There is no step number option of LADDER.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH
Sequence Program has 2 channels of I/O Link, but PMC control software
or Ladder Editor Card or PMC C language control software does not
support the I/O Link expansion.
(solution) To use only the I/O Link channel 1, use sequence program for
only channel 1. To use the I/O Link channel 2, update PMC
control software and Ladder Editor Card and PMC C language
control software supported the I/O Link expansion.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK ERRORPLEASE With a change in the PMC type, for example, the retentiontype memory
TURN ON POWER AGAIN WITH PUSH O & Z. of the PMC must be initialized.
(CLEAR PMC SRAM)
(solution) 1) Press and hold down the O and Z key combination, and
turn the CNC back on.
2) When an alarm occurred on the loader control side, press
and hold down the 5 and Z key combination, and turn the
CNC back on.
3) Replace the backup battery.
4) Replace the master printed circuit board.
1553
APPENDIX
Message
B61863E/15
ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING

(SERIESNAME)
The PMCSB management software is not transferred.

(solution) There is a mismatch between the order and delivered the software. Contact FANUC.

(SERIESNAME)
The PMC C language board management software is not transferred.

(solution) There is a mismatch between the order and delivered the software. Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR (SERIESNAME) There is a series mismatch between the basic and option of the PMCSB
management software.
ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR (SERIESNAME) There is a series mismatch between the basic and option of the PMC C
language board management software.
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSION ERROR There is an edition mismatch between the basic and option of the
(SERIESNAME)
PMCSB management software.
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSION ERROR There is an edition mismatch between the basic and option of the PMC C
(SERIESNAME)
language board management software.
ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PROGRAM RAM) The debugging RAM cannot be read/written normally.
(solution) Please exchange the debugging RAM.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY
The parity error occurred on ROM for sequence program or the

debugging RAM.
(solution) ROM:
The deterioration of ROM may be deteriorated
Please exchange ROM for the sequence program
RAM:
Please edit the sequence program once on PMC
Still the error occurs, exchange the debugging
RAM.
FROM: (PMCNB/FS20)
Please edit the sequence program once on PMC
and write sequence program to FROM again.
NOTE
1 The PMCSB3/SC3 for the Series 16 MODELB does not support ER00 and ER06.
2 For the PMCSB3/SC3 for the Series 16 MODELB, the debugging RAM and ROM for
sequence program, described in the table, are not supported but the relevant descriptions
apply to ordinary RAM.
1554
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Message
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O
Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was

interrupted by the power off etc.
(solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program again.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR
Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to
the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
Or, please input LADDER again.
ER20 SYMBOL/ COMMENT DATA ERROR
Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by
the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR
Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to
the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING

or
ER 22 NO PROGRAM(In case of PMCNB6)
There is no sequence program.

(solution) Load a proper program at I/O screen or create program at LADDER Diagram Editor screen. After a program is loaded or
created, you have to write it to flash ROM not to lose it at power
off.
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER
There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc.

(solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER24 LADDER, LANGUAGE AREA OVERLAP
The ladder area overlaps the C language area.

(solution) Adjust the C program address range.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR (xx)
xx=PMCAOPT : The version in the PMCSB management software

does not match.
xx=PMCBAS2 : The version in the PMCNB6 management software
does not match.
ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULE ERROT (xx)
xx=PMCAOPT : The PMCSB management software has not been

initialized.
xx=PMCBAS2 : The PMCNB6 management software has not been
initialized.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS OUT OF RANGE Modify the sequence program. Change the parameter number of the
function instruction to a value within the valid range.
(solution) An outofrange parameter number is specified with function
instruction TMR, TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD.
ER28 NO OPTION(I/O LINK EXPANSION)
Sequence Program has 2 channels of I/O Link, but the option of I/O Link
expansion is not provided.
(solution) To use only I/O Link channel 1, use sequence program for only
channel 1. To use the I/O Link channel 2, the option of the I/O
Link expansion is necessary.
ER29 NO SUPPORT HARDWARE(I/O LINK The I/O Link 2channel is not supported by the edition of printed circuit
2CH)
board.
(solution) To use only the I/O Link channel 1, use sequence program for
only channel 1. To use the I/O Link channel 2, exchange main
CPU board with one which supports the I/O Link 2 channel.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
Any I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected on each channel.
When builtin I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed.
(solution) When builtin I/O card is used:
Please confirm whether the builtin I/O card is certainly connected with.
When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please
confirm the connection of the cable.
1555
APPENDIX
Message
B61863E/15
ER33 SLC ERROR

or
ER33 SLC ERROR(CH2)
The LSI for I/O Link is defective.

Display of CH2 means the defectiveness of I/O Link channel 2.
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.
ER34 SLC ERROR(xx)

or
ER34 SLC ERROR(CH2 xx)
The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group of I/O Link failed.
Display of CH2 means the xx group of I/O Link channel 2.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the
DI/DO units of the xx group.
Please confirm that the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC
and PMC. Or, please exchange the main CPU board.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN GROUP

(xx)
or
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA (CH2 xx)
The amount of the output data in the xx group of I/O Link exceeded the
max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each
group.
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A connecting and maintenance
manual (B61813E) FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B connecting
manual(B62163E)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN GROUP (xx) The number of the input data in the xx group of I/O Link exceeded the
or
max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA (CH2 xx)
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each
group.
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A connecting and maintenance
manual (B61813E) FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B connecting
manual(B62163E)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA OVER (xx) The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
or
(The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA (CH2 xx) ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the
number of the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA OVER (xx)
or
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA (CH2 xx)
The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.

(The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the
number of the input data of each group.
ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER (xxH)
Timeout occurred during step sequence processing. For details, see

IV6.2.2.
ER98 ILLEGAL LASER CONNECTION
The I/O unit group for the laser does not match the assignment data.
(solution) Make sure that the actual I/O unit configuration matches the
assignment data in the ladder.
ER99 X, Y96127 ARE ALLOCATED
Laser I/O assignments are assigned to X96 to X127 and Y96 to Y127
when the laser I/O link is supported.
(solution) Delete I/O assignment data of X96 to X127 and Y96 to Y127.
1556
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Message
WN01 LADDER MAX SIZE ERROR
The MAX LADDER AREA SIZE in the system parameter is illegal.

(solution) Set the correct value to MAX LADDER AREA SIZE and restart
the system.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL ADDRESS ERROR
The address setting data of the operators panel for FS0 is illegal.
(solution) Please correct the address setting data.
WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN
LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating.

The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, AXCTL, and
etc. may not work normally.
(solution) Modify the ladder so that SCT and RST are turned off after
execution of WINDR (lowspeed type), WINDW, EXIN,
AXCTL, MMCWR, and MMCWW.
(This alarm is cleared when the power is turned off and back
on again.)
WN04 UNAVAIL EDIT MODULE
The LADDER editing module cannot be recognized.

(PMCSA1/SA2/SA3/SB/SB2/SB3, except SA1/SA3 for FS20)
(solution) Please confirm the slot position installed.
Please confirm the installed module.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVERSION
A PMCSA3/SA5 ladder was transferred to PMCSB5.

(solution) Correct the ladder type.
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DEBUG FUNC
Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function.
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR (STACK)
When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was

executed, the stack of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM

WRITTEN TO FROM
IS
NOT The sequence program has been modified at LADDER Diagram Editor
screen, I/O Unit Allocation Editor screenor or I/O screen, and the modified
program has not written to flash ROM yet. If CNCs power is turned off
before writing the modified program to flash ROM, it will be lost at power
off.
(solution) If the modified program is expected to run also at next time
when CNCs power is turned on, write the modified program to
Flash ROM at I/O screen. If the sequence program has been
modified by accident, read correct program from flash ROM at
I/O screen.
WN17 NO OPTION (LANGUAGE)
There is no C language option.
WN18 ORIGIN ADDRESS ERROR
The LANGUAGE ORIGIN address of the system parameter is wrong

(solution) Please set the address of symbol RC_CTLB_INIT in the map file
to the LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the system parameter.
WN19 GDT ERROR (BASE, LIMIT)
The value of BASE, LIMIT or ENTRY of user defined GDT is illegal.

(solution) Please correct the address in link control statement and build file.
WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNT OVER
The number of common memories exceeds 8.

(solution) Please reduce the number of common memories to 8 or less.
It is necessary to correct a link control statement,build file and the
source file for the common memory.
WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRY ERROR
GDT ENTRY of the common memory is out of range.

(solution) Please correct the address of GDT ENTRY of the common
memory in the link control statement.
WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY ERROR
The priority of LADDER LEVEL 3 is out of range.

(solution) Please correct the value of LADDER LEVEL 3 in the link control statement within the range of 0 or 1099 or 1.
WN23 TASK COUNT OVER
The number of user tasks exceeds 16.

(solution) Please confirm TASK COUNT in the link control statement.
When the number of tasks is changed, it is necessary to correct the link control statement, build file and the composition of
the files to be linked.
1557
APPENDIX
Message
B61863E/15
WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR ERROR
The selector of the entry address to the user task is out of range.
(solution) Please correct the table of GDT in build file to the value within
32(20H)95(5FH).
WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY ERROR
The entry address of the data segment is out of range.

(solution) Please correct DATA SEGMENT GDT ENTRY in the link control statement and the table of GDT in build file within
32(20H)95(5FH).
WN26 USER TASK PRIORITY ERROR
The priority of the user task is out of range.

(solution) Please correct the TASK LEVEL in link control statement within
the range of 1099 or 1.
Note: Only one task can have TASK LEVEL 1 (including LADDER LEVEL 3).
WN27 CODE SEG TYPE ERROR
The code segment type is illegal. The code segment of RENAMESEG in

the binding control file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control
statement to correspond to the entry in the build file.
WN28 DATA SEG TYPE ERROR
The data segment type is illegal. The data segment of RENAMESEG in

the binding control file is wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of the code segment in the link control
WN29 COMMON MEM SEG TYPE ERROR
The segment type of common memory is illegal. The segment of

RENAMESEG in the building control file of the common memory is
wrong.
(solution) Please correct the entry of common memory in the link control
WN30 IMOPSSIBLE ALLOCATE MEM.
The memories for the data and stack etc. cannot be allocated.
(solution) Please confirm whether the value of code segment in build file
and USER GDT ADDRESS in link control statement is correct
or not.
Or please reduce the value of MAX LADDER AREA SIZE of
the system parameter and the size of the stack in link control
statement at the least.
WN31 IMPOSSIBLE EXECUTE LIBRARY
The library function cannot be executed.

(solution) Please confirm the object model of the library.
Or, system ROM of PMC must be replaced with one of later version.
WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ERROR
Link control statement data is illegal.

(solution) Please confirm whether the address of symbol
RC_CTLB_INIT in map file is set to LANGUAGE ORIGIN of the
system parameter. Or, please make the link control statement
again.
WN33 LNK CONTROL VER. ERROR
A link control statement data version error occurred.

(solution) Correct the link control statement in the C program.
WN34 LOAD MODULE COUNT OVER
There are more than eight independent load modules.

(solution) Reduce the number of independent load modules to eight or
less.
WN35 CODE AREA OUT OF RANGE
The code segment area is outside the RAM area.

(solution) Check the link map, and place segments within the RAM area.
WN36 LANGUAGE SIZE ERROR (OPTION)
The size of the language area exceeds the option.

(solution) Check the free space, and increase the option.
WN37 PROGRAM DATA ERROR (LANG.)
The language program area is invalid.

(solution) Install the correct language program.
WN38 RAM CHECK ERROR (LANG.)
A RAM check error occurred in the language program area.

(solution) Replace the RAM.
WN39 PROGRAM PARITY (LANG.)
A parity error occurred in the language program area.

(solution) Reenter each language program. If an error still occurs, replace the RAM.
1558
APPENDIX
B61863E/15

Message
WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O Language program read operation was interrupted.
(LANG.)
(solution) Reenter the language program.
WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE UNMATCH
WN42 UNDEFINE
ADDRESS
LANGUAGE
There is a C program type mismatch.

(solution) Correct the C program.
ORIGIN No language origin address is set.
(solution) Set a language origin address.
1559
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.2
ALARM MESSAGE
(PMCSB7)
Alarm number
Faulty location/corrective action
Contents
ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR
1) Reinput the sequence program.

The sequence program is invalid.
2) Replace the master printed circuit
board.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER
1) Reduce the sequence program.

The sequence program is too large.
2) Contact FANUC to have a larger The sequence program is invalid.
numberofLaddersteps option
specified.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR

(OPTION)
1) Reduce the sequence program.

The sequence program exceeds the
2) Contact FANUC to have a larger size specified by the numberof
numberofLaddersteps option Laddersteps option.
specified.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH
Using an offline programmer, change The setting of the type in the sequence
the sequence program to that for the program differs from the actual type.
correct PMC type.
ER06 PMC CONTROL SOFTWARE

TYPE UNMATCH
Contact FANUC to specify certain PMC The combination of CNC system

type
configuration and PMC type is invalid.
(Example: PMCSB5 is used for a
3path CNC system.)
ER07 NO OPTION (LADDER STEP)
1) Restore the backed up CNC No numberofLaddersteps option is

parameter data.
found.
2) Check the data sheet and reinput
the CNC parameters.
3) Contact FANUC to specify a
numberofLaddersteps option of
the necessary size.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH
1) Contact FANUC.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK

ERRORPLEASE TURN ON POWER
AGAIN WITH PUSH O&Z.
(CLEAR PMC SRAM)
1) Press and hold down the O and Z With a change in the PMC type, for
key combination, and turn the CNC example, the retentiontype memory of
back on.
the PMC must be initialized.
2) Replace the backup battery.
board.

(xxxx)
Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is not
loaded correctly.

(xxxx)
Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC C board management

software is not loaded correctly.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR (xxxx)
Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is

invalid.
(The series of BASIC and OPTION do
not match.)
ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR (xxxx)

software is invalid.
(The series of BASIC and OPTION do
not match.)
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSION

ERROR (xxxx)

invalid.
(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do
not match.)
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSION

ERROR (xxxx)

software is invalid.
(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do
not match.)
1560
An unsupported function is used in the

sequence program.
B61863E/15
Alarm number
APPENDIX
Contents
ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR

(PROGRAM RAM)
Replace the master printed circuit board The initialization of the memory used to
store the sequence program failed.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY

The parity of the sequence program is
2) Replace the master printed circuit invalid.
board.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY

I/O
Reinput the sequence program.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR
Display the Ladder edit screen again During Ladder editing, the system was
and exit from editing by using the [<<] forcibly switched to the CNC screen with
key.
a function key.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA

ERROR
Display the symbol/comment edit During symbol/comment editing, the

screen again and exit from editing by system was forcibly switched to the
using the [<<] key.
CNC screen with a function key.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR
Display the message data edit screen During message data editing, the
again and exit from editing by using the system was forcibly switched to the
[<<] key.
CNC screen with a function key.
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING

The sequence program is empty.
board.
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER
Turn the CNC off and then back on.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR

(PMCAOPT)

invalid.
(The edition of PMCAOPT does not
match.)
ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULE

ERROR (PMCAOPT)
1) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the The initialization of the

PMC management software.
management software failed.
2) 2) Replace the master printed circuit
board.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS OUT

OF RANGE
Modify the sequence program. Change An outofrange parameter number is

the parameter number of the function specified with function instruction TMR,
instruction to a value within the valid TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD.
range.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
1) Check that the I/O device is on.

An I/O device such as the I/O Link,
2) Check that the I/O device was turned connection unit, and Power Mate is not
on before the CNC was turned on. connected.
3) Check the connection of the cable.
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR
Replace the master printed circuit The LSI of the I/O Link is defective.
board.
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR (xx)
1) Check the connection of the cable In a slave in group xx, an error occurred
leading to a device in group xx.
in communication with an I/O device.
2) Check that the I/O device was turned
on before the CNC.
3) Replace that device in group xx in
which the PMC control module is
installed.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN

GROUP (xx)
Reduce the amount of output data in The amount of output data in I/O Link
group xx.
group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes).
The excess data is nullified.
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN

GROUP (xx)
Reduce the amount of input data in The amount of input data in I/O Link
group xx.
group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes).
The excess data is nullified.
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA

OVER (xx)
Modify the total amount of output data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.
each group to 128 bytes or less.
(The allocation of any group after group
xx on the output side is nullified.)
1561
While the sequence program was being

read, an interrupt command was
generated.
With a change in the PMC type, for

example, the power must be turned off
and then back on.
PMC
Alarm number
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Contents
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA

OVER (xx)
Modify the total amount of input data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.
each group to 128 bytes or less.
(The allocation of any group after group
xx on the input side is nullified.)
ER40 I/O LINKII SETTING ERROR

(CHx)
Reconfigure the I/O LinkII.
The I/O LinkII setting is invalid.

(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondary
board)
ER41 I/O LINKII MODE

ERROR(CHx)
The I/O LinkII mode setting is invalid.

board)
ER42 I/O LINKII STATION

NO.ERROR (CHx)
The I/O LinkII station number setting is

invalid.
board)
ER48 STEP SEQUENCE TIME OVER

(xxH)
Remove the setting of exceeding setting The activated condition of step

time on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME sequence exceeds the time limit, which
MONITOR SETTING screen.
is set on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME
MONITOR SETTING screen.
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE

(CHxyyGROUP)
1) Check whether the cables of I/O

devices in group yy are connected
properly.
2) Check the power to each I/O device.
3) Check the setting of the I/O link
assignment data.
4) Check the setting parameter of the
selectable I/O link assignment
function.
ER98 ILLEGAL LASER

CONNECTION
Modify the allocation of the I/O module. When an I/O device for a laser is used,
the allocation of the I/O module does not
match
the
actual
I/O
device
configuration.
ER99 X,Y96127 ARE ALLOCATED
Modify the allocation of the I/O module. When an I/O device for a laser is used,
another I/O device is allocated to
X96127/Y96127.
X96127/Y96127 are used for I/O
devices for a laser, and cannot be used
for other devices.
WN02 OPERATE ADDRESS ERROR
Modify the setting of the PMC system The setting of the PMC system
parameter, address of the operators parameter, address of the operators
panel for Series 0.
panel for Series 0, is invalid.
WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN
1) Modify the ladder so that SCT and

RST are turned off after execution of
WINDR (lowspeed type), WINDW,
EXIN, AXCTL, MMCWR, and
MMCWW.
(This alarm is cleared when the
power is turned off and back on
again.)
2) Turn the CNC off and then back on.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVERSION
Using an offline programmer, change The setting of the type in the sequence
the sequence program to that for the program differs from the actual type.
correct PMC type.
(Example: For the PMCSB5, the
Ladder program of the PMCSA3/SA5
was transferred.)
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DEBUG

FUNC
To restart a user task that has been When a PMC C board is used, a user
stopped, stop the sequence program task has been stopped due to a break by
and then execute it again.
a debug function.
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR (STACK)
Modify the sequence program so that For a subprogram call with the function
the subprogram nesting level is eight or instruction CALL or CALLU, the nesting
less.
level is too deep (exceeds 8).
1562
The number of assigned I/O modules in

group yy differs from that of I/O devices
actually connected.
All I/O devices connected with the
channel on which this alarm occurs are
not linked.
And the sequence program runs
regardless of this alarm.
The Ladder program was stopped

during communication between the
CNC and PMC.Function instructions
such as WINDR, WINDW, EXIN,
DISPB, and AXCTL may not be
executed normally.
B61863E/15
Alarm number
APPENDIX
Contents
WN09 NO OPTION
(STEP SEQUENCE)
1) Contact FANUC to have a step Though there was no step sequence

sequence option specified.
option, execution of step sequence
2) Chang to the sequence program for function is tried.
which step sequence isnt used.
WN17 NO OPTION (LANGUAGE)
1) Restore the backed up parameter When a PMC C board is used, no PMC

data.
C program option is found.
2) Check the data sheet and reinput
the parameters.
3) Contact FANUC to specify a PMC C
program option of the necessary
size.
WN18 ORIGIN ADDRESS ERROR
1) On the PMC system parameter When a PMC C board is used, the PMC
screen, press [ORIGIN].
system
parameter,
LANGUAGE
2) Set the PMC system parameter, ORIGIN, is invalid.
LANGUGE ORIGIN, to the address
indicated by the RC_CTLB_INIT in
the map file.
WN19 GDT ERROR (BASE,LIMIT)
Modify the setting in the userdefined When a PMC C board is used, the
GDT in the link control statement or build BASELIMIT or ENTRY in the
file.
userdefined GDT is invalid.
WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNT

OVER
Change the number of shared When a PMC C board is used, the

memories to eight or less.Modify the link number of shared memories exceeds
control statement, build file, or other eight.
source files for shared memories.
WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRY

ERROR
Modify the ENTRY in the shared When a PMC C board is used, the
memory GDT in the link control ENTRY in the shared memory GDT is
statement.
out of range.
WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY ERROR
Change the value of the TASK LEVEL When a PMC C board is used, the
(LADDER LEVEL 3) in the link control priority of LADDER LEVEL 3 is out of
statement to 0, 10 to 99, or 1.
range.
WN23 TASK COUNT OVER
Change the TASK COUNT in the link When a PMC C board is used, the
control statement to 16 or less.
number of user tasks exceeds 16.
(To change the task count, modify the
link control statement, build file, and the
configuration of the files to be linked.)
WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR ERROR
Change the GDT table in the build file to When a PMC C board is used, the user
32 (20H) to 95 (5FH)
task entry address selector is out of
range.
WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY ERROR
Change the DATA SEGMENT GDT When a PMC C board is used, the data
ENTRY value in the link control segment entry address is out of range.
statement and the GDT table in the build
file to 32 (20H) to 95 (5FH).
WN26 USER TASK PRIORITY

ERROR
Change the TASK LEVEL of each task When a PMC C board is used, the
in the link control statement to a value priority of the user task is out of range.
from 10 to 99 or 1. (Note that 1 can be
specified for the TASK LEVEL of only
one task, including the third Ladder
level)
WN27 CODE SEG TYPE ERROR
Change the value of the code segment When a PMC C board is used, the code
according to the segment setting in the segment type is invalid. The setting of
link control statement and build file.
the RENAMESEG code segment in
the bind control file is wrong.
WN28 DATA SEG TYPE ERROR
Change the value of the data segment When a PMC C board is used, the data
according to the segment setting in the segment type is invalid. The setting of
link control statement and build file.
the RENAMESEG data segment in the
bind control file is wrong.
1563
Alarm number
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Contents
WN29 COMMON MEM SEG TYPE

ERROR
Change the value according to the When a PMC C board is used, the
segment setting in the link control shared memory segment type is invalid.
statement and build file.
The setting of the RENAMESEG
segment in the shared memory bind
control file is wrong.
WN30 IMPOSSIBLE ALLOCATE

MEM.
1) Check that the USER GDT ADDRESS When a PMC C board is used, the
in the link control statement and the memory area for data, stacks, and
start address of the code segment in others cannot be reserved.
the build file are correct.
2) Change the PMC system parameter,
MAX LADDER AREA SIZE, to a
minimum.
3) Change the stack size in the link
control state to a minimum.
WN31 IMPOSSIBLE EXECUTE

LIBRARY
1) Check the types supported by the When a PMC C board is used, library
library.
functions cannot be executed.
2) Reconfigure the PMC management
software and contact FANUC.
WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ERROR
1) Check that the address of When a PMC C board is used, link

RC_CTLNB_INIT is set for the PMC control statement (program control)
system parameter, LANGUAGE data is invalid.
ORIGIN.
2) Create the link control statement
again.
WN33 LNK CONTROL VER.ERROR
Modify the link control statement in the When a PMC C board is used, a link
PMC C program.
control statement data edition error has
occurred.
WN34 LOAD MODULE COUNT

OVER
Change the number of independent When a PMC C board is used, the

load modules to eight or less.
number of independent load modules
exceeds eight.
WN35 CODE AREA OUT OF RANGE
Check the link map and allocate When a PMC C board is used, the code
segments within the range of RAM.
segment area is out of the range of the
RAM.
WN36 LANGUAGE SIZE ERROR

(OPTION)
1) Reduce the PMC C program.

When a PMC C board is used, the PMC
2) Contact FANUC to specify a PMC C C program exceeds the size specified
program option of a larger size.
for the PMC C program option.
WN37 PROGRAM DATA ERROR

(LANG.)
Initialize the PMC C program memory. The PMC C program memory must be
([EDIT] [CLEAR] [CLRLNG] initialized.
[EXEC])
WN38 RAM CHECK ERROR (LANG.)
Replace the master printed circuit The initialization of the PMC C program
board.
memory failed.
WN39 PROGRAM PARITY (LANG.)
1) Reinput the PMC C program.

The parity of the PMC C program parity
2) Replace the master printed circuit is invalid.
board.
WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY

I/O (LANG.)
Reinput the language program.
WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE UNMATCH
1) Reinput the PMC C program.

When a PMC C board is used, an
2) Replace the master printed circuit unusable C program is input.
board.
WN42 UNDEFINE LANGUAGE

ORIGIN ADDRESS
1) On the PMC system parameter When a PMC C board is used, the PMC
screen, click [ORIGIN].
parameter, LANGUAGE ORIGIN, is not
2) Set the PMC system parameter, set.
LANGUGE ORIGIN, to the address
indicated by the RC_CTLB_INIT in
the map file.
WN48 UNAVAIL LANGUAGE BY CNC

UNMATCH
Remove the PMC C board.
1564
While the PMC C program was being

read, an interrupt command was
generated.
A PMC C board is installed in a CNC in

which a PMC C board cannot be used.
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.3
SYSTEM ALARM
MESSAGES
(PMCSC)
Message STATUS LED
PC1nn CPU INTERPT xxxx yyyyyy
STATUS LED
lL
PC130 RAM PARITY aa xxxx yyyyyy

STATUS LED
jL
PC140 NMI BOC bb xxxx yyyyyy
STATUS LED
LJ
PC150 NMI SLC aa cc
STATUS LED
JL

A CPU error (abnormal interrupt) occurred.
nn
: CPU exception handling code
It is an exception code of i80386. For details, please refer to
the manual of the CPU.
00 Division error such as a divisor is 0 in division instruction.
12 Stack exception such as violations of limit of stack segment.
13 General protection exception such as segment limit over.
xxxx : Segment selector where system error occurred.
The selector of 010302FB is used by C language.
yyyyyy: Offset address where system error occurred.
The parity error occurred on the debugging RAM of PMC.
aa
: RAM PARITY ERROR information.
The RAM parity error or NMI(Non Maskable Interrupt) generated in
module of PMC engine.
bb
: RAM PARITY ERROR information.
1, 2, 4, 8
Parity error occurred on basic DRAM.
14, 18
Parity error occurred on option DRAM.
20, 60, A0, E0 Parity error occurred on SRAM.
The communication error occurred in the I/O Link.
aa, cc : I/O Link error information.
This error may occur by the following causes.
1.When I/O UnitMODEL A is used, base1, 2 or 3 is not connected
though allocated.
2.The connection of cable is insufficient.
3.Defects of cable.
4.Defects of DI/DO units (I/O unit, Power Mate etc.)
5.Defects of PMC board (printed circuit board on host side where I/O
Link cable is connected.)
(solution) Investigate the cause of error.
1.Please confirm the allocation data (by EDITMODULE screen)
and compare with the actual connection.
2.Please confirm whether the cable is correctly connected.
If you cannot find the cause with the ways above, it may be the defect
of hardware.
Please investigate a defective place by the following methods.
3.Please confirm the specification of the cable referring to FANUC I/O
UnitMODEL B connecting manuals(B62163E).
4.Exchange the interface module of I/O Unit, the cable and the PMC
board, etc. one by one and, confirm whether this error occurs again.
The communication may fail by the noise etc. when this error still
occurs after replacing all DI/DO units.
Please investigate the cause of noise.
PC160 FBUS ERROR xxxx:yyyyyyyy

STATUS LED
Lj
A bus error occurred on the PMC.

xxxx
: Segment selector for which a bus error occurred.
yyyyyyyy : Offset address where a bus error occurred.
PC170 LBUS ERROR xxxx:yyyyyyyy

STATUS LED
Lj

xxxx
: Segment selector for which a bus error occurred.
yyyyyyyy : Offset address where a bus error occurred.
PC199 ROM PARITY eeeeeeee

STATUS LED
Ll
The parity error occur in PMC system ROM.

eeeeeeee : ROM parity error information.
1565
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
STATUS LED (green) are LED1, LED2 on PMCSC. CAPII is LED3

and LED4.
j : Off
J : On
lL : Blinking
NOTE
The system error on PMCSA1,SA2,SA3,SB,SB2 and SB3
is displayed as a system error on the CNC side.
(Refer to the FANUC Series 16MA Operators Manual
(B61874E) and FANUC Series 16TA Operators Manual
(B61804E).)
1566
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.4
SYSTEM ALARM
MESSAGES (C
LANGUAGE
FUNCTION FOR
PMCNB/NB2/NB6)
Message STATUS LED
RAM ERROR <a> bbcc xxxx: yyyyyyyy: PC010
STATUS LED
LJ or
jL
The parity error occurs on the debugging RAM of PMC.

a
: RAM which generates RAM parity.
B BASIC RAM
O OPTION RAM
S STATIC RAM
bb, cc
: RAM PARITY information.
xxxx
: Segment selector where system error occurred.
yyyyyyyy : Offset address where system error occurred.
ROM ERROR aaaaaaaa: PC020

STATUS LED lL
The parity error occurs in PMC system ROM.

aaaaaaaa : ROM parity information
DIVIDE ERROR xxxx: yyyyyyyy: PC040
Division error occurs such as a divisor is 0 in the division instruction.

xxxx
STATUS LED
lL
BUS ERROR xxxx: yyyyyyyy: PC040

STATUS LED
The BUS error (access on illegal address).

xxxx
lL
STACK FAULT xxxx: yyyyyyyy: PC040

STATUS LED
GENERAL
PC040
lL
PROTECTION
STATUS LED
lL
SLC ERROR aa (cc) : PC050
STATUS LED
JL
xxxx:
The stack exception such as the violation of the limit of the stack.
xxxx
yyyyyyyy: The general protection exception such as segment limit over was
generated.
xxxx
The communication error occurred in the I/O Link.
aa, cc
: I/O Link error information.
This error may occur by the following causes.
1.When I/O UnitMODEL A is used, base1, 2 or 3 is not connected
though allocated.
2.The connection of cable is insufficient.
3.Defects of cable.
4.Defects of DI/DO units (I/O unit, Power Mate etc.)
5.Defects of PMC board (printed circuit board on host side where I/O
Link cable is connected.)
(solution) Investigate the cause of error.
1.Please confirm the allocation data (by EDITMODULE screen)
and compare with the actual connection.
2.Please confirm whether the cable is correctly connected.
If you cannot find the cause with the ways above, it may be the defect
of hardware.
Please investigate a defective place by the following methods.
3.Please confirm the specification of the cable referring to FANUC I/O
UnitMODEL B connecting manuals(B62163E).
4.Exchange the interface module of I/O Unit, the cable and the PMC
board, etc. one by one and, confirm whether this error occurs again.
The communication may fail by the noise etc. when this error still
occurs after replacing all DI/DO units.
Please investigate the cause of noise.
STATUS LED (green) are LED1, LED2 on PMCNB.

j : Off
J : On
1567
lL : Blinking
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.5
SYSTEM ALARM
MESSAGES
(PMCSB5/SB6/NB6)
Message
PC0nn CPU INTERRUPT xxxxxxxx

CPU error
nn
:Exception code
xxxxxxxx :Address at which an error occurred
PC004 CPU ERR

PC006 CPU ERR
PC009 CPU ERR
PC010 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
A CPU error occurred on the PMC.

xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy represent an internal error code.
This error may be caused by a main board failure.
(solution)
Replace the main board, then check if this error occurs again. If this error
still occurs, contact FANUC with the error status information (system configuration, operation, error occurrence timing, error occurrence frequency, and so forth).
PC030 RAM PARITY
aa:bb
A RAM parity error occurred on the PMC.

aa and bb represent an internal error code.
(solution)
Replace the main board, then check if this error occurs again. If this error
still occurs, contact FANUC with the error status information (system configuration, operation, error occurrence timing, error occurrence frequency, and so forth) and the internal error code above.
PC040 NMI BOC
xxxxxxxx
A nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) occurred in the PMC control module.

xxxxxxxx :Address at which an error occurred
PC050 NMI SLC (CHn) a0:d0 a1:d1

or
PC050 I/O Link (CHn) a0:d0 a1:d1
A communication error occurred on the I/O Link channel n.

a0 and d0 represent an internal error code for the I/O Link channel 1.
a1 and d1 represent an internal error code for the I/O Link channel 2.
This error may occur as a result of one of the followings:
(1) When I/O Unit A is used, an I/O assignment is made for base expansion, but no base is connected.
(2) Cables are not connected correctly.
(3) Cables are faulty.
(4) I/O devices (I/O Unit, Power Mate, and so forth) are faulty.
(5) Power failure of Master or Slave device on I/O Link
(6) Short circuit of DO terminal on I/O device
(7) The main board is faulty.
(solution)
(1) Check if the I/O assignment data matches the actual connections of
the I/O devices.
(2) Check if the cables are connected correctly.
(3) Check the cable specifications by referring to the FANUC I/O Unit
MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual (B61813E) or
FANUC I/O UnitMODEL B Connection Manual (B62163E).
(4) Replace the interface module, cables, and main board of the I/O Unit,
then check whether this error occurs again.
(5) Check the power line and stability of power for Master and Slave devices.
(6) Check the connection of DO terminal line.
If this error still occurs after replacement of all the devices related to the
I/O Link according to Action (4), the communication error may have been
caused by noise. Attempt to identify the source of the noise.
1568
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Message
PC060 FBUS
PC061 FLR
PC062 FLW
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
aa:xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

aa, xxxxxxxx, and yyyyyyyy represent an internal error code.
This error may be caused by a hardware failure.
(solution)
Contact FANUC with the error status information (system configuration,
operation, error occurrence timing, error occurrence frequency, and so
forth), the internal error code above, and the LED statuses on each
board.
PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK)
A stack error occurred with the ladder functional instruction CALL/CALLU.

(solution)
Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU instruction and
the SPE instruction. If the cause of the fault cannot be found, contact FANUC with the error status information and the ladder program.
PC080 SYS EMG

PC081 FL EMG
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
A system alarm was issued due to other software.

(solution)
Contact FANUC with the error status information (system configuration,
operation, error occurrence timing, error occurrence frequency, and so
forth), the internal error code above, and the LED statuses on each
board.
PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER)

PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM)
PC099 PARITY ERR (SRAM)
A parity error occurred on the PMC system.

(solution)
Replace the main board, then check whether this error occurs again. If
this error still occurs, contact FANUC with the error status information
(system configuration, operation, error occurrence timing, error occurrence frequency, and so forth).
1569
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
M.6
PMC SYSTEM
ALARM MESSAGES
(PMCSB7)
Alarm number
Contents
PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

1) Replace the master printed circuit A CPU error occurred in

board.
PMC.xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyyy
2) If the error recurs even after the internal error codes.
replacement, contact FANUC to
report the status (displayed
message, system configuration,
operation, when the error occurs,
occurrence frequency, etc.)
PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb
1) Replace the master printed circuit A RAM parity error occurred in the
board.
PMC.aa and bb are internal error codes.
2) If the error recurs even after the
occurrence frequency, etc.) and the
above internal error codes.
PC050 NMI SLC

aa:bb
PC050 I/O LINK(CH_) aa:bb aa:bb
PC050 IOLINK CH_ aaaa
bbbb:cccc
1) Check that the I/O allocation data

matches the actual I/O device
connection.
2) Check that the cable is connected
properly.
3) Check the cable specifications.
4) Replace the I/O device interface
module, cable, master printed circuit
board, etc.
PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

PC061 FLR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
1) Replace the master printed circuit A bus error occurred in the PMC.
board.
PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK)
Check the correspondence between A stack error occurred in Ladder

the CALL/CALLU and SPE instructions function instruction CALL/CALLU.
PC090 NMI(___) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
1) Replace the master printed circuit An NMI with an unknown cause

board.
occurred in the PMC management
2) If the error recurs even after the software.
1570
the
are
A communication error occurred in the

I/O LINK.
aa, bb and cc are internal error codes.If
this alarm is generated, probable
causes include the following:
1) Although the base expansion is
assigned when the I/O Unit A is
used, the base is not connected.
2) A cable is not connected securely.
3) Cabling is faulty.
4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate,
etc.) is faulty.
5) Power failure of Master or Slave
device on I/O Link.
6) Short circuit of DO terminal on I/O
device.
7) The motherboard is faulty.
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Alarm number
PC092 USER TRAP
aa:xxxxxxxx
Contents
1) Replace the master printed circuit The TRAP instruction, which is not used
board.
in the PMC management software, was
2) If the error recurs even after the executed.
PC093 INT(SYS) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

PC094 INT(TRAP) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC095 INT(EX) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC096 INT(IN) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
1) Replace the master printed circuit An interrupt with an unknown cause

board.
occurred in the PMC management
2) If the error recurs even after the software.
PC087 PARITY ERR (LADDER2)

PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER)
PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM)
1) Replace the master printed circuit An error occurred in a RAM check.

board.
occurrence frequency, etc.).
PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR

PATH_
1) Replace the master printed circuit The reading/writing of signals between

board.
the CNC and the PMC failed.
PC502 ILLEGAL FUNCTION (SUB xx)
Modify the sequence program so that Unsupported function instruction xx is

instruction function xx is not used.
used.
1571
N. EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE

PROGRAMS
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
EXAMPLE OF STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
The CNC is connected two or three Power Mate units.
Connection Unit.
CNC
I/O Unit
X0.0:Safety switch
Y0.0:Safety switch
Y1.0:Ready end#1
Y1.1:Drive start#1
Y2.0:Ready end#2
Y2.1:Drive start#2
Y3.0:Ready end#3
Y3.1:Drive start#3
Power Mate #1
X100.0:Ready end#1 Y100.0:Emergency#1
X100.1:Driving#1 Y100.1:Drive start#1
Power Mate #2
Power Mate #3
NOTE
The addresses indicate the single addresses, as viewed
from the CNC.
The CNC controls the Power Mate units at the following signal timing.
Ready end #1
(Power Mate to CNC)
Drive start #1
(CNC to Power Mate)
Driving #1
(Power Mate to CNC)
1572
1sec
1sec
1sec
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

PROGRAMS
The following flowchart illustrates the interface with the Power Mate
units.
CNC
Power Mate x
When the ready and signal is off,

the driving start common is not sent.
The start signal (STx) is set on.

STx
The start signal (STx) is set off
after 1 second.
STx
Start moving by the start signal and
the DEN signal (DENx) is set on for
CNC.
DENx
When the moving finishes, the NC
program is rewound and the DEN
signal (DENx) is set off.
DENx
Waiting for that the moving
finishes.
Finished
The interface with the Power Mate units is changed to the Step Sequence
program.
Step Sequence for the Power Mate

Dummy Step
Ready end
Ready
The start signal is set on.
finished
Wait for 1 second.

The start signal is set off.
Wait for that the TIMER finishes.
The moving status is set the LED.
Wait for that the moving finishes.
finished
1573

PROGRAMS
Example 1
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
The Step sequence program for three sequentially driven Power Mate
units:
Main program
L1
The input signal is set the LED.
The input signal is 1 (true).
Drive Power Mate#1
Dummy trasition
Drive Power Mate#2
Dummy trasition
Drive Power Mate#3
Dummy trasition
Start the timer.
Wait for one second.
Clear the timer.
Wait for that the timer finishes.
L1
1574
B61863E/15
Example 2

PROGRAMS
APPENDIX
The Step Sequence program for three simultaneously driven Power Mate
units:
Main program
L1
The input signal is set the LED.
The input signal is 1 (true).
Drive Power
Mate#1
Drive Power
Mate#2
Dummy trasition
Start the timer.
Wait for one second.
Clear the timer.
Wait for that the timer finishes.
L1
1575
Drive Power
Mate#3
O. STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
STEP SEQUENCE CORRESPONDED C LANGUAGE
1576
B61863E/15
B61863E/15
O.1
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
The operation is continued while the condition is true.
WHILE STATEMENT
Format
L1
condition
The condition is false.
The condition is true.

operation
Operation finished.
L1
1577

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Examples
L1
S1
(P10)
P11
P12
S2
(P20)
P21
L1
P10
P11
R9091.1
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P12
R9091.1
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P20
R9091.0
MULB
1
R10
5
R12
ADDB
1
R10
1
R10
R9091.1
R9091.0
R9091.1
P21
R9091.1
TRSET
1578
R0.0
( )
R0.0
( )
B61863E/15
O.2
DOWHILE
STATEMENT
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
The operation is continued while the condition is true after executing the
operation.
The difference between dowhile and while is that the operation is
executed at least one time.
Format
L1
operation
condition

L1
1579

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Examples
L1
S1
(P20)
P21
S2
(P10)
P11
P12
L1
P10
P11
R9091.1
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P12
R9091.1
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P20
R9091.0
MULB
1
R10
5
R12
ADDB
1
R10
1
R10
R9091.1
R9091.0
R9091.1
P21
R9091.1
TRSET
1580
R0.0
( )
R0.0
( )
B61863E/15
O.3
FOR STATEMENT
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
After the initial data is set, the operation is continued while the condition
is true.
Format
Set the initial data.
L1
operation
condition

L1
1581

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Examples
S1
(P1)
P2
L1
S2
(P20)
P21
S3
(P10)
P11
P12
L1
P1
R9091.1
NUMEB
1
0
R10
P2
R9091.1
TRSET
P20
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
1
R10
5
R12
R0.0
( )
P21
R9091.1
TRSET
P10
R9091.0
ADDB
1
R10
1
R10
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9091.1
P11
R9091.0
R9000.0
TRSET
P21
R9091.0
COMPB
R9000.0
TRSET
1582
1
30
R10
R0.0
( )
B61863E/15
O.4
IF ELSE STATEMENT
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
If the condition is true, the operation 1 is executed and if the condition is

false, the operation 2 is executed.
Format
condition
operation1
operation2
1583

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Examples
S1
(P10)
P11
P12
S2
(P20)
S3
(P22)
P21
P23
P1
0
P1
1
R9091.0
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P12
R9091.0
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P20
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
1
R10
8
R12
R0.0
( )
P21
R9091.1
TRSET
P22
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
P23
R9091.1
TRSET
1584
1
R10
10
R12
R0.0
( )
B61863E/15
O.5
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
The operation connected to the condition is executed.
SWITCH STATEMENT
Format
condition
condition1
condition2
condition3
operation1
operation2
operation3
1585

C LANGUAGE
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Examples
S1
(P10)
P11
P12
P13
S2
(P20)
S3
(P22)
S4
(P24)
P21
P23
P25
P1
0
P1
1
R9091.1
COMPB
1
30
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P12
R9091.0
COMPB
1
40
R10
R9000.0
TRSET
P13
R9091.1
TRSET
P20
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
1
R10
5
R12
R0.0
( )
P21
R9091.1
TRSET
P22
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
1586
1
R10
10
R12
R0.0
( )
B61863E/15
APPENDIX

C LANGUAGE
P23
R9091.1
TRSET
P24
R9091.0
MULB
R9091.1
P25
R9091.1
TRSET
1587
1
R10
15
R12
R0.0
( )
P. CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA

APPENDIX
CODE, AND SPECIAL CODE LIST
P
Pronun
ciation
JIS
B61863E/15
CHINESE CHARACTER CODE, HIRAGANA CODE, AND

SPECIAL CODE LIST
Shift
JIS
Segment and point

0
hThe characters with mark h cannot be displayed on FANUC Series 16/18MODEL A.
1588
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Pronun
ciation
JIS
Shift
JIS

Segment and point

0
shows the character which is impossible to display.
1589

APPENDIX
Pronun
ciation
JIS
Shift
JIS
B61863E/15
Segment and point

0
1590
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Pronun
ciation
JIS
Shift
JIS

Segment and point

0
1591

APPENDIX
Pronun
ciation
JIS
Shift
JIS
B61863E/15
Segment and point

0
93BE
1592
APPENDIX
B61863E/15
Pronun
ciation
JIS
Shift
JIS

Segment and point

0
1593
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 834 / Volume 2 : Page 835 and later
About connection log of Ethernet, 616, 963
Block step, 997
About the FS15i PMCNB6 programmer, 510
Brief screen, 887
About the FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7 programmer, 510

ADD (addition), 249
ADDB (binary addition), 251
C input/output, 568
Addition of system keep relays, 838, 841
CALL (conditional subprogram call), 341
Additions to sequence programs, 1113
Calling screen, 893
Address, 61
CALLU (unconditional subprogram call), 342
Address change, 770

Address change of sequence program, 544
Caution screen of the setting parameter for the selectable I/O link
assignment function, 848
Address of counter (C), 110
Cautions for subroutines, 389
Address of data table (D), 114
Chinese character code, Hiragana code, and special code list, 1588
Clearing the PMC parameter, 557
Address of keep relay and nonvolatile memory control (K), 112
Clearing the sequence program, 424, 556
Addresses, 374
Addresses between PMC and CNC (PMCNC), 79
Clearing the sequence program and condensation of the sequence

program, 556
Addresses between PMC and machine tool, 80
CNC Offline Programmer, 1522
Addresses between PMC and machine tool (PMCMT), 80
COD (code conversion), 199
Addresses for message selection displayed on CRT (A), 108
CODB (binary code conversion), 202

Coding (step 5), 39
Addresses, signal names, comments, and line numbers, 374
COIN (coincidence check), 230
Alarm message (PMCPA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/

SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6), 1553
Collation of program, 1105
Alarm message (PMCSB7), 1560
Collation of source programs, 1105
Alarm message and countermeasure, 818, 828, 898, 919
Collective monitor function, 765
Alarm message list, 1552
Collective monitor function (PMCSB7), 892

Collective monitor screen, 1044
Alarm screen (ALARM), 440, 651
COM (common line control), 207
ALLOW PMC STOP (PMCSB7: K902.2, PMCSA1: K19.2), 855
COME (common line Control end), 213

Alter, 1085
Comments, 375
Alteration of sequence programs, 536
Communication Status, 615
AND, 128
Communication status, 961
AND (logical AND), 320
COMP (comparison), 226
AND. NOT, 128
Comparison with the function of FS15B (PMCNB/NB2), 662
AND. STK, 131
Compatibility of ladder diagram, 1031
Applicable FANUC ladder editions, 1515
Compatibility of PMC between Series 15iMODEL A and B, 1551
Applications, 382
Compatibility of PMCs for Series 16i/18i/21iMODEL A and B,

1533
Arbitrary functional instructions, 305
Compatibility with CNC basic software, 1508
Area managed by the system program, 103
Compatibility with Series 21MODEL B, 1550
Assignment of builtin I/O card, 100
Compatible with Series 0, 1546
Assignment of I/O module addresses, 82
COMPB (comparison between binary data), 228
Automatic operation when the power is turned on, 424
Component units, 512, 1059, 1510
Automatic start of trace setting, 936
Component units and connections, 511, 1058, 1509
Automatic tracing function at power on, 443
Compress the sequence program, 557
AXCTL (axis control by PMC), 348
Compressed input by [COMAND] key, 1122

Condense, 1512
i1
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Condense command release of deleted area, 1133
Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and NB (4048 series), 1528
Configuration and operation of stepsequence programs, 988
Data transfer between NB/NB2 (4048 series) and FANUC LADDER,

1527
Configuration of command, 1130
DCNV (data conversion), 222
Confirming the ladder mnemonics, 627
DCNVB (extended data conversion), 224
Connecting component units, 517
Debugging, 597
Connecting the I/O card, 1501
DEC (decode), 177
Connecting the I/O unit, 1501
DECB (binary decoding), 179
Connecting the operators panel for FS 0 with FS16, FS18, FS21, or

Power Mate, 1497
Delete, 1089
Connection, 1501
Delete of sequence program, 539
Connection of components, 1511
Delete of symbol data and comment, 550
Connections of units, 1060
Deleting a sequence program, 1116
Constitution, 771
Deleting title data, 528
Continuous data entry, 685
Deletion of a tool management data (*lowspeed response), 1354

Deletion of programs, 1106
Convergence of selective sequence, 993
Descriptions of displayed items, 593
Convergence of simultaneous sequence, 995
Detail screen, 885
Conversion, 1495
Details of basic instructions, 122
Copy a ladder program [CPYLAD], 587
DIFD (falling edge detection), 317
Copy I/O module data [CPYMDL], 588
Difference of status of signals between 1st level and 2nd level, 54
Copy message data [CPYMSG], 587
DIFU (rising edge detection), 316
Copy symbol data and comment data [CPYSYM], 587
Direct editing by ladder diagram, 1108
Copy the sequence programs [CPYALL], 588

Copy title data [CPYTTL], 587
DISP (message display) (PMCSB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/

SC3/SC4 Only), 268
Copying a sequence program, 1119
DISPB, 282
Copying message data (COPY), 555
Display format for parameters, 879
Copying the sequence program, 542
Display of ladder diagram, 1091
Corresponding function, 1030
Display of signal status (STATUS), 439
Counter screen (COUNTR), 476, 686
Display PMC input/output signals and internal relay (PMCDGN),

647
Creating a program, 387
Displayed items, 596
Creation of interface specifications (steps 1 to 3), 38

Creation of ladder diagram (step 4), 38
Displaying and setting the configuration status of I/O devices

(IOCHK), 454
Cross reference display, 558
Displaying input code (DSPMOD), 555
CTR (counter), 182
Displaying of sequence program, 1015, 1034
CTRB (fixed counter), 188
Displaying run status, 1045
CTRC (counter), 190
Displaying the contents of memory (M.SRCH), 444

Displaying the GDT (global descriptor table), 591
Displaying the memory allocation information of a user program
Coded in C., 594
Displaying the running state of a user task (USRDGN), 452
Data display and setting (title, symbol, ladder program, comment,

message, I/O module), 1078
Displaying title data, 437
Data input to and output from other devices, 581
Distribution I/O connection I/O module and distribution I/O operators panel I/O module assignment methods, 94
Data keys and screen scroll key, 1066
DIV (division), 261
Data number, data attribute, data length, data area, 1487
DIVB (binary division), 263
Data table (DATA), 482, 689
Divergence of selective sequence, 993
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMCSB7: K900.7, PMCSA1:

K17.7), 856
Divergence of simultaneous sequence, 994

Dividing display of ladder diagram, 501
Data transfer between NB (4047 series) and FANUC LADDER,

1527
Dowhile statement, 1579
i2
B61863E/15
Index
Note
DSCH (data search), 234
Examples of structured programming, 381
DSCHB (binary data search), 237
Exclusive control for functional instructions, 1011
DUMP display on ladder diagram, 493
Execution method, 386

Execution of a sequence program, 563
Execution of step sequence, 984
Execution of Trace, 659

Execution of trace, 932
EDIT ENABLE (PMCSB7: K901.6, PMCSA1: K18.6), 852
Execution procedure of sequence program, 43
Editing a character string in message data, 554
Execution time, 407
Editing character strings of symbol data and comment data, 551
EXIN (external data input), 293
Editing character strings of title data, 529
Expansion of symbol size, 841
Editing end, 1092
Extended ladder instructions, 999
Editing for Power MateMODEL D (PMCPA1/PA3), 1507

Editing function of ladder diagram, 1025, 1052
Editing ladder mnemonics, 626
Editing of sequence program (EDIT), 527

Editing symbol data and comment at once, 544
F keys (F1 to F0), 1064
Editing the sequence program (EDIT), 625
FANUC LADDER (system P series), 1518
Editor screen of message data, 822
FANUC LADDER system floppy loading, 1073
Editor screen of symbol/comment data, 811
FANUC LADDER, FANUC LADDERII, FANUC LADERIII,

ladder editing packages, 1516
Editor screen of system parameter, 832
FDLIST command file attribute display, 1131
Emergency stop signal (*ESP), 1502
File editing function, 1126
Enabling automatic debugging at poweron, 601
Floppy list screen, 795
END (end of a ladder program), 340

End of block step, 998
For MDI Units other than Standard MDI Units (for FS20 PMCSA1
and SA3), 424
END1 (1st level sequence program end), 167
For statement, 1581
END2 (2nd level sequence program end), 168
For the FS15 (PMCNB), 505
END3 (end of 3rd level sequence) (PMCSC/SC3/SC4/NB/

NB2/NB6/NB7 only), 169
For the FS16 (PMCSC, PMCSC3, or PMCSC4), 505
Ending edit of a sequence program, 1122
Forced input/output screen, 679
Ending ladder mnemonics editing, 630
Forcibly stopping the sequence program, 565
Entering data on the program check screen (*lowspeed response)

(not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1229
Format and details of the control data of the WINDR functional

instruction, 1375
Entering title data, 528
Format and details of the control data of the WINDW functional

instruction, 1428
Forced input/output function, 461, 674
Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor (*lowspeed
response), 1233
Formats and details of control data, 1147
Entry screen of message data, 825
FS15i PMCNB6 operating procedure, 425
Entry screen of symbol/comment, 814
FS16iLA assignment, 93
EOR (exclusive OR), 318
FS16i/18i/21iB PMCSA1/SB7 operating procedure, 425
Error codes list (for FANUC Ladder PG), 1139
Function, 385, 1143, 1369, 1451, 1495
Error details, 634
Function for displaying signal waveforms (ANALYS), 446
Error list, 638
Function for storing data in memory, 445
Error messages (for EDIT), 618
Function of copying symbol and comment data, 552
Error messages (for I/O), 620
Functional instruction data table editor screen, 915
Error messages (for ladder mnemonics editing), 632
Functional instruction data table viewer screen, 882
Error messages ansd solutions, 773
Functional instruction list screen, 914
Example, 945
Functional instruction TRSET, 1000
Example for setting parameters, 858
Functional instruction WINDR, 1371
Example of step sequence programs, 1572
Functional instruction WINDW, 1373
i3
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Functional instructions, 135
Input/output method to office programmer (PG Mate/Mark II)

(fixed 9600bit/sec.), 635
Functions for displaying memory areas and debugging the program

(MONIT), 589
Input/output of ladder program with PG and floppy cassette/FA

card, 1123
Functions of processing, 1056
Inputting a multibyte character (D.CHAR), 555

Insert, 1088
Insert of sequence program, 536
General rules, 1005
Internal relay addresses (R), 101
Graphical symbols, 971
Interrupt enable/disable/clear, 407
Interlocking, 56
Interrupt processing, 405

Interrupt program, 405
Interrupttype PMC function, 402

IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1), 856
Help screen, 1092

HIDE PMC PARAM (PMCSB7: K902.6, PMCSA1: K19.6), 853
HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMCSB7: K900.0, PMCSA1: K17.0),
852
Hierarchy of monitor, 1035
JMP (jump), 214
How to pick up a ladder diagram net, 768
JMP Instructions with Label Specification, 391
How to set at NC parameter, 610
JMPB (label jump), 345
How to set at NC parameter (Power MateD/H), 611
JMPC (label jump), 346
How to set at PMC screen, 609, 955
JMPE (jump end), 219

Jump, 996
I/O error messages, 585

I/O Link connecting check screen, 456
Keep relay (KEEPRL), 476
I/O link connecting check screen, 952
Keep relay screen (KEEPRL), 687
I/O Link connection unit assignment, 89
Keep relays used in the system, 860
I/O LinkII parameter setting screen, 458
Key switch signals (Xn, Xn+2), 1502
I/O screen, 779
Keyboard of system P series, 1063
I/O screen error messages (PMCNB6), 801

I/O signals to CNC, 53
I/O unit address setting (MODULE), 546

I/O Unit MODEL B assignment, 91
Label, 996
If else statement, 1583
Label addresses (JMPB, JMPC, LBL) (L), 118
Implementation techniques, 381
Ladder debugging function, 602
Infinite number of relay contacts, 378
Ladder diagram display, 492
Initial block step, 998
Ladder diagram editor function (PMCSB7), 899
Initial step, 991
LADDER diagram editor screen, 720
Input of program, 1093
Ladder diagram format, 373, 377
Input PMC parameters from MDI panel, 474
LADDER diagram monitor (PMCSB7), 864
Input signal processing, 52
Ladder diagram monitor and editor, 697

LADDER diagram monitor screen, 700, 866
Input with a katakana identification code, 555
Ladder diagram monitor screen, 1044
Input/outpupt signal processing, 406
Ladder password function, 426
Input/output ladder/PMCparameter by DPL/MDI, 635
Ladder screen, 1018, 1028
Input/output method to FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE (fixed

4800bit/sec.), 635
Lader diagram editor screen, 900
i4
B61863E/15
Index
Note
LBL (label), 347
MOVOR (data transfer after logical sum), 206
Level up of input/output function with memory card, 1520
MOVW (transfer of 2 bytes), 313
Limitations in SYSTEM P Mate, 1108
MUL (multiplication), 257
Limitations with the SYSTEM P Mate, 1072
MULB (binary multiplication), 259
Limited function, 1551
Multilanguage alarm/operator message display function setting

screen, 847
Line numbers, 375
Multiple data input, 474
List of window functions, 1144

LOAD key (system program loading key), 1064
Loading of floppy, 1072

Loading the standard ladder (for Power MateD/F PMCPA1 and
PA3), 425
NB/NB2 data compatibility, 1527
Location search, 1089
Net editor screen, 907
Lowspeed response and highspeed response of window function,

1143, 1370
Newregister of a tool management data (*lowspeed response),

1344
Nonvolatile memory, 364
NOP (no operation), 362
NOT (logical NOT), 324
Memory card list screen, 786
Note on programming, 925
Menu screen of miscellaneous data in sequence program, 807
Notes, 949
Message data input, 554
Notes on input/output signals over a network, 55
Message data setting (MESSAGE), 553
Notes on using an MDI keyboard without cursor keys (when using

the FS20 PMCMODEL SA1/SA3), 584
Method for entering PMC parameters, 684
NUME (definition of constant), 265
Migration from the PMCNB/NB2 to the PMCNB6, 1532
NUMEB (definition of binary constants), 266
Migration from the PMCSA5/SB5/SB6 to the PMCSB7, 1533

Migration from the Series 0 and Series 21B to Series 0iA, 1546
Migration of ladder programs between different models, 1529

Migration of ladder programs from Power MateD/H to Power Mate
iD/H, 1530
Offline Programmer CNC, 1524
Miscellaneous data in sequence program, 806
Online debugging function (only for Power MateD/H and Power

Mate iD/H), 636
Miscellaneous item, 379
Online edit, 503
MMC3 R (MMCIII window data read), 326
Online function, 607, 953
MMC3W (MMCIII window data write), 329
Online function by Ethernet, 957
MMCWR (reading MMC window data) (other than PMCPA1/PA3),

308
Online function by ethernet, 612
MMCWW (writing MMC window data) (other than PMCPA1/PA3),

310
Online setting screen, 608, 954
Modification procedure, 1496
Operation (PMCSB7), 1033
Modifying the converted sequence program, 1496
Operation after execution of trace, 660, 933
Modifying the ladder mnemonics, 628
Operations, 571, 869, 883, 888
Modifying the values of signals by forced input/output, 469
Operations to enable the forced I/O function, 678
Monitor time screen, 1023
OR, 128
Monitoring elapsed time, 1022
OR (logical OR), 322
MOVB (transfer of 1 byte), 312
OR. NOT, 128
MOVD (transfer of 4 bytes), 315
OR. STK, 131
MOVE (logical product transfer), 204
Other setting screens, 487
Moving a sequence program, 1120
Other window functions, 1493
Moving the sequence program, 543
Outline, 942
MOVN (transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes), 314
Outline of leveled up contents, 1521
Operation, 441, 444, 446, 558, 591, 594, 597, 1069, 1522
i5
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Output of program, 1098
Program input, 1123
Output of result of trace, 937
Program list editor screen, 760, 916
Output signal processing, 52
Program list viewer screen, 753, 885, 1036
Outputting to and inputting from flash ROM, 788
Program output, 1124
Outputting to and inputting from floppy, 791
PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMCSB7: K900.1, PMCSA1:

K17.1), 851
Outputting to and inputting from memory cards, 782
Programmer menu screen, 1074
Outputting to and inputting from other input/output devices, 796
Programmer protection function, 850
Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and program protect key signal

(KEY), 1502
Programming, 972
Programming from keyboard, 1084
PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMCSB7: K902.7, PMCSA1: K19.7),
854
Protection of each function of I/O screen, 856
Paper command, 1101
PSGN2 (position signal output 2), 358
Parameter, 1511
PSGNL (position signal output), 354
Parameter display on ladder diagram, 494

Parameter menu (PMCSB7), 1505
Parameter screen, 447, 598

Parameter setting and display, 1075
R keys (R0 to R3), 1065
Parameter setting screen, 441, 559
RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMCSB7: K900.4, PMCSA1: K17.4),

856
PARI (parity check), 220
RD, 124
Password and switching screen, 776
RD. NOT, 125
Password protection, 774
RD. NOT. STK, 130
PMC address (S ADDRESS), 1001
RD. STK, 129
PMC basic instructions, 120

PMC basic manu, 643
Reading a character string of the CNC program being executed in the

buffer, 1241
PMC data setting and display (PMCPRM), 683
Reading a custom macro variable (*lowspeed response), 1166
PMC data table, 368
Reading a custom macro variable (lowspeed response), 1379
PMC I/O signal display and internal relay display (PMCDGN), 436
Reading a parameter (*lowspeed response), 1158
PMC ladder diagram display (PMCLAD), 491
Reading a parameter (not available for Power MateD/F, Series

21TA), 1238
PMC menu selection procedure by softkey, 430
Reading a parameter (setting data) (lowspeed response), 1378
PMC operation for loader control function, 429
Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of

controlled axes, 1186
PMC parameter format, 1540

PMC parameters setting and display (PMCPRM), 472
Reading a skip position (stop position of skip operation (G31)) of

controlled axes (lowspeed response), 1386
PMC programmer (CRT/MDI or PDP/MDI) [ladder editing function],

1509
Reading a tool management data (*lowspeed response), 1356
PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) (only for the Power MateD/F/H),

621
Reading a tool offset, 1150

Reading a tool offset (lowspeed response), 1375
PMC screen transition and related soft keys, 645
Reading a workpiece origin offset value, 1377
PMC system alarm messages (PMCSB7), 1570

Port setting screen, 799
Reading a workpiece origin offset value (not supported by the Power

MateD or F), 1154
Power Mate assignment, 92
Reading A/D conversion data, 1199
Preparation before operation, 1072
Reading A/D conversion data for the feed motor, 1395
Priority of execution (1st level, 2nd level and 3rd level), 45
Reading actual spindle speeds, 1301
Procedure, 1505
Reading an estimate disturbance torque data, 1410
Processing I/O signals, 51
Reading and writing of nonvolatile memory data, 367
Program collation, 1125
Reading and writing the laser command data and laser setting data,
1456
Program configuration list (main screen), 1015, 1025
Reading clock data (date and time) (not available for Power MateF),
1231
Program editing, 1078
i6
B61863E/15
Index
Note
Reading clock data (lowspeed response), 1407
Reading the relative position on a controlled axis, 1243, 1408
Reading CNC status information, 1247
Reading the remaining travel, 1245, 1409
Reading CNC system information, 1148
Reading the servo data of control axes, 1337
Reading detailed alarm information (*lowspeed type), 1333
Reading the servo delay for controlled axes, 1188, 1387
Reading diagnosis data (*lowspeed response), 1197
Reading the tool life management data (number of tool groups)

(lowspeed response), 1398
Reading diagnosis data (lowspeed response), 1394
Reading the tool life management data (tool group number) (low
speed response), 1397
Reading diagnosis data (not available for Power MateD/F, Series

21TA), 1240
Reading the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (not
available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1253
Reading fine torque sensing data (statistical calculation results), 1305

Reading fine torque sensing data (store data), 1307
Reading the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
1413
Reading load information of the spindle motor (serial interface),

1235
Reading the wire diameter offset, 1460
Reading machining distances, 1480
Reading tool lefe management data (cutter compensation number 1)

(lowspeed type), 1416
Reading modal data, 1192
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (1):

tool No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1217
Reading modal data (lowspeed response), 1388
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No. (2):

tool order No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA),
1219
Reading model data, 1476

Reading of the comment, 1455
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.1) (low

Reading of tool setting data, 1485

Reading real parameters (lowspeed type), 1418
Reading tool life management data (cutter compensation No.2) (low

Reading set data (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA),
1239
Reading tool life management data (number of tool groups) (not

Reading setting data, 1471
Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (lowspeed

response), 1398
Reading setting data (*lowspeed response), 1162

Reading signals automatically at power on, 451
Reading tool life management data (number of tools) (not available

for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1207
Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled

axes, 1182
Reading the absolute position on a controlled axis, 1383
Reading tool life management data (tool diameter offset number 1)

Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on controlled axes,

1190, 1387
Reading tool life management data (tool group No.) (not available
Reading the actual spindle speed, 1227
Reading tool life management data (tool group number) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1283
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes, 1180
Reading tool life management data (tool group numbers) (lowspeed

type), 1414
Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes (lowspeed response),

1383
Reading tool life management data (tool information (1) : tool No.)
Reading the CNC alarm status, 1171, 1475
Reading tool life management data (tool information (2): tool order
No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1223
Reading the CNC alarm status (lowspeed response), 1380

Reading the current program number, 1176
Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (lowspeed

response), 1405
Reading the current program number (8digit program numbers)


type), 1417
Reading the current program number (lowspeed response), 1381
Reading tool life management data (tool information 1) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1289
Reading the current screen number, 1330

Reading the current sequence number, 1178

response), 1406
Reading the current sequence number (lowspeed response, 1382
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.

(1): tool No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA),
1213
Reading the estimate disturbance torque data, 1277

Reading the load current (A/D conversion data) for the spindle motor, 1412
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.

(2): tool order No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series
21TA), 1215
Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled

axes, 1184, 1385
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation No.1)

(lowspeed response), 1401
Reading the machining time (lowspeed response), 1411

Reading the measured point, 1481
Reading tool life management data (tool length compensation number 1) (lowspeed type), 1415
Reading the parameter (*lowspeed response), 1464
i7
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Reading tool life management data (tool length offset number 1) (not
Search of empty pot (*lowspeed response), 1342

Search of sequence program, 540
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter type) (low
Search of specified relay coil points in ladder diagram, 498
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (lowspeed

response), 1399
Search of tool management data (*lowspeed response), 1364
Reading tool life management data (tool life counter) (not available
Searching for an address (SRCH), 554
Searching a sequence program, 1117
Selectable I/O link assignment function (PMCSB7), 941
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (lowspeed response),

1399
Selecting the PMC programmer menu, 623
Reading tool life management data (tool life) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1209
Selection of program menu by soft keys, 1108
Reading tool life management data (tool No.) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1225
Sequence program, 42
Selection of programmer menus by softkeys, 518
Sequence program check and write into ROM (steps 8 to 11), 40
Reading tool life management data (tool number) (lowspeed response), 1406
Sequence program copy function, 587
Reading tool setting data by specifying tool number, 1491
Sequence program creating procedure, 3
Reading value of the Pcode macro variable (*lowspeed response),

1249
Sequence program entry (steps 6, 7), 40

Sequence program examples, 411
Registering the tool life management data (tool group) (*lowspeed

response) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1255
Sequence program generation (LADDER), 531
Remove command file copy, 1134
Sequence program input, 532, 1110
Rename command file attribute change, 1132
Sequence program memory capacity, 59
Repetitive operation, 44
Sequence program processing time, 57
Respomse time, 406
Sequence program structuring, 49, 380
Restrictions, 396, 588
SET, 131
ROM format program, 1095, 1102, 1105
Set items, 569
ROT (rotation control), 193
Setting, 404
ROTB (binary rotation control), 196
Setting and display screen, 475
RST, 133
Setting and displaying system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), 624

Setting function, 842
Setting I/O commands, 1123
Setting menu (SETING), 691
Scratch command deletion of files, 1133
Setting of Ethernet parameters, 612, 957
Screen configuration, 894, 901, 907
Setting of I/O device, 1067
Screen display, 466
Setting of online connection, 608, 955

Setting of online connection by NC parameter, 956
Screen for displaying general settings (GENERAL), 692
Setting of sampling address, 930
Screen for displaying setting data related to C language function, 696
Setting of Trace Parameter, 653
Screen for displaying the setting data related to editing and debugging, 693
Setting of trace parameter, 928
Screen for displaying traced data, 601
Setting parameter screen for the selectable I/O link assignment function, 849
Screen for setting/displaying online monitor parameters (ONLINE),

694
SETTING screen, 484
Screen of ladder debugging function, 602
Setting Screen, 890
Screen operation (PMCSB4/SB6/SC4/NB2), 1014
Setting screen, 905, 918
Screen operation for FS16i/18i/21i/0iB PMCSA1/SB7, 837
Setting screen of general function, 844
Screen operation for PMCSA1, 838
Setting the screen, 873
Screen operation for PMCSB7, 839
Setting the transfer speed ([SPEED] soft key), 582
Screen operations, 895, 902, 908, 917
Setting/clearing OVERRIDE, 470
Screen Structure, 867
Setting/operation for enabling forced input/output, 465
Screen Structures, 883
SFT (shift register), 232
i8
B61863E/15
Index
Note
Shift of tool management data (*lowspeed response), 1366
Storage to a memory card, 575
Signal address conversion (from the PMCMODEL L/M to the

PMCMODEL SB/SC), 1494
Storage to Flash ROM, 573
Signal diagnosis screen, 450
Storing the sequence program into FLASH ROM (I/O) (only for the
Power MateH and Power Mate iD/H), 633
Signal names, 375
Structure of software key in PMC, 838, 840
Signal status display (STATUS), 650
Structure of valid net, 913
Signal trace function (PMCSB7), 926
SUB (subtraction), 253
Signal trace screen (initial screen), 927
SUBB (binary subtraction), 255
Signals for connecting the operators panel, 1502
Subprogram list viewer screen, 1041

Subprogram numbers (CALL, CALLU, SP) (P), 119
Soft key menu of ladder debugging function, 603
Subprogramming and nesting, 385
Soft keybased PMC menu selection procedure, 642
Substitution of sequence programs, 1113
Source program, 1093, 1098
Summary of specification of ladder program, 29
SP (subprogram), 343
Switch statement, 1585
SPCNT (spindle control), 332
Switching screens for setting parameters, 843
SPE (end of a subprogram), 344
Symbol and comment display, 497
Special uses of the R3 key, 1107
Symbol data and comment input, 550
Specification, 1004
Symbol data display, 1121
Specification and display of system parameters (SYSPRM), 1512
Symbol data search (SRCH), 550
Specification of PMCs, 5
Symbol data setting (SYMBOL), 549
Specification of step sequence, 1003
Symbols used in the ladder diagram, 376
Specifications, 384, 392, 446, 597

Specifications of password, 775
System alarm messages (C language function for PMCNB/

NB2/NB6), 1567
Specifying addresses, 1505
System alarm messages (PMCSB5/SB6/NB6), 1568

System alarm messages (PMCSC), 1565
Specifying and displaying system parameters (SYSPRM), 520
System diagram of soft key, 1514
Specifying and displaying title data (TITLE), 528
System floppy, 1072
Specifying the number of the program for I/O Link, 1315
System parameter (PMCSB7), 950
Start and stop of a sequence program, 564

Starting and stopping sequence programs, 805
Starting and stopping the online debugging function, 636
Starting and stopping the sequence program (RUN/STOP), 631
Terminology, 975
Starting ladder mnemonics editing, 626
The operation, 771
Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet

connection), 613
The value of functional instruction parameter, 495
Starting or stopping the trace function, 442
Time monitor, 1049
Starting the sequence program, 565
Time monitor function, 1049
Step, 989
Time monitor setting screen, 1050
Step operation [STEP], 604
Time screen, 1021
Step sequence basics, 974
Timer addresses (T), 116
Step sequence corresponded C language, 1576
Timer screen, 1021

Timer screen (TIMER), 475, 685
Step sequence method, 968
Timer set time address, 175
Step sequence monitor screen, 1037

Step sequence screen, 1016, 1026
Timer, counter, keep relay, nonvolatile memory control, data table,

365
Step sequence state screen (subprogram), 1047
Title data display (TITLE), 648
Step sequence state screen (whole), 1045
Title data editor screen, 649
Stop function of break with condition [BRKCTL], 605
TMR (timer), 170
Stop of ladder diagram display by trigger of signal, 499
TMRB (fixed timer), 172
Storage and control of sequence program (steps 12 to 14), 41
TMRC (timer), 174
i9
Index
B61863E/15
Note
Trace function (TRACE), 441
Writing of tool setting data (*lowspeed response), 1489
Trace screen, 443, 652
Writing real parameters (lowspeed type), 1448
Transfer between data area and nonvolatile memory, 1451
Writing setting data (*lowspeed response), 1164
Transfer to and from a FANUC FD Cassette, 571
Writing setting data (lowspeed type), 1472
Transfer to and from a FANUC LADDER, 571
Writing the feedrate, 1443
Transfer to and from a ROM WRITER, 583
Writing the measured point (*lowspeed response), 1483
Transition, 992
Writing the parameter (*lowspeed response), 1466

Writing the superposition move command, 1441
Writing the tool life management data (cutter compensation number
(1) : tool number) (*lowspeed response) (not available for Power
MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1267

(2) : tool operation sequence number) (*lowspeed response) (not
User PMC Screen (PMCMDI), 504

1), 1437

2), 1437
Viewe/editor screen of message data, 819
Viewer screen of symbol/comment data, 809
Writing the tool life management data (tool condition (1) : tool number) (*lowspeed response) (not available for Power MateD/F,
Series 21TA), 1271
Viewer screen of system parameter, 830
Writing the tool life management data (tool group number), 1434
Viewer/editor of symbol/comment data, 809
Writing the tool life management data (tool information 1), 1438
Viewer/editor of system parameter, 830
Writing the tool life management data (tool information 2), 1438
Viewer screen of message data, 819
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation

number 1), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length compensation
number 2), 1436
Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (1) :
tool number) (*lowspeed response) (not available for Power
What is a sequence program?, 36

While statement, 1577
Window function description (FS16/16iLA/16iLB), 1449
Writing the tool life management data (tool length offset number (2) :
tool operation sequence number) (*lowspeed response) (not
Window function description (FS16/16i/0iP), 1484
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type), 1435
Window function description (PMCNB/NB2/NB6), 1368
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter type) (*low
speed response) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series
21TA), 1261
Window function description (FS16W), 1459
Window function description (PMCPA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/

SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4),1142
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter), 1435
WINDR (reading CNC window data), 299
Writing the tool life management data (tool life counter) (*low
speed response) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series
21TA), 1259
WINDW (writing CNC window data), 302

Writing (registering) tool life management data (tool group number)
(*lowspeed response) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series
21TA), 1291
Writing the tool life management data (tool life), 1434
Writing a custom macro variable, 1431
Writing the tool life management data (tool life) (*lowspeed response) (not available for Power MateD/F, Series 21TA), 1257
Writing a custom macro variable (*lowspeed response), 1169
Writing the tool life management data (tool number), 1439
Writing a data on the program check screen, 1432
Writing the tool life management data (tool number) (*lowspeed

Writing a parameter (*lowspeed response), 1160
Writing the tool management data (tool condition (2) : tool operation
sequence number) (*lowspeed response) (not available for Power
Writing a parameter (setting data), 1430

Writing a tool management data (*lowspeed response), 1349
Writing a tool offset (*Lowspeed response), 1152
Writing the tool offset data according to the specified tool number,
1440
Writing a tool offset data, 1429
Writing the torque limit override, 1433
Writing a workpiece origin offset value (*lowspeed response) (not

supported by the Power MateD or F), 1156
Writing the wire diameter offset (*lowspeed response), 1462

Writing tool life management data (cutter compemsation number 1),
1446
Writing each tool data (*lowspeed response), 1360
i10
B61863E/15
Index
Note
Writing tool life management data (tool group numbers), 1444
Writing, reading, and comparing sequence programs and PMC parameters, 778
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1), 1447
Writing, reading, and verifying the sequence program and PMC

parameter data, 566
Writing tool life management data (tool information 1) (*lowspeed

WRT, 126
Writing tool life management data (tool length compensation number

1), 1445
WRT. NOT, 127
Writing tool life management data (tool length offset number 1)

21TA), 1294
Writing tool life management data (tool radius offset number 1)

21TA), 1296
XMOV (indexed data transfer), 239

XMOVB (binary index modifier data transfer), 242
Writing value of the Pcode macro variable (*lowspeed response),

1251
i11

()*+!
/
()*+
-()*+
,
()*+
()*+
/1)*+
85()*+
/
()*+
85()*+
-()*+'
/-
'+
'&
'!
'
'
'
'
'
'
-

--
./(
33,/5/

(
-0.
-0. (
-0.
-0-203345 ,,6(
7408 -
,-" . $
7408 -
,-" .7$
7408 -
,-" $
8,,39-/
1 6,3//- 0

5
/995

,-&.

-0.

,- &.
-

/-
()*+&
/
()*++
--
-04
/-
-0.
-03/
,3/1-508 -0
.
- 0 6,/ 0 % < ,- 0

&
/1)''' - 0 44 08 - "-3 30 9//59-
08 -/0
-2$

-0

;83()'' -0.!

! "
# $% & & &#&
%% $!!'($
!$))$ &!%!$*&$$
(

&))(&($)
$
$!!($
%! )+#& !$(! $$'%$

,
!-./01234
!5./5036 $

,
!-./0123-4
!5./503-6 7$78#7
!7/$$ $)+!&!$%'$!+!$
$
(
( & & # $!&) # $

$ ,
!-6 8!%9
$978
%:8
;
:)''
:,<) 6!78$=

,<) 6

%,<) 6>
%
,<) 6%
%
,<) 6
%
,<) 6>$78%,<)
6!78
%,<)
6!8
%,<)
6:=
!55?25
%$)

#
)+ #

$>$$!5
%$)%$>$$
!5
%$)%
! " # #$
# %# " & $
'
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs
are subject to change without
notice.

61863pmcev4 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

61863pmcev4 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

61863pmcev4 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Copyright 2005 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This programming manual describes the method of generating

This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

FANUC PMCMODEL PA3

FANUC Power MateMODEL D/F/H

FANUC PMCMODEL SA1

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RA1)

FANUC Series 18MODEL A/B

FANUC Series 20MODEL A

FANUC PMCMODEL SA2

FANUC Series 18MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RA2)

FANUC PMCMODEL SA3

FANUC Series 18MODEL A

FANUC Series 20MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RA3)

FANUC Series 21MODEL B

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RA5)

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB)

FANUC PMCMODEL SB2

FANUC Series 21iMODEL A

FANUC Series 16MODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB2)

FANUC PMCMODEL SB3

FANUC Series 16MODEL A/B

FANUC Series 18MODEL B

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB3)

FANUC Series 16MODEL B

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB4)

FANUC Series 18MODEL B

FANUC PMCMODEL SB5

FANUC Series 16MODEL C

FANUC Series 18MODEL C

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB5)

FANUC Series 16iMODEL A

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RB6)

FANUC Series 16MODEL C

FANUC Series 18MODEL C

FANUC PMCMODEL SB7

FANUC Series 16iMODEL B

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC)

FANUC PMCMODEL SC3

FANUC Series 16MODEL A

FANUC Series 16MODEL A/B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC3)

FANUC Series 18MODEL B/C

FANUC PMCMODEL SC4

FANUC Series 16MODEL B/C

(Old Name : FANUC PMCMODEL RC4)

FANUC Series 18MODEL B/C

FANUC Series 15MODEL B

FANUC PMCMODEL NB2